Chapter Text
Name: (l/n) (f/n)
Bio:
You lived around the Heian era 1000 years ago. In a small town, countryside east in Heian-kyō (which in modern day is now Kyoto).
You are a gentle kind girl that everyone in town knew and loved. You were the only one born with (e/c) that no one has ever seen before. And beautiful (l/h) hair. They praised you and marked you as the most beautiful girl in the village. That made you the best they say.
Your family was neither rich nor poor, but a middle-class family who would get by. For something like simple fish and rice put on the table to eat, you would be happy with just that.
____
One day your father went out hunting and grabbed a large animal for your family to eat. You suddenly cried when you saw the dead animal.
Your father had to explain why he had to kill it. It was just a part of the circle of life. Humans hunt animals to survive if they wanted to eat, just as much as other animals had to.
You just wipe the tears away and smiled as you prayed. Thanking the animal for letting it become food for your family.
Your mother and father were confused, but just laugh and hug you lovingly.
That's not the only thing strange that happened to you. They have caught you one time bringing a bird back to life when it was dead. Talking to it as it let you pet them.
Even having a bunch of rabbits, squirrels, and deers come around you as you were foraging for flowers.
Your parents found it to be quite strange. But they just thought you were too good for this world. Your kindness brought even wildlife to your side.
That is until they caught you talking to something that was neither a person nor an animal. You grabbed their hands to show them, but when you did it was gone. The only thing you told them was that it was a small harmless creature.
Your mother didn't think anything else other than it is your imagination. Your father however was a bit worried.
You wore decent yukatas that your mother would buy. But on good days when your father earned a lot of money from his work. Your mother would let you go to the shops and let you pick out just one kimono.
But only on special occasions will you wear it. Your mother wouldn't want you to dirty something so nice.
You had a normal life throughout your years being a child. That is until people in your village have been hearing a word about an evil curse spirit.
A curse spirit so vile that it would kill and terrorize a village just for fun. Even force people to be his servants just to be killed later, and rape the women. This puts everyone in fear and on guard if encountering the beast. Especially your father.
People such as jujutsu sorcerers would try and exorcise or seal the beast. But many have failed and were killed in vain.
Villagers made sure to lock up early so they don't ever encounter the cursed spirit. They don't even let their children play outside on the outskirts of the woods.
Your parents made sure that you were kept inside. They thought you would bring attention to that monster.
Fear never came to you when you heard the news about the evil curse spirit roaming through Japan.
It made you curious to see it.
You never knew what fear felt like. It was something you just haven't experienced before. You were just so full of hope and life that people thought there may have been something wrong with you.
Or maybe brave, but who knew?
But truly there was something more than that. And that will even have jujutsu sorcerers catch their attention. Something that will pretty much change your ordinary life forever.
Notes:
The images of how the character looks is in my Wattpad platform.
(P.s) I hate Wattpad, it would just delete writer’s stories despite the rating they put. I had my books taken away because of them despite so much warnings about minors not interacting, but that’s obviously out of our hands once we post them, so it’s so frustrating that they take our hard work away.
Anyway I hope you enjoy this story and don’t forget to leave a comment if you’d like to tell me how it is! Love you guys, aight bye🩵
Chapter 2: Chapter 1
Summary:
“A miracle like you was born in this world”
Chapter Text
You were delivering sweets to your neighbor and the local front store owner. As thanks for helping your father build a small but decent bath house in your home.
No more long walks to the bath houses and back every single day now for you.
Everyone who was walking outside or hanging around storefronts, they all greet you happily. Everyone knew everyone in the village, so familiar faces weren't hard to pass by others.
You open the noren of the little shop. You were greeted by the owner's daughter.
"(Y/n)! What a surprise to see you" she bows.
"Akiko, it's good to see you. Is your father here?"
"Right now he's taking care of some business with someone at the moment"
You bring up the basket you were holding.
"Okay, well I just came to drop these off. As thanks for helping my dad with our bathhouse"
You pull out sweets that were wrapped in the cloth. Akiko happily takes it.
"I'll let him know"
You bow and leave the shop, but that is until Akiko calls out for you again.
"If you don't mind (y/n). Do you think we can chat a bit more? If you have time" she fidgets with her fingers.
"Yeah, sure"
You sit down on a chair while Akiko brings you some tea.
"What did you want to talk about?" You ask as you bring the tea to your lips.
"So I have good news. I'm getting married!" She says.
You look towards her and smile.
"Wow, that's amazing Akiko!"
"You know the boy at the wielding shop? He asked for my hand in marriage. I said yes!" She blushes and starts to swoon over the event.
"Did your dad approve it?" You ask.
Akiko nods.
"He did. Everything went well, and he will be able to provide for me. I won't have to work, but just care for our children" she happily says.
"That's great"
You were happy to see the people in your village get married. It was a celebration of young couples having a life together.
"What about you?"
"Huh? What about me?"
"Are you planning on getting married anytime soon?"
You laugh nervously.
"W-well...I'm not too sure yet"
Akiko gasps.
"Seriously (y/n)! You are the most beautiful girl in the village! Anyone would love to be with you. I've seen the guys gawk over you" she says.
You laugh.
"Yeah I know, it's pretty hard to ignore it"
"Your about to turn 18, (y/n), in about a year soon! I hope your father is gathering suitors for you"
You never actually thought of marriage for a long time. You weren't like the other girls who would be so excited and want to be wed sooner than later.
You've been so busy with helping your mom and dad with housework and foraging (at a certain distance) to sell for money, that you never had marriage in mind.
You only smile and grab Akiko's hand.
"Don't worry about it. I'm sure one day" you said.
Taking off you head to your neighbor's home and gave them your offerings. Curfew started to come as the sun was setting. You head home and was met with your mother cooking dinner.
"Welcome home," she says.
You take off your sandals and enter your home.
"Is dad not back yet?"
"He's off gathering some wood, he'll be back shortly"
Your mother takes off her kappogi and sets the food on the table. You clean up and head over to sit down.
"We'll wait for a moment till your father comes. In the meantime, how was the delivery?" She asks.
"It was good, I gave Akiko the sweets since her father wasn't there"
"Oh, what a sweet girl she is. I heard she's getting married"
You nod.
"She's excited"
"Which reminds me (y/n). You're turning 18 next year soon"
You look up to meet her eyes.
"Yeah"
"It's time that we find you a compatible suitor for you to marry"
This made you sigh and placed your hand under your chin for support.
"Mother no offense, but didn't we all discuss that I would train to be an Geisha?" You said.
"Yes, but that is if there aren't any good suitors for you. That would be the next plan"
Your parents wanted to make sure that you have a fulfilling life. Someone to take care of you and love you while having a lavish life. If you didn't find anyone suitable for you, then training you to become an Geisha was plan b.
However, at the end of the day, you still would get married to someone. The only difference Geishas are bought at a very high price. So marriage for you could take forever.
And you'd still have a nice life, and everyone would treat to you.
The women have to work their way up to be one, they at least will live a good life. But because of your beauty, they won't find it a problem for you to work your way up to the ranks.
This is all in terms of pleasing your parents. You would always please people more than yourself.
You weren't sure if that was good or bad. You just like to see people's smiles on their faces. Because it would at least make you happy in the end.
"Let's be patient. It's not until next year" your mother caresses your cheek. You look up to her, and the only thing you did was just smile.
"Yes Mother"
_____
After your father came back, you all ate dinner and soon went to bed. Your mother and father were asleep, while you couldn't.
You tossed and turned but you couldn't get any sleep. Getting up from bed, you look out the window. Feeling the urge to just go out at night and roam around the woods.
You didn't know why, you just wanted to. It's been long since you went to connect with nature. Ever since the news spread throughout the entire land about the evil curse spirit.
But you didn't care. Life was too short for anyone anyway to be stuck in one place, doing the same thing, over and over again for the rest of their life.
You put on your robes and quietly head out. You take a lamp with you and roam in the woods.
Within the woods, you were met with deers, fireflies, a flowing river, and beautiful flowers. You wished that you've brought your basket to pick some out.
As you were looking around you heard twigs snapping. Bringing your attention behind you, you see that something was rustling in the bush.
"Is someone there?"
The rustling stops.
"It's okay. I won't hurt you" You put on a weak smile as you wait for whatever came out.
What came out was a small little curse spirit creature. It didn't look harmful, but it didn't seem harmless either.
It kept its distance from you as it just keeps looking at you. Only to see what you'll do.
"Ahaha, you're just a curse spirit. Don't worry I won't hurt you. Are you lost? Or are you just like me, roaming around the woods?"
It didn't say anything or make any noise. It just looks at you. You look at it curiously and move forward slowly.
"Can I...pet you? Is that a thing you enjoy?"
It doesn't say a word other than signal you that you can.
You smile as your hand made contact with its head. Soon you felt a shockwave all over your body. You quickly move your hand away and stare at it.
"What...was that" you mumble.
You look up at the cursed spirit as if it was doing nothing. You smile slightly at it as you pick up your lamp.
"Uhm, I'm going now. It was nice meeting you" Walking away, you heard a voice.
"Warm"
You turn back.
"Excuse me?"
"You're...warm" it mumbles.
You smile and bow.
"Thank you! I'm glad you felt that way with me"
"Not safe...not safe...here"
"Huh?"
"Run...as you can...kill you"
What's it talking about?
Soon the cursed spirit went away. You didn't quite get its message other than to run away. It said it wasn't safe to be here, so you'll just take it as a signal to leave at once.
As you were walking back to the path of your home. You felt a dark presence. Something that almost made you get shivers down your spine. Almost.
You stop in your tracks and slowly turn to the corner of your right eye. You see a tall man. No, it didn't look like a man, but a spirit.
Tall and muscular, with two faces it seems. Markings on his body, four arms, and what could seem to be a mouth on his stomach but it was a bit too dark to see clearly of that.
His dark red eyes stared at you. He stared at you long enough hidden within the trees.
Any human would've been afraid. But for some reason, you weren't. If anything, you were fascinated. The Spirit himself questioned himself about you for that reaction.
"Wow. I haven't seen a cursed spirit like you before in my life" you say.
He doesn't say a word as he stares at you with discontent.
"It's okay. You don't have to be scared"
The nerve he felt when you told him that.
"Brat. I'm not afraid" he spits out. His deep voice booms.
"Then you can come on out"
He chuckles.
"Then you'll be afraid"
You smile as you raise the lamp to take a better look at him.
"No, I won't"
The spirit doesn't say a word as he moves forward. The size between you two was absolutely and terrifyingly different. He was bigger than you thought as he moved in close.
He smirks as he looks down at you.
"Are you afraid now?"
You hesitate for a moment but then spoke.
"What's your name?"
He scoffs.
"Ignorant woman. You don't deserve to know my name"
You look down at your feet.
"Forgive me. I don't mean to step out of line" you quietly say.
The curse spirit only looks at you and takes in your features. He won't say it out loud, but he truly thought you were a beautiful woman. But then again he had his fair share of women from other villages.
The problem was that he was never satisfied with any of them. He would just do whatever he wanted with them until he was bored and killed them.
They were all afraid, and it was nothing new to him in his eyes. They were just stupid sacrifices that villagers would give away to appease him.
But you seemed to be a different case. You're staring at him in awe. No fear was washing over you. This made him want to mess with you and make you fear him.
He thought if he could take you away and torture you, then you would know fear. Teach you a lesson for making a stupid decision in walking in the woods at night by yourself. That was your fault.
But something told him not to. For some strange reason, there was something inside you he shouldn't underestimate. It annoyed him as he couldn't figure out what.
He didn't know if you knew but he lets it go as he sighs.
"What a fucking pain" he mumbles.
You look at him.
"Huh?"
"Ryomen Sukuna" he says.
"That's your name?"
"Tch, hasn't your village told you any stories about me?"
It took a moment for you to think, then it clicks.
"Ah yes! They've told us stories about an evil curse spirit roaming and murdering villagers...! So it's you"
Sukuna looks at you like you were dumb.
"How amusing, do you want a reward? I'm amazed to see how you aren't afraid of my presence. I could kill you, you know"
You smile and raise a finger at him.
"But you're choosing not to. You could've killed me the moment you saw me. But you didn't"
"Stupid girl"
Maybe you were a smart woman in Sukuna's eyes. Level headed. Not like other women he's met.
"Can I...can I touch you?"
"What?"
"Your hand. May I touch your hand?"
Sukuna should have said no and sliced her in half. But he growls as he looks away, extending his hand for you to take. This isn't like him.
He wasn't sure what was going on with himself. He would never in a million years let anyone touch him. Again, there was something more to you than just an ordinary human.
You smile as you gently take his hand. Suddenly you feel his aura. His dark black aura embalmed his entire body. This was in fact Ryomen Sukuna.
An evil spirit inside out. Feeling his hand that was bigger than yours, you felt like you were in a trance.
Your (e/c) began to glow. Feeling his aura he suddenly feels yours and looks at you with your eyes glowing.
He quickly moves his hand away and stares at you with shock.
"What is this?" He says.
Your eyes stop glowing as you come back to the real world. You didn't seem to realize what you'd just done.
"Huh...oh I have to go, I've been out for too long! Uhm, I'll see you again maybe, Sukuna?" You wave to him as you run back home.
He should've killed you. Right then and there, he should have. It bothered him to not know why he didn't. Again something about you wasn't normal.
But he was going to find out, one way or another. If he can't be able to kill you, maybe there would be a chance to manipulate you and find out for himself.
He smirks at the idea.
Chapter 3: Chapter 2
Summary:
“For the first time, she felt her heart freeze inside their warm embrace”
Chapter Text
Next day you were tending to the crops. Your mother was doing house chores while your father was out working out on the fields.
After last night's event you didn't know whether to sneak out again to see Sukuna. Seeing him and coming back alive must've been pure luck.
All the stories that you've been told about him. But what was much to your surprise was him letting you go. From the looks of it, he was contemplating himself when you two touched hands.
When you touched each others hands, you felt a tingling sensation. It was if you felt your souls connected. You were lost in a trance, feeling like you were in another world.
You wondered if Sukuna felt the same too. It felt oddly good.
After thinking long and hard about it, you decided to see him again. But not without bringing him something. Maybe he won't be so grumpy if you brought him a peace offering.
But what exactly would he like? Looking around you see peaches from a tree. Maybe he would enjoy eating fruits. You question yourself for a moment if a curse spirit like him can eat.
You didn't bother and just took a full basket of them.
Once you were done tending to the crops, you wash up and head to town with your basket full of flowers to see your friend Akiko.
While walking, you've been hearing faint whispers of conversations from the locals.
"Did you hear, someone said that evil curse spirit has been spotted around this area"
"I've been hearing that sorcerers are about to travel here and hunt it down"
"That spirit will have us give up on our livestocks or worse!"
"Just keep your head down, and don't look at it"
You've been hearing gossip about Sukuna more lately in your town. It's true that you did spot him in your area in the woods.
But you never knew that he was going to stick around.
Once you made it to your friends home, you check and see if she was around. She was sitting on a chair, looking lost in thought.
"Hey Akiko" you greet her.
"Oh, hello (y/n)"
You take a seat next to her.
"You seem to have something on your mind"
She chuckles but still looks a bit sad.
"Yeah...it's just rumors have been getting around more and more that the evil spirit is coming here"
"Oh yeah. I've been hearing about it too"
Akiko looks at you with worry.
"Aren't you scared? I mean that beast could come any minute and just terrorize our village" she asks.
You take a moment and shrug.
"I don't really think of the bad. If anything, I have more hope that our people will be safe"
Akiko looks at you with awe and just softly chuckles as she shakes her head.
"I don't know how you do it (y/n). Honestly I'm jealous. I wish I can be like you. You're perfect"
Your smile fades.
"I...wouldn't say that"
"Come on, you saved a bird that was on the brink of death one time" she says.
"That was a long time ago. But that doesn't make me perfect"
"You're so loved by everyone in the village. I'm just surprised that they don't worship you. It's like you have mystical powers or something"
You turn away from her and just shake your head. Something about what Akiko said didn't sit right with you.
"I'm just like everyone else here. I'm no different and shouldn't be treated differently" you say sadly.
Akiko took notice.
"I'm sorry if my words offended you (y/n)"
Silence took over for just a moment until you spoke up again with a smile.
"How's the wedding coming along?"
Akiko gasps.
"That's right! Well it's going great. The preparations are almost done. I got my gown and everything!"
"That's great. I'm glad"
"Which reminds me!"
Akiko runs to the back and comes out with something wrapped in nice fabric.
"I want to give you this"
She unfolds it and you see that it was a flower ornament hairpin. It had gold and red colors on it. You've never gotten anything this beautiful before.
"Akiko. This is—"
"It's yours"
"Ah, I can't!"
"Please as a token for being my friend"
She puts it on your hair and looks at you with admiration.
"You look so beautiful"
She picks up a mirror and hands it to you. You see yourself in the mirror and see the ornament pinned in your hair.
You feel in love with it's colors and how it naturally looks within your hair.
"Thank you Akiko"
You rummage through your basket and picked up a couple of irises.
"Are these!"
"Irises. It means friendship"
Akiko grabs them and hugs you.
"Thank you (y/n)!"
_____
Walking back home, you see a couple of strange men along your path. They dressed a bit differently than any of the villagers you've known.
They were probably jujustu sorcerers.
Continuing to walk in your path, one spots you and calls out to you.
"Excuse me. Young lady"
You turn to meet them.
"Do you happen to have spotted any spirits in particular?"
"Oh, Uhm no. Not really" you lied.
The man takes one good look at you and walks up closer. He takes in your features to which was starting to almost creep you out.
"Uhm, is there something you need?" You ask.
He takes one last look at you in the eye than pulls back.
"No. My apologies"
The mystery sorcerer walks away along with his group.
What a strange crowd. You thought.
Walking back home, you heard your parents talking in the other room.
"I just don't think it's safe" your father says.
"We can't keep her locked in the house forever because of some evil spirit!" Your mother says.
You were eavesdropping as you hear their conversation about you. You made sure not to make any noise so they wouldn't spot you.
"Can't you see that sorcerers are roaming our village? It means that thing is here. And it only takes what pleases it's eyes! What if that spirit takes (y/n)!" Your father says.
"And what if it doesn't!"
"It'll kill her!"
"No it won't, stop talking like that"
"You don't understand Hina. Curses aren't to be trusted" he grabs hold of your moms shoulders.
"I trusted you" she whispered.
What...
"That's...that's different. Look if you want her to roam around the village freely then fine. But she comes back to the house no later when the sun starts to set"
"Fine"
Your mother departs your father as she walks towards the sliding door. You scramble your things and walk away fast.
Thoughts were running through your head. You couldn't understand what your mother meant that she trusted her father. What did it mean.
You go to your room and put your things down. While doing so, you heard your mom call out to you from your door.
"Come in"
Your mother comes in with a smile.
"(Y/n), how was your day?"
"It was fine..."
"Good. That's good" your mom sees your basket full of flowers.
"I see you've been picking all kinds of flowers. These are lovely" she analyzes them.
"Yes"
Your mom's eyes soon drifts towards your other basket full of peaches.
"Oh my. You seem to have picked a lot of peaches. We can make dinner with these"
"O-oh those aren't for everyone. I mean...you can take just some if you like" you said.
Your mother just hums and covers it with the cloth again.
"Your father and I have been talking"
"Oh yeah?"
"And him and I have come to an agreement that you will be back home when the sun starts to set. Now with the monster roaming around this area, everyone is more cautious" she strictly says.
You couldn't argue with that. Your parents were only trying to do what's best for you.
"Yes mother" you said. Your mom comes up to you and gives you a hug and kiss on the forehead.
You still kept a stoic face.
"Mother"
"Yes dear?"
"You and father...you two wouldn't keep secrets, right? From me at least?" You asked. Your mother looked a bit disbelief but answered.
"If we kept a secret from you. It's all to protect you. For your sake" she says moving strands of hair from your face.
You didn't need to say anything more as she pulls you in for a hug. Hearing your parents conversation was enough to know something was already wrong.
But you thought that they're only trying to protect you so they wouldn't see you hurt. That's understandable, but you aren't a little girl anymore. You could handle a little truth.
Because you'd at least understand and move on from it.
Just keep smiling. Look happy. Feel positive.
The problems are tomorrows worries. Even then it will all be okay.
Just feed yourself that.
_____
"She is the one!"
"How are you certain?"
"I saw it in her eyes. She is no ordinary human"
"The prophecy in the scrolls said a woman with (e/c) who is the light of hope, will bring everyone together and peace to the jujustu world"
"And darkness shall have no power over the light of life"
"So I am certain that it is her. And she will stop this evil once and for all"
The elders were gathered around, talking about their plans to seal Sukuna.
"When shall we take her?"
"We must obtain the girl as soon as possible. We have no time to waste"
Chapter 4: Chapter 3
Summary:
“The feelings of “love” for each other are mutual. But that doesn’t mean it’s an equal amount of “love”
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
"Sukuna...Sukuna are you here?" You whisper.
Outside in the woods at dark, you were holding a lamp to see while carrying your basket full of peaches.
Your parents were asleep as you sneaked out.
Waiting for a couple more minutes, you started to think that he wasn't around. Maybe he just went somewhere else.
"Dumb girl, you're back again?" You heard a familiar voice.
Turning around you see him standing above you in all his glory. You smile.
"Sukuna! I thought I wouldn't see you"
"And I didn't expect a little girl like you to come back"
Little?
Sukuna takes a seat on the soft grass and looks out towards the river with boredom. You hesitate but scooted your way to him.
"I brought you some peaches. I'm not sure if you require food to eat, but I thought why not" you hand him the basket.
Sukuna doesn't budge as he just looks at your basket and then at you. You just move it away and placed it down on the floor.
You just rub your head as you can already tell that this was an awkward start. Sukuna sees your reaction and just chuckles.
He slowly grabs a peach and takes a bite out of it. Looking back you see him chewing on the fruit. This makes you blush happily as he accepted your gift.
"I'm glad you like it"
"Tch don't get carried away, woman"
You scoot a bit close as you were face to face with him.
"Sorry. I just had to see you again. I don't know what it is, but I felt like we had a nice conversation"
Confusion was plastered on Sukuna's face. He didn't understand how threatening to kill you was a nice conversation.
Then again you weren't scared and knew he wasn't going to. It pissed him off how you were right.
"Whatever. Seeing how close and eager you are towards me, I'll let you off the hook this one time, and permit you to speak your mind" he says.
You chuckle.
"So silly. Well, my day wasn't anything unordinary. Just meeting my friend and chores" you said.
"What life," Sukuna says with no interest.
"But don't tell anyone...I did eavesdrop on my parents" you said looking nervous.
Sukuna didn't see what the big deal was for that. But looking at your expression, he could see that you have never done anything bad in your life.
You were this pure white flower swaying in its way near an embodiment of evil.
This made him want to mess with her even more.
He smirks.
"You? Someone who wouldn't even hurt an ant, eavesdropping?" He sarcastically says.
"Can you blame me!? I just had to, my parents were saying things about keeping me locked up in my household. Well, they were going to. But I have a curfew now, so I have to get home earlier than before" you said.
Sukuna just hums and looks out the distance. He puts his hand under his chin for support. He had no interest in hearing your everyday life story.
He was never interested in any human's life. There wasn't anything amusing about it.
Sukuna just zoned out while you kept talking. That is until you said something that brought his attention.
"I think...I think my father might be a cursed spirit" you whisper.
Sukuna looks at you with curiosity. He didn't want to believe it immediately, hearing how dumb that sounded.
A human and a cursed spirit can't be together. It's just asinine.
"You're a fool. A curse spirit and a human cannot be together"
"My father told me that curses can't be trusted, and my mother told him that she trusted him. What does that tell you?"
Sukuna didn't say a word and was lost in thought about that. It can't be true. But with what he felt from you. The feeling of something abnormal, that it could be.
You would be the manifestation of a half-human half-cursed spirit.
Sukuna looks into your (e/c) eyes. Something he has never seen from anyone in his entire life.
"If that were true then how would you feel?"
You look down in wonder. You felt a bit contemplative.
"I..."
"If anything why would they keep you from the truth? If you were their oh-so-loving daughter, then why hide something that is a part of your life? I would be mad, wouldn't you?" Sukuna says.
If there was any way of manipulating you, then this would be a chance to do so.
"My mother told me that she and my father loves me and wants to keep me safe," you say with confidence.
Sukuna scoffs.
"Love stands as an illusion to fool the minds of others. If anything, lying is much easier to gain the upper hand" Sukuna says.
"That's not true! Love is comforting and reassures people. I will prove you wrong for that"
"Woman. Know your place" Sukuna threatens.
"I don't mean to come off as aggressive, just...may I demonstrate to you please?"
Sukuna stays silent for a while and just grunts.
"Fine. You can amuse me. But don't expect it to work" he says.
You blush and smile at him. Quickly you give his large body a hug, which startles Sukuna. He would've slashed her right then and there. But he didn't.
He felt some kind of strong energy.
He then felt a soft lip touch his cheek.
"There. Let that be the first step of displaying love to you"
"This woman..."
_____
Days turned into weeks, as weeks turned into two months. You've spent most of your time doing what you normally did.
As time was ticking when you saw your mother and father make a list of all the compatible suitors for you.
Your 18th birthday was almost here and you wished it didn't come any sooner.
Just thinking about how you'll be bound to being a housewife for the rest of your days. There was no excitement there.
When two months passed, Akiko finally got married. It wasn't very ceremonial, but Akiko was happy enough to have a husband.
A brief fact about being married in this era of society. Marriage was focused on a system of ranks. And the purpose is that women's job is to produce children who would inherit the highest possible rank from the best-placed lineage.
And Akiko couldn't wait to have children.
Things are becoming different around here . You thought.
You've also been sneaking out and visiting Sukuna as much as you can. You realized that he has been moving around the area. You didn't know what he's been doing to be moving much.
But every time you visit him, he'd always end up at the same spot you'd meet him at. Every time you ask him what he's been doing, he would say nothing and look straight ahead.
Of course, you weren't dumb. There was something he was keeping you from. But you knew an evil curse wasn't going to give in that easily. Especially him.
For the last two months, you still haven't figured him out. The only thing you have been trying to teach him is love. But even that he's so persistent.
Sukuna even laughs at your failed attempts to convince him about love. But you didn't waver. This only made you more determined.
The light in your eyes is something that always throws him off.
"What an eyesore," he thought.
He couldn't kill you for some reason and now he has to deal with your constant visits.
But he also had a goal. He needed to manipulate you, so he can unlock these hidden secrets about you.
But every time he tries, he ends up failing. Whenever he asks you a question, you turn away from it by getting distracted or turning the conversation into something else.
Were you doing this on purpose? Sukuna doubts that you knew his intentions. He even thinks that you were naive about what you are.
So he couldn't understand why he wasn't making any progress.
"My 18th birthday is almost here," you say sadly.
Sukuna continues to look ahead.
"You don't seem so happy about that"
You smile and sigh. Walking over to patches of flowers, you pick at them.
"Not really. My mother and father found some suitors for me to see, but I just don't know if I want to get married so soon"
"Then don't"
You chuckle.
"It's not that easy. I was hoping to be a Geisha if my parents didn't find any suitors for me"
"Tch, what's the difference? You'd still be wed off. Stupid girl"
"Yeah...I know. But that would still give me more years of freedom"
"Your freedom would be stuck inside a house for the rest of your days. The only time you'll have outside is if humans idolize you. How annoying"
You stop picking at the flowers and just look down with sadness.
Sukuna for the past couple of months has made you experience all kinds of emotions you never thought you had.
It was pretty nice exploring it. But also a struggle. Sadness, anger, or fear was all he knew when responding.
Nothing good ever comes out of his mouth. And yet you still look up to the brighter side.
You still had a lot to teach him about love.
"Sukuna...what do you think I should do?" You ask. You didn't understand what good would come out of asking him that. But you wanted to hear his response.
His eyes look at you for a while then back ahead.
"Run away. Run away and never return. Leave no trace of your existence and everyone will have forgotten about you" he says.
You continue to look at the flowers in wonder.
"That would be best, huh"
It was silent for a moment. Nothing but crickets singing as the wind softly blows.
Sukuna waits for an answer. Thinking if you were going to heed his suggestion. Did you want to run away? If you do, he could exert his next plan of action.
And that was you traveling with him as a servant. While being a servant, he will uncover what you are.
You look at him and what soon surprised him was a smile on your face.
"But you know I won't do that!"
Sukuna was now confused.
"Because if I do, then my family would be really sad, I wouldn't know where I'd stay...plus I won't get to see you often"
Sukuna looks at you with awe and confusion. He grunts and looks away.
"Foolish woman. What makes you think I care" he mumbles.
"I think you do" you whisper.
You get up from the ground and walk towards him. Without him looking you hug him gently. Your hands so wrapped around him, you caress his hair and take in the moment of bliss.
Sukuna didn't say a word, nor did he stop your actions. He didn't understand what was going on with him, but he was just letting it happen.
Was your "love" working on him? No that's just impossible. It takes more than that.
"Sukuna...I don't know your intentions, or what your end goals are. But all I know is that I'm happy to make an effort in having you open up to me more. Even if it's small talk" you whisper.
Your eyes were closed as you take in this moment.
Sukuna chuckles.
"You have no idea what you are talking about"
"I know you're an evil curse. But that doesn't mean you can't change" Your eyes were closed as you take in this moment.
This suddenly gave Sukuna an idea.
"(Y/n). You said that you can't escape from marriage, yes?"
You hum and nod.
Sukuna grabs your chin and tilts your head to look at him.
"Then give me your hand in marriage"
You blush a bright shade of red across your face. You couldn't believe what you just heard.
Ryomen Sukuna wanted to marry you. You wanted to say no, but something was pulling to say yes.
"I...I don't know"
"If you become my wife, I will let you roam free and explore the lands. You just need to do as I say"
He rubs your cheek and looks at you want.
This was also your ticket out of being stuck as an ideal housewife. You grab his hand and take it in yours.
"I'm guessing you're expecting a yes. But I'm afraid you still have a lot to learn about love Sukuna" you say.
Sukuna sighs in annoyance.
"You can continue to teach me while we are married. And I will show you how much I've learned from it" he says lowly.
Sukuna almost wipes his smirk off his face as he can see your face become very serious.
He keeps forgetting that you aren't a completely dumb woman. You did have some brains when you aren't being childish.
"Okay. I will be your wife" you said.
Sukuna gives you a devilish smile.
"Good"
"But let me exchange my vows to you" you conclusively say.
He sighs.
"Fine"
"If for any reason our bond together is broken. If faith ever parts us and we are not meant to be. Then I will no longer be bound by you just as you are no longer bound by me" you said.
"What kind of vow is that?" Sukuna thought.
"Okay. Now your turn!"
"I already told you. You just need to do as I say" he says.
You nod.
You had no idea what you'd gotten yourself into.
Notes:
What do you guys think of the reader and sukuna’s interactions?
Thank you for the support love you beauties, aight bye!🩵
Chapter 5: Chapter 4
Summary:
“The wheels of fate that in no time at all, started to turn for her”
Chapter Text
Today was the day.
Today was your 18th birthday. And you were ready for what the day had in store for you.
Your parents greeted you with gifts and a nice meal to celebrate. On top of that, they told you that the suitor they found will be coming over this afternoon.
But what they didn't know was that you were planning on leaving soon to be with Sukuna. Since you agreed to marry him, you had to leave home to be with him. It was a sacrifice you had to make.
While your parents were out, they left you your kimono gown for the ceremony. You thought that it would be a good time to wear it since you were about to leave.
You wanted to give Sukuna a surprise on how beautiful you look. Would he care? You hoped so.
After putting it on, it fits you nicely. The embroidery of the gown was beautiful, along with the patterns to it.
While admiring the work you heard a familiar voice.
Sliding open the door, it was your friend Akiko. She looked at you with astonishment.
"Wow (y/n), you look so beautiful!"
"Thank you"
"Looks like you're excited to get married after all"
You only smile.
"Yes...it's very exciting for me"
"Now that you'll be wed, you'll have all the boys stop looking at you with perversion" she nudges you.
You look at her and see her growing belly. You see that she's pregnant, so you change the subject to that.
"So I see you're pregnant," you said
"Oh yeah! Finally, me and Chiba are expecting a boy. I hope it's a boy" She rubs her stomach.
You eye her stomach, but at the same time looked around to see if your parents were coming back. For now, they were still out. You had to hurry and leave as soon as you can.
"Listen, Akiko, I have to get ready. But I hope you have a wonderful day" you smile.
"Huh? What are you talking about? I came so I can help you. You're not seriously planning on doing this alone, are you? Even I didn't prep myself alone" she says as she comes in.
But you stop her midway.
"I-it's fine. It's not a lot of work. Honest"
"Now what do we have here?" You suddenly heard your mother.
Looking behind Akiko, you see your mother and father walking together with a boy who you recognize to be a merchant who's family owns a drapery shop far South of Heian-kyō.
Merchants are traditionally at the bottom of the social strata, but they are one of the wealthiest and most influential.
"(Y/n), you shouldn't wear your gown until the ceremony. Now take that off, I want to introduce you to Kanji. He always comes by and sells wonderful draperies for everyone here in town"
The boy name Kanji bows and looks at you as his face is flushed. He was admiring your beauty. But you didn't think any of it. Your mind right now was fully focused on leaving home to see your husband.
When your parents walked inside with Kanji behind, he held your hand and gives you a bright smile.
"I am so honored to be in the presence of such a beautiful woman, (l/n)-san" he gently says.
He was charming, and you felt bad to leave him empty-handed. But you can't keep Sukuna waiting.
"Thank you" you mumble.
"(Y/n), what is this letter?" Your father says as he held up a scroll.
Oh no, I forgot the letter!
It was your goodbye letter. To let your parents know that you found a husband and were about to leave without a trace.
"You already found a man? And you are running away with him?!"
"I-it's not running!"
"Then what is this!"
Your mother takes the letter and reads it. She gasps and looks at you.
"Is this true (y/n)?"
"I..."
"Sorry to disrupt everyone. I hope this isn't a bad time"
You look back and see a couple of men in white gowns. They don't look to be from around the village. But by the looks of it, they are sorcerers.
Your father started to sweat.
"We're looking for (l/n) (y/n)" an old man says.
You raise your hand.
"Uhm, that would be me"
The old man comes closer to you and analyses you from head to toe. He hums in amusement.
"I see...so the prophecy is true"
Your mother intervenes.
"Excuse me, but do you men need anything?"
The old man looks back at your mother.
"Truly you are this girl's parents. We would like to have a word with you"
Your friend and suitor leave while the sorcerers came into your home. You had no idea what was going on.
_____
"She has to leave home with you people?"
"Yes, she wields a powerful energy that can stop the king of curses once and for all" a sorcerer says.
You all were sitting in the living room as they discuss the situation. You were nervous and worried about what was going to happen to you.
"How...for how long will she be gone?"
The sorcerers stayed stoic the whole time as they answer many of your parents' questions.
"Forever"
"What!"
"No absolutely not!" Your father interferes.
"That is not a choice you two can make. She must fulfill her duties to stop the monstrosity roaming through this land"
Your father stands up.
"Even if it's not our choice, it is a choice my daughter should make! You can't force someone to do your work! She's not a sorcerer!"
"It is written. You can't stop faith from what is already sealed" they say.
Your father grits his teeth.
"You can't do this! You will leave my home right now!"
"Sorcerers like us do not take orders from curses like you"
Your father gasps and takes a step back in fear. Your mother cups her mouth as she looks in fear. Tears start to swell out of her eyes.
She didn't know what was worse. Losing her daughter, or sorcerers finding out that her husband's a cursed spirit. Either way, she could lose both.
Or she and her husband could be executed while their daughter was taken away.
"Of course, we all assumed that it was a myth to hear that a human and a curse getting together. But it seems that we were mistaken. And here is the proof of it"
The elders look towards you. And right now you were in your little world. Confused, scared, worried. All the emotions ran through you as you were battling with what to say.
"We will not resort to punishment upon you two, but we come with offerings for giving us a savior. The young lady is treated as the highest title in jujutsu society. We assure you if anything she is worshipped as the light against darkness"
One of the elders pulls bags full of yen in thanks and also trade to hand you over.
You look over to your father as he looks conflicted and didn't know what to say.
"Thank you. But again this is my daughter's decision"
A sorcerer scoffs.
"She has no—"
He was cut off by the other and looked at you.
"What do you say lady (l/n)?"
What is there to say? One day you were deemed to be this normal girl living a normal life, to the next being some kind of deity.
No. You were half curse and half human. But even after knowing what you are, you still lived like everyone else. If you end up going with those sorcerers, your life will never be the same ever again.
And you'll never see your loved ones ever again. But if you don't go, then people will continue to die because of Sukuna.
Sukuna. You and he agreed to be husband and wife. But I'd that going to have to end? Maybe if you just ask him to stop the killings, will he listen to you? You're his wife after all.
This was all just so frustrating.
"We need an answer miss"
Snapping out of your thoughts, you think long and hard to finally conclude.
"I come to my decision"
Everyone's eyes were on you as you answered.
"I decided that...I will go with them"
"(Y/n)" You cut your father off.
"I don't mind it. If it means bringing peace to everyone. Besides...I don't think I have much of a choice. I was born for it, and I guess it's what this prophecy has said. It's written"
There was that hint of sadness.
The sorcerers stand up.
"Good. I assure you lady (l/n), you will have the most extensive training to master your powers. Your curse energy is by far the strongest we can feel. You just need to know how to use it"
You nod. The sorcerers were discussing with your parents what was going to happen to you, but you didn't hear any of it.
Everything was muffled as you started to think about everyone you'll miss. Not seeing Sukuna for a long time until you meet again. And that next time was going to be sealing him.
But more importantly, you wondered how he'd feel that you were taken by sorcerers that wanted to kill him. Will he hate you?
There was no backing out of it.
"Lady (l/n)"
"Oh...what?"
"I said this is Tengen. He will be guiding you through your journey, and teach you everything you need to know"
You were met by a tall man who seems to look normal and humble.
He bows.
"It is an honor to be present by your grace"
You nod.
"Alright...uhm, I'm sorry but may I please say my goodbyes before I go. Please"
The elders nod.
You just felt a wave of sadness at the moment. You were about to leave everyone that you know. And what about Sukuna?
What do you tell him when this is happening? If you do see him again, will you have to exorcise him? The elders mentioned that you were the light against darkness.
So if there was anything to understand there, it's your job to do so.
You come up to your parents and grabbed their hands.
"(Y/n)...please don't go" your mother whispers. Tears were coming out of her eyes.
"I have to mother"
"If you go you will be bound by them for the rest of your days," your father says.
You give a sad smile and look at him.
"I wouldn't know about that. But you two have been protecting me for years. It's time for me to do the same"
You kiss their cheeks and hug them. As you parted you asked the elders if you could take your things.
They nod. So you take scrolls and letters that your friends wrote to you, a painting of your family to remember them by, and everyday clothes.
As you come out, the sorcerers escort you out of your home. They give you to Tengen to be responsible and lead you back.
"This will be a two-day journey back to the temples, but I will make sure you are well secured," Tengen says.
You nod. Looking back you wave goodbye.
On your journey, Tengen tells you all kinds of things you'll be learning. How curse energy is produced, how domain expansions are powerful, etc., etc.
It was all so boring for you to hear. As a woman who just turned 18 on her birthday, this isn't much of a birthday present.
While Tengen rambles, he calls out your name.
"(L/n)...lady (l/n)"
You snap out of your thought.
"Huh?"
"We will be arriving at Kamigamo Jinja Shrine in case you were wondering," he says.
"Oh, okay"
It was silent along the journey. You didn't know what to say to a man that doesn't look like he had an exciting life.
"You have something to say," Tengen says.
You look away from his face quickly and keep looking forward.
The blush on your face from embarrassment.
"I, uh. Well I don't really"
"Are you sure?"
"Well. I mean, today...this day was supposed to be special. Memorable...I guess getting married and becoming a wife of a merchant" you say unamused with the last part.
You leave the part out about having to already be married to Sukuna. If the sorcerers found out about that, then hell will freeze over.
"I see"
That's it. He wasn't much of a talker than you hoped for. You pout as you look straight ahead. But your mind wondered if Sukuna was expecting you.
"I know it's hard to believe that you were chosen for this. But I assure you that it won't be so bad" he says. He at least tries to comfort you. If that was his way of comfort.
You only smile.
"It just seems like a lot to take in one day. To have so many people count on me to stop evil. I'm not some kind of deity"
You try not to show it, but Tengen didn't miss hearing the hint of sadness in your voice.
"If there was any way to make you feel better lady (l/n)—"
"And please. Please! Stop calling me with such formalities. I would just appreciate it if you just call me by my name"
"...If that's what you wish (l/n)"
Along the long journey, no words were exchanged. It was quiet and peaceful until you two encounter a cursed spirit by the open road.
You pointed out with exciting curiosity.
"I wonder what that spirit is doing!"
Tengen hums as he puts his hand on his chin.
"Let this be your first lesson"
Chapter 6: Chapter 5
Summary:
“She wanted to understand him, but in the end she didn’t know a thing”
Chapter Text
Tengen exorcises the spirit. How he did it left you confused and worried.
"Why'd you do that?"
"A curse spirit isn't always friendly to people (l/n)"
"But it wasn't doing anything"
"Sometimes we have to exorcise it when it does become a threat to others. You'll learn more about it all in the temple" he says.
Tengen continues walking and you just follow. This whole idea was still new to you and you still didn't know how to feel about it.
As you two continue walking you see a sweet shop. Your stomach started grumbling and you just couldn't help but crave sweets.
"Tengen look!" You pointed.
"Buy me some sweets please!" You plead.
Tengen looks over at you confused.
"What? No, we aren't stopping for that"
You groan.
"Come on! We've been walking for about a day. We've been at a rest inn once throughout this journey"
"To rest but after that, we kept going"
Tengen continues to walk, but you had an idea he couldn't refuse.
"As your lady of jujutsu society, I order you to buy me sweets. If not I will tell the elders how you disobeyed me" you say.
Tengen stops in his tracks and sighs.
"Fine. But only this once" he gives you some yen to pick and choose what you want.
You come out of the shop with mochis and senbei (rice crackers). Humming in delight as you eat them.
Honestly, this was the first time Tengen has ever seen you genuinely happy. At least for the moment.
Coming closer to the destination, you see red pillars and buildings so tall. Trees that are bright green and others that adorn white petals.
It was all very beautiful and sacred. And not only that, it seemed hidden away from everything else. No regular civilian would notice it.
Soon you were greeted by many officials that were bowing to you. Like down to the floor.
You blush and raised your hands, you didn't want them to go that far as something like that. But Tengen told you that this was just a minor action.
Everything else will be more of a headache once you settle in the temple.
The servants grab your things and guide you to a room at the top of the building.
"A bath will be provided to you shortly lady (l/n)" a servant says.
"Oh okay...where is Tengen?" You asked.
"Master Tengen is busy talking with the officials at the moment"
You nod.
Looking around your room, it was very spacious. Not even your old room from back home was this big. You get to see the view of a garden.
It had drawers, a huge size bed, a table, and fancy silk that adorns your bed. And you can see that you were left with fancy clothes that even a ruler would wear.
It was all something you never expected to be given to you in such a short amount of time in your life.
It was like you were living a different life now. You hear a knock again and the door slides open, revealing a servant again.
She bows.
"Lady (l/n), your warm bath is ready. I will escort you" she says. She guides you as she picks up the clothes that were settled on your bed.
Along the way you see how big the temple is, decorations everywhere, and items that you were sure that sorcerers have used.
The servant slide opens the door and takes you to an outside bath house. You were in awe of how big it was.
As you remove your clothes, the servant interrupts you and does it herself. You were startled at first but you guess it was her job.
You blush feeling just a bit embarrassed.
The servant smiles.
"I will be here if you need anything my lady" She then leaves and you were left alone in the bath.
You wash up from all the dirt and grime from your travel. You look up and reminisce about your old life. You almost fell into tears when you already missed your parents.
And you didn't know if Sukuna was wondering about your disappearance. You just hope he didn't take it the wrong way, there was just a change of plan.
But that still meant that you were his wife. That for sure was agreed upon. Once you washed up, the servant dries you up and helped put on your clothes.
The servant guides you to the living quarters outside the temple. Every official was there as they bowed down to your presence.
"(L/n) (y/n), it is truly you in the flesh," the elder says as he takes in your appearance.
"You're even more beautiful in person than what scriptures said," one says.
The stares were getting a bit more uncomfortable the moment you stood for long. You clear your throat and spoke.
"Uhm...was there something you wanted to say to me?"
"Oh yes! As you know, you were chosen to clear the jujutsu society from darkness. You have become a deity to everyone here. Which means you have all of our respect. Whatever you say, we will do. But because you are new to these discoveries, we have some honored scholars to help you understand and teach you how to control your unspeakable power"
You wished to just roll your eyes at his long formal speech. Something that is over the top would have children bored out of their minds.
The elder brings up a couple of people who you assumed will be teaching you throughout your whole life.
Some looked scary while others looked okay. You didn't see Tengen though.
"Now these people will be your teachers throughout—"
"Excuse me!"
"Y-yes my lady"
"I don't see Tengen in the group"
Some people from the background mutter.
"Well he is handling other important matters"
"Even more important than me?" You asked.
The elder startles himself when you said that. Wiping off the sweat from his face.
"Heavens no! Nothing is more important than you my grace"
"Then I would wish to have only Tengen teach me everything there is"
"Are you sure my lady? We have exceptional people picked for you here"
You smile and nod.
"I'm sure! Besides he was the one who escorted me all the way here"
Not everyone expected you to have this bubbly nature radiating from you. Like a child in a woman's body. No, you were just playful and excited to just see Tengen again.
The elders called him in to take care of you. You were his responsibility now.
_____
You were in your room, smiling and jumping around. Your servant looks at you with awe as you do these things. She has never seen a deity act so playful.
You stop and look at her, she turns her head away quickly with a blush on her face. You smile and walk up to her.
"Sorry if I was acting weird. I just can't wait to see Tengen" you say.
Your servant acknowledges you.
"I am very happy for you lady (l/n)"
It was silent. You look at the girl who's been taking care of you so far since you got here.
"What's your name?" You ask.
The girl jumps and was sweating bullets as she fidgets with her fingers.
"M-my name is not important my lady. I am but a low servant" she stumbles her words.
You laugh at how cute she was.
"Who told you that? If I'm going to be here forever, I might as well need to know people here"
The girl's cheeks flush and looks down to the floor.
"My name is Miyabi" she whispers.
"Miyabi huh? Well, it's a beautiful name. How old are you Miyabi?"
"15"
"Whoa! That's so young!"
Miyabi laughs.
"My family has served the elders and their clan for a long time. It's normal to us. I've been serving longer than this" she says.
"Do you ever wish to do something later on in life?"
"Huh?"
"Like...travel far, establish a business like opening a bakery shop, oh maybe a hot spring inn!"
Miyabi looks at you with confusion.
"Forgive me your grace but...I don't think I know what you mean"
"Oh...that's okay"
You guess Miyabi didn't have any dreams she wanted to pursue other than serving people. You wondered if that's all she knew how to do.
The door slides open and you see Tengen come in. His arms crossed in his kimono as usual.
"Dismissed"
Miyabi bows and takes her leave.
Tengen walks in closer as he bows to you. You do the same.
"The elders told me that you wanted only me to teach you everything?"
You nod.
"That's right!"
"I don't quite understand?"
"Well, I just thought you would be a good teacher. And out of everyone here, you're the most bearable. The only one I know the most so far in this temple, who won't be afraid of what they say to me or act differently towards me. Just cause I'm some deity or whatever" you mumble.
"It looks like you were making friendly conversation with that servant of yours"
"Oh yeah, Miyabi! She's a nice girl. Sadly, she doesn't have any aspirations other than being a servant to these people though"
Tengen hums.
"Sometimes families dedicate themselves more to what they were called to do. So they don't have time for other things but serve higher ups"
"I guess so"
Tengen escorts you to a garden outside of the temple. You gasp and smile brightly at seeing so many flowers, trees, and shrubs that have been planted and nourished.
"This garden is amazing!"
"This is where you will be learning and studying all that I will be teaching you"
You get motivated as you couldn't wait to see what Tengen will teach you. Maybe a super cool curse technique that will blow everyone away?
Maybe—
"Here's your lesson for today" Tengen hands you scrolls.
"Scrolls?"
"You will be reading 3 scrolls today about curse spirits, curse energy, and curse techniques. You will start with the basics. Do you know how to read?" he says.
You groan as you look at the pile you were holding.
"Yes, I do. But I thought we were going to learn the advanced stuff..."
"Even great sorcerers had to learn the basics (l/n). You have great power within you, but you don't know how to control it yet"
"Then why not just teach me how to control it then?"
"First you need to learn about the basic principles first to get a better understanding of what you're dealing with. Alright then, I will see you in a week"
A week?!
"W-wait a minute! Why so long?"
"Because those scrolls take time to understand. After a week, we meet back here and you will explain to me what you've learned" he says.
"And after that?"
"I will get to that when we meet again. Dismissed" he walks away, leaving you in awe.
You groan and carry the scrolls back to your room.
"I can't believe I got to do some reading..."
You take the first scroll and open it.
"So many words..." you grumble.
Your door slides open, revealing Miyabi bringing tea to you.
"I brought you tea to help with your studies, lady (l/n)" she says.
She puts it down on your dresser.
"Thank you, Miyabi" you start your reading.
Reading about curse spirits first, and for a while now it was silent as you can only hear the birds singing.
Your eyes slowly look back and you can see Miyabi just standing and waiting for any order you have for her.
A smile creeps up on your face as you look back at her.
"Can you imagine reading all these scrolls in a week?" You ask.
"I-I can imagine it, if you would like me to my lady," she says.
This made your smile go away as you just sigh and look back at your scrolls again. Miyabi's smile also goes away and just looks back.
"Do you want to read something while you're just standing there Miyabi? It could be more fun to have another person read with me" you ask.
Miyabi hesitates but answers.
"Forgive me lady (l/n). But I don't know how"
You get up from your bed.
"If you like I can teach you!"
Miyabi waves her hands at you.
"No, no! You shouldn't! I don't want to be a burden to you!"
You laugh.
"You won't be a burden! How about once I'm done with my studies, I'll teach you how to read and write!" You say.
"My lady..."
"And stop calling me that. Can't you see I'm trying to be your friend? Just skip the formality and call me (l/n)"
"(L-l/n)?"
"Or (y/n) it doesn't matter to me!"
Miyabi couldn't believe her ears as she heard all this. She didn't think of the deity to be like this.
She always thought to be a powerful and serious god. But you're just...you.
She blushes and just giggles.
"You're so wonderful"
_____
Back to somewhere in a village being terrorized.
Sukuna sat in boredom while covered in blood. He had his head resting on his hand while in thought, as the rippling screams of help were heard in the background.
"Uraume"
"Yes, master Sukuna"
"How long has it been"
"It's been a couple of days now my lord"
Sukuna sighs as he rubs his chin.
"So it seems those sorcerers took her"
He groans, feeling annoyed.
"What a pain"
"Shall I go retrieve her?"
"No. She'll be back. Our paths will cross again. Besides, she is always happy to see her husband again" he smirks.
Uraume couldn't understand what Sukuna saw in that woman. Sukuna didn't kill her the moment they met, but he also felt a great immeasurable power in her.
Sukuna must've valued her for a reason. And might probably use her for his evil intentions.
"Where's Kanzaki?" Sukuna asks.
"Right here my lord"
Out of nowhere, a woman in a battle robe which is made out of cloth and animal hide. She was on one knee as she lowers her head out of respect.
She was a beautiful woman, but just like Uraume, she was a cursed spirit who has a hunger for human flesh.
Truly a beauty for beasts.
"Have you found any survivors left"
"Just the ones slowly dying, but nothing more my king. I've sniffed out the area" she says.
"Good. You have my permission to feed on the ones clinging to life"
The woman nods and scurries off to find the fresh meats.
Between Uraume and Kanzaki, she had the most promise of skills when fighting sorcerers. Sukuna trained her in exchange for serving him forever. Even giving her life to him.
Uraume and Kanzaki were the only loyal servants he had.
"If I may lord Sukuna, but what does that woman hold that's so important to make her your wife?" Uraume asks.
"She seems to hold great power that I, unfortunately, can't understand just yet. I can't even kill her without something holding me back. But if I can use her, I can be the most unstoppable force. That's why having her as my wife, she's bound to do what I say. I made that clear to her have I not?"
Sukuna looks ahead as he's consumed in his thoughts again. He knew that you two will meet again. Besides as long as he knows where you are, you weren't getting away that easily.
He couldn't wait to see what you can do.
Chapter 7: Chapter 6
Summary:
“Only the feelings of undying joy, will you know peace”
Chapter Text
A couple of days later.
At night, you were on your futon bed, reading the scrolls given by Tengen.
Once in a while, you'd take breaks here and there. Miyabi would bring you food while you continue reading.
Not long after that, sleep was overtaking you and you fell asleep on top of the scrolls.
In the depths of your dreams, you were walking around in an open area. Nothing but dust and dirt blowing through the wind.
It was like nothing was around you. Like someone destroyed what used to be in such an enormous area.
"Where...where am I" you whisper, beyond confused about what was nothing in front of you.
Everything else was just a blur. You couldn't see what else was out there, but you knew it wasn't a good feeling.
It felt like death occurred here. Like the smell of dead carcasses lingering.
Soon you started hearing voices. Whispers of your name being called.
"Who's there? What is this?"
And that's when you suddenly fell on your knees in pain.
"I say unto you, the era of bloodshed and terror is nigh"
You cover your ears as your head starts to hurt. The ringing in your head bursts as you grit your teeth in pain as you bend to the ground.
"The time of the chill darkness and light will bare its fangs is nigh"
"Please stop"
The gushing of wind blows heavier as the dust and dirt whirl along with it, engulfing you in it.
"The time of madness and the time of contempt"
"STOP"
Suddenly you wake up. Breathing heavily and gasping for air as sweat was dripping from your skin.
You heard multiple footsteps come running towards your room. As your door bursts open, you see Miyabi along with other maids come in.
"My lady are you alright!?" Miyabi runs towards you and lifts your upper body from the bed.
"(L/n), what happened in here?"
You look around and see dark markings around your room. As if a force pushed everything back. All of your valuables were everywhere, along with some of your shoji doors torn. Broken wood was disheveled.
Your face was overwhelmed with fear.
"I...I-I don't know"
Miyabi feels your forehead.
"You're burning up. I'll give you some herbal tea, while everyone cleans the mess up"
She moves you out of the room and has you relax in another. Miyabi brings you the tea and you drink from it.
Huge gulps without even caring for how hot it is. You just wanted to forget about that dream you had.
Miyabi breaks the silence.
"I hope everything's okay my lady"
"Miyabi—"
"I know, I'm sorry, but please understand I thought you were hurt. I was worried for a moment there"
You didn't say a word as your gaze was still on the ground. You sigh and rub your aching head.
"Thank you for the tea," you said.
Miyabi nods.
"Of course...I will let Master Tengen know about what just happened. Maybe he has the answers" she says.
Your gaze looked towards Miyabi, and you just quickly grab her for a hug.
If you weren't going to grab the comfort from your parents anymore. Then the least would be a servant who is so far close to you.
Miyabi didn't move but let you have the moment. She felt something wet on her shoulders but knew it was only the tears you were shedding.
Now at a moment like this, she felt surprised to even see how a deity like yourself can have an emotion like that.
She always thought since Gods are so powerful, they were incapable of feelings.
You were different though.
Within the past few days, you haven't seemed to stop amazing her.
Truly, you were too precious for this world. And it doesn't deserve you.
_____
Tengen, along with other elders look over the damage that happened in your room. Feeling that there is a remnant of cursed energy left from the outcome.
An elder speaks up.
"Tengen, we trust that you would have her under control. Teaching her and to make use of her powers, and yet it's seen in chaos"
"Believe me, she has no recollection of doing this," he says.
"Of course not. I am not one to go against prophecy, but if this girl is unwilling to learn and control her powers as soon as possible to stop the king of curses, then other higher-ups will be questioning her position as a deity"
"If worse comes, she may be executed," another elder says.
Tengen stops for a moment and looks back at the elders.
"She is my responsibility. I have this under control. So do not lay a finger on her or you will be hearing from me"
The elders didn't say anything else as they just walk out of the room. You were in a different room, however, you heard everything.
Tengen walks into your room to see how you were doing.
He sits down in front of you, while you were reading your scrolls.
"We may need to discuss what happened"
"Okay..."
Tengen knew you heard everything the elders were saying about you. And it gave him no pleasure to see you in despair.
"I won't let them do anything to you (l/n). You're in my care so I will not fail you"
"I know you're trying to do the best you can for me, Tengen...giving me scrolls to read as a start to even learn what curses, curse energy, and techniques are"
"It's a slow process I know, but everything you learn will make sense, and you will apply all of it to your skills," he says.
Looking back to his gaze, Tengen can see the worry in your eyes.
"How long do I have for those elders to know I'm useful...? What if I'm not? Then what would they do to me?"
Tengen stays silent.
"You all expect a grand show from me, and yet I can't even bend curse energy to my will"
Tengen puts his hand on your shoulder.
"Do not doubt yourself. Forget all eyes on you. Do not let them get to you and scare you to run away. I have hope that you can do it because you are not a failure"
Tears form in your eyes but you nod.
"Now. I want you to tell me what happened in there"
"I don't know. All I remember was waking up to it. But I had a strange dream. A dream where I was in an open area, and for some reason it felt...so sad, and it smelled awful" you said.
Tengen kept his eyes on you as you continued.
"I was alone, but I heard voices. They were calling my name, and chanting words"
"What did they say?"
"That...the era of bloodshed and terror is nigh. And something else like fangs, madness, contempt. I can't remember it all but it's what I heard" you said.
Tengen was trying to make up what it all meant. Figuring out bits and pieces that could be a message in the future.
Tengen looks back at you and nods.
"Alright then. Don't worry about it. Right now, you just continue reading those scrolls and we'll get started with training soon"
You suddenly get excited.
"You mean you'll be teaching me cursed energy hands-on now!"
"Yes. Tomorrow"
You grab some confidence back as you continue to read through your scrolls diligently.
Tengen puts a small smile on his face. He was happy to see you back to how he wanted to see you. But now he realizes that his journey with you was going to be a lot harder than he expected it to be.
_____
"So she's at the Kamigamo Jinja Shrine?" Sukuna asks.
"Yes, we can prepare to travel there if you like. Kanzaki and I will have you settled near that area" Uraume says.
"No. If I do, those sorcerers will detect me. And it will be a pain to deal with them. I'll keep a safe distance. She'll know where I am" he smirks.
_____
The next day, Tengen had you by the pond. Your lesson was to make the water rise using your curse energy.
Extending your hands out, you close your eyes and focus on the flow of water.
"Don't strain, let your energy do the work" Tengen says.
You exert your energy as the water begins to rise, little by little. Though you start to struggle, making the water bubble and decelerate.
"Don't hurt yourself"
You grunt in pain as you try to bring it back up again. The pressure and force were becoming much harder for you.
You grit your teeth to the point where blood started coming out.
"(L/n) stop!" Tengen yells.
You give up and just groan with frustration and defeat.
"Damn it"
"It's alright, it's just the basics. Just keep practicing and you'll get used to it" he says.
You nod.
Wiping the blood away, you walk back inside the temple. Tengen told you to rest for the day and continue your reading.
Wherever he was going was his matter of business.
In your room, you were reading your scrolls, but boredom took over and made you go outside
You look around and admire the flowers in the garden. Surprisingly for you, you knew each flower and its meaning.
Back home you use to read little scriptures of flowers and what they were about. It was hard at first since you didn't know how to read, but your father took notice of how you wanted to learn more about them.
So he got you books about flowers for your birthday. And each day you'd practice and learn how to read and even write.
You missed those days.
But those days were gone now. Now they were just memories.
Seeing around you spot very particular flowers. Pink and red spider lilies.
You see the two beautiful flowers and you found it very weird to see the two together.
Red spider lilies are known for death, last goodbyes, and sad memories. While the pink spider lilies are indicated for love, passion, and beauty.
But thinking about it, you figured that maybe the two can make sense together.
"Hmm, a passionate goodbye? The beauty of death? No, that just sounds awful" you sigh.
Looking at the red flowers, you thought of Sukuna. You wished to see Sukuna right now to see how he's doing.
But soon you felt it. You felt something was pulling you somewhere.
With no time to spare, you walk towards it. Your legs just moving on its own, finding what exactly was calling your name.
A maid comes walking out to get you.
"Lady (l/n), your meal is—? Lady (l/n)?"
And just like that, you were gone.
The maid calls out in panic.
"Lady (l/n)! Oh no, where can she be!?"
She hurries back inside to call for assistance.
Chapter 8: Chapter 7
Summary:
“His eyes were like a sharp blade that tried to pierced through her heart”
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
You were just walking.
You walked deep into the forest without any clue where you were going. But as long as something was just calling you out there, you didn't stop.
You didn't know why you haven't stopped. You were too far from the temple, you have to get back before they searched for you.
Soon you felt the familiar energy again. The same intense energy you felt the first time.
The moment you came close, you spot none other than Sukuna himself.
He was cross-legged while his hand was supporting his head. His eyes gazed at you, and the moment your eyes meet, it was like time stopped for just a moment.
That sounded cliche, but you just felt that it's been a long time since you've seen your husband.
Jogging your way to Sukuna you wanted to hug him but you felt like that's too forward.
"Sukuna! I thought I'd never see you again"
Sukuna stares at you and then suddenly pulls you in his hold. You blush, feeling his strong arms. He was warm and you admire his tattoo marks.
"You are allowed to be close to me. Not like you haven't done so"
You giggle and cherish the moment you have with him.
"You've been gone for a long time"
"I know, I'm sorry"
"Where were you" he sounded a bit demanding, but you didn't find it threatening.
"I was...attending to personal things," you said.
Sukuna didn't look pleased with that answer.
"I'm your husband, woman. You shouldn't keep secrets from me. I thought that's how married spouses work" he strictly says.
You look nervous. He was right, you couldn't keep a secret from your husband. Right?
You didn't know how married couples are supposed to act with each other. But you knew that they both had to love one another.
And having children was out of the question.
You tell Sukuna what he may have wanted to hear. You chose your words wisely.
"I was practicing my cursed energy. I'm trying to get the hang of it"
Sukuna looks at your tiny body as he takes in your focused features. He sighs then puts his hand on your head.
You come back to reality and look up at him.
"Cursed energy is used among the forms of negative emotions, grief or anger for example"
"I know that I read about it," you said
Sukuna scoffs.
"I doubt you have any kind of grief or anger inside you. I bet you wouldn't even hurt an ant if it killed you" Sukuna started taunting you.
You look at him with distraught.
"I have you know that cursed energy has various uses through any emotion. And it's not like I want to kill anyone. I just want to protect those who I love" you said.
"Protecting someone you love requires a bit of bloodshed. If people's lives were at stake, would you subdue the enemy or kill them once and for all to stop their purge?"
So befuddled by his questions, you get up from the ground and away from Sukuna. You didn't understand why he was asking you that. Was he trying to teach you something? Was he talking about himself?
You already knew the story behind him and how people feared him. But you thought it was all just stories to scare them at first. Sukuna is a monstrous-looking curse. An evil of darkness. He's killed so many people.
But he didn't kill you as the stories depict it. Maybe they were all just lies. There was more to him than what people said. Maybe he just killed people because they were threatening him?
Trying to kill Sukuna just because of how he looked. But how would you know exactly?
He still held on to a strong authority. Expected to be treated with respect and honor by others. But he was okay with how you are with him.
In a way.
But right now, you didn't know whether he's trying to be rude to you or not. It's just a simple question.
But why is it upsetting you?
"Don't have an answer?" Sukuna asks.
Your eyes scan around to think of one, but you were lost. You couldn't find the right words.
Sukuna looks at your state of confusion and just laughs.
"A pure flower at heart. It seems you don't have the guts to take a life. How are people going to expect the light of the jujutsu world to save them?"
You turn with wide eyes.
"How did you—?"
"Sorcerers talk my dear wife. And you were gone for a long time, I was just worried that something bad happened to you. So I only listen to find out more about you and your whereabouts" he pulls a wicked smirk.
Sukuna gets up and walks towards you. You take a step back.
"I...I was going to tell you someday" you whisper.
"When? When you were ready to kill me?"
"What!? No! I would never hurt you!" You continue to step back.
"Why? Is it because I haven't hurt you? I could be out there soon, killing innocent lives and you won't stop me?"
The air was getting thicker and it was getting harder to breathe.
"I won't let you do that"
"How? By killing me?"
"N-no! Never!"
"Because I am your husband who you love?"
Your back meets with a tree. Your face was sweating in fear. Sukuna found it amusing.
Why is he doing this? You thought.
"I think it's wrong for you to pick on the innocent. If anything, defend yourself if you are being threatened"
Sukuna looks you dead in the eye. He touches your soft face.
He cherishes this moment.
He wanted to see you under him with a look of lust or fear. Just thinking about every scenario that he can do to your precious body.
He wanted to crush this innocence of yours. But he doesn't just yet. Due in time he'll get what he wants without forcing you. You'll willingly give it to him.
He's getting excited.
Sukuna pulls away from you.
"Then I will do that," he says.
You thought you misheard him.
"You will?"
"But remember, you allowed it," he says.
You look at him and just nod. Sukuna smirks and just pulls you into his embrace. You blush, this is the first time he has made the first move.
"Let me teach you how to unleash your energy," he says.
"Okay?"
Sukuna as you stand in the middle of the forest. He was distant from you as he watches your figure.
"Think of a time when you had something taken away from you. Something that you held dear but is now gone forever" he says.
Your eyes were closed and you focus on a time when you were sad and alone.
Alone.
You left your parents. You haven't seen them for a long time now. And you don't even know if they're okay.
You wonder if they are mad at you for leaving them.
And your friends. They probably have forgotten about you now. Why would they want to remember you? You abandoned them.
You abandoned everyone.
Your eyes were watering as you held them tightly shut. Your breath hitches as you felt all your emotions spiraling.
Soon a wave of energy blasts out in the opening. You snap open your eyes and take a sharp deep breath.
Upon that, you look around and see that a lot of huge trees along with their roots were pushed down. Grass and flowers wilted, and where you stood was black soot.
You were shocked by the outcome. But you felt the energy inside yourself flowing. Looking back to Sukuna, you smile.
"I did it. I can feel my cursed energy"
"Good. Now bring all the plants and trees back together" he sternly says.
"Okay..."
You focus again and bring some of the plants back to life. The trees to their rightful place again, but that was the hard part. Some were coming together and some were struggling to be lifted back.
You sigh and let go of the ones that couldn't be restored. But you made some progress with all the others. You brought plants back to life as if they weren't destroyed.
Sukuna looks at the scene and smirks.
"That is your power"
_____
Sneaking back to the temple, Sukuna said that he had some business to attend to. You didn't know what it was but didn't pester him about it.
You give him a quick kiss on the cheek and hurry back. He told you that he'll call for you telepathically in your head so you can hear his voice.
Hurrying back it seems like everything was quiet. You wondered if everyone noticed you were gone. Once you open your door, you were meet with Tengen.
He didn't look happy.
"Where were you?" he strictly asks.
"I was...out"
"Where"
"In the forest. I was practicing my curse energy" you said.
Which wasn't a complete lie.
"I told you to practice by the pond, where you were still in the temple's jurisdiction," he said.
"I wanted to expand my exploration Tengen. And it turns out I was able to grab a hold of it, look"
You focus on the pond distant from your room. Soon the water was bubbling and rising higher than before.
You look at Tengen with a smile.
"Isn't that cool!?"
"And you managed to do this in just one day?"
You nod.
Tengen didn't say a word as he stares at the scene in front of him. He looks back, still not looking impressed.
"I want you here in this temple. Do not go off on your own without anyone escorting you. Do I make myself clear?"
Your smile was wiped away in exchange for confusion.
"You're not happy that I can control my cursed energy?"
"Of course, I'm impressed with your progress (l/n) I'm astonished that it took you just today to master it. But what in the world made you go outside of the temple like that?"
You were hesitant to answer. You didn't want him to know about Sukuna. You couldn't even imagine how he will feel if you told him about your meetings with him.
Will they execute you? Throw you away immediately?
"I just wanted some freedom. The temple makes me feel trapped" you said.
That wasn't a lie either. Because that is how you felt.
Tengen wipes his face and sighs.
"We can't risk you getting hurt (l/n). You're still learning, but if you want, I will have someone be your bodyguard so you can explore out of the temple. Just not too far" he says.
You smile and hug him.
"Thank you! It's all I ask"
Tengen nods.
"Okay. So I suppose it's now time to move on to the next lesson. Reverse cursed technique"
_____
A couple of years have gone by, and your skills have improved impressively.
Your met-ups with Sukuna still kept going. And as for your love for him. Well, it was always up and down.
But it seems like you knew him well that he will always be a bit sour. But again he does show his affection towards you in his way. So you still love him for that.
No marriage is ever perfect. Especially if you were the wife of an evil curse spirit. You are hoping to change that.
Right now, you were 23yrs old. And you've grown from a novice girl to a mature woman who can understand cursed energy, cursed techniques, weapons, reversal technique, and many more from the back of your head.
Throughout the years Tengen can never be any more prouder.
Time was counting down for sorcerers to have you chase down Sukuna. Seal him away for good.
But you still weren't sure if you were ready for that.
Inside your room, you were writing your thoughts on a scroll. How your journey as a deity was to you and your spiritual journey.
You still didn't forget the dream you had years ago. You would sometimes have them again here and there. Tengen and you try to figure out what it all meant.
But for now, you were enjoying your time alone writing your life down.
But there were days when you wonder how your parents were. How big is your friend Akiko's child now? Did they miss you? Do they even remember you now?
You weren't treated as a normal girl anymore. Since prophecy, you had to be treated with respect. Before you hated it, and you still do. But you have gotten used to their appraisal.
And even though you act mature, there are times when you want to have just a little fun.
All the responsibilities you have just tire you sometimes.
That's why you were grateful to still have Miyabi. She's 20yrs old now and has been serving you for a long time.
At this point, you two were just so familiar with each other. But Miyabi makes sure to know her place if she ever goes too far. But you never mind it.
Out of all the servants that have taken care of you. She was the closest one that you have as a friend in the temple.
And out of all the higher-ups and elders, Tengen was the only one you felt safe with.
You heard a voice from your shoji door, getting up and sliding it open, you were met with a servant holding up a plate of what looked like apples, oranges, flowers, and sweet bread.
"Another offering from sorcerers my lady"
You sigh.
"Set them on my table please"
The servant nods. Placing the items on the table the servant bows and takes their leave.
This wasn't new.
Every day you would have some kind of offering from the sorcerers. Whether it be food, yen, or jewels.
It was all nice at first, but soon it started to become overbearing for you. What good would it be if they will be just lying around your room?
But they do it so they would benefit themselves to have your protection and blessings. They praise you.
Whenever you have the chance, you avoid the world with scrolls. You loved reading scriptures about flowers, animals, and other wonderful things since you were a girl.
And gathering flowers to study and give to others was your entertainment. It just makes you happy to see others happy.
Soon you heard your door open. Looking back you see Tengen coming in.
You smile.
"Tengen, look here" You grab his arm and move him to see the scroll you have read.
In the scroll, you point at a drawn-out flower.
"And that is..."
"It's a Pansy (Panshi), they have been associated with friendship in our culture. "Omoiyari no hana." Giving someone a bouquet of pansies is a thoughtful gesture that shows the recipient that they are appreciated and cared for"
Tengen looks at the picture and was a bit amazed to learn about the flower. He shouldn't care, but because you were so into these things, he supported you.
"I never knew. Thank you for teaching me something new"
You tilt your head.
"You didn't? I would assume that maybe you have seen one Tengen" you giggle.
He nods.
Then he pulls out something from his robe. It was a book. A book that you haven't seen anything like it before.
It was a hard book cover, and there were pages that you can flip.
"What kind of book is this?" You ask.
"It's something that I found along the way here. A book that people from Western civilization"
He gives you the book. It was strange. Very different from your scrolls.
You look at the back cover which you thought may have been the front and scratch your head.
"I appreciate the gift Tengen. However, I don't think I understand this language?"
Tengen chuckles.
"Would you like me to teach you?"
You nod.
"Yes please!"
Tengen knew you like to learn new things and face challenges. So he didn't mind teaching you them.
Plus this gives him a reason to be with you again.
Notes:
I forgot to mention about that book scene. So let's just say a piece of America’s treasure came to the land at that period. I'm not being too accurate with history.
Chapter 9: Chapter 8
Summary:
Warning: Sexual Content
Notes:
Happy Halloween you ghoulish kids.
This spicy treat is from me to you enjoy!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
You were walking around in a town nearby. Your bodyguard was behind you while you were looking around at the shops.
You carried a bunch of flowers in your basket that you have picked while you traveled to town.
Beautiful flowers that you gave to people to express your kindness. Sometimes to even stop a dispute that would have ended wrong.
"You bumped me on purpose! I'll send you to the authorities for assault!"
"Fuck off! I'll kill you!"
No one wanted to interfere with those huge scary men. Except for you.
Everyone was so amazed at how you were able to walk up to them and smile. The two men look towards you confused.
"What the fuck do you want little girl?!"
"Screw off this is none of your business!"
Your bodyguard was about to do something until you just rummage through your basket and pull out flowers for them.
Now they were completely lost.
You smile.
"Please don't fight, I'm not sure if what happened was an accident or not. But you two are both civil and strong men that can resolve your issues peacefully"
She extends her arm to give those men flowers.
"Those are wisteria flowers. They represent a bond between friends that grows stronger over time. You two are very strong and have so much dignity for yourselves, so I hope you two can become great friends one day and have each other's back"
They look at the flower and back to you. They have never seen a very beautiful lady before in their lives. Maybe because they were so angry they didn't see that.
The two men blush and scratch their heads.
"I guess...I went straight to the conclusion without listening to you. I'm sorry"
"No I should be sorry, I shouldn't have bumped into you like that"
The men smile and soon shake their hands and laugh. You smile in joy.
"Nee-chan, thank you for this"
The men bowed and walked away.
Your bodyguard was amazed.
You laugh.
"You look surprised"
"It is just...you de-escalated a problem. And it wasn't your responsibility to do that" he says.
You sigh.
"I know. I should have let it be. But if I did, things would have gotten worse"
"Somebody else would have resolved the problem"
"Not everyone is brave enough to do it though, sadly. People don't want to risk themselves getting hurt because they may have loved ones to go back to"
You continue walking and looking around.
"Your life matters just as much too, you know"
You chuckle.
"Is that so?"
You wonder aimlessly and stop at a shop selling decorative ornaments. You smile at the sight of seeing so many kansashi hairpins.
"They're so pretty!" You said.
"My lady, you have some back at the temple," your bodyguard says.
"But not a lot. And these are so nice!"
You admire the art on the hairpins. Flowers hanging off and tassels. You just wanted one.
"I want this one," you said, holding up one with pretty flowers on it.
"You have an obsession with flowers," your bodyguard says.
After purchasing two, you went on your day. You wanted to give one to Sukuna. He doesn't wear decorative things obviously, but it would be nice to give him one to remember you.
You munch on snacks and look at the decorations the town is putting up.
"Looks like there is gonna be a festival," you said.
It was getting dark already. Which mean it was time to go back to the temple.
"Lady (l/n), it's time to go" he escorts you back. You groan as you do. You didn't want the day to end. But you were going to sneak out again anyway.
_____
As night occurred, you sneak out and try to sense Sukuna. He was nearby somewhere. Soon you ended up at a weird estate.
Where am I?
You were baffled at first but then you see Sukuna sitting on a wooden floorboard. With two strange people, you have never met before.
You didn't know whether this was a good time to engage.
"I know you're there woman"
Never mind.
You walk up and suddenly a slight chill went down your spine. Those two people or you guess spirits felt odd.
You also noticed a couple of people, holding out offerings, and looking afraid.
"What is all this?" You asked.
"These humans who worship me give me offerings, in exchange for not hurting their village," he says.
"Oh. Wait, I've been hearing a lot about this festival going on, and I never knew what it was about?"
Sukuna chuckles.
"That's because the festival is for me"
He signals you to sit on his lap. And when you do some people in the crowd gasp.
You blush. It was a bit embarrassing to show affection out in public like this. He is your husband, but I don't think many people know that.
As the offerings keep coming, you pull out your gift to him.
"Here. I thought of you when I got this hairpin, my love"
Sukuna looks and examines it.
He gives you a confused look.
"What makes you think I love wearing things like these? My hair isn't long enough for this" he complains.
You give him that pouty look.
"You don't need to wear it, but keep it with you to remember me. Do you not like it?"
Sukuna couldn't handle your pout look, he grunts every time he sees it.
He only rubs your head.
"Fine"
You were happy again. Once the offerings have stopped the people bow. Sukuna orders them out of his sight, making you two (and his servants) the only ones around.
"Move all those things back to my shrine," he tells his servants. They bow and did what they were told.
"Your shrine? I never knew you had one"
"Did you think I lived in the forest?"
"We always meet there...hmm, I thought you did actually!"
"Tch, dumb woman" Sukuna caresses your head while he rests his eyes.
You chuckle.
"You should let me see it one day"
Sukuna smirks.
"Would you like to see it now?"
This could be his chance to claim your virginity.
"I don't know. I can't be out for too long"
"You are my wife. We do not see each other for a very long time. I am starting to think that we are not married. Don't you love me?"
He moves your head to look at him. He was giving her a sincere look.
"I...I do"
"Then come with me"
You had a gut feeling that you shouldn't go with him. But he was also right about not seeing each other for so long.
It almost didn't feel like you two were married.
And you told him the day you met that you would teach him about love. And this was Sukuna showing it. He wanted to spend time with you more.
All those short times you had with him. Teaching him little by little how to express it.
He was still rough around the edges, but he made some progress expressing it.
How can you say no?
If you refuse, will he be mad?
What kind of wife would you be?
"Okay, but only for just a moment. I have to go back before someone notices"
Sukuna grins and lifts you. You yelp as he holds you like you weighed nothing.
You couldn't wait to see his shrine. And Sukuna couldn't wait to have you.
You really took the bait.
_____
Going to his shrine, you felt something disturbing. You were almost certain that you could hear the cries of lost souls.
It feels...so sad here.
You got out of your thoughts when Sukuna lifts you bridal style and takes you inside.
You shouldn't be here. All the warning bells were ringing in your head. Saying that you need to run.
"(Y/n), I want to have you all to myself. I don't want you to be anyone else's but mine" he says with his low voice.
But then it goes away. All your reasoning was out the door.
"Wh...what do you mean?"
Sukuna smirks as he sits down on the comfortable futon. He sits upright while pulling you on top next to him.
"I am your husband, right? So that means I can have sex with you"
Your head almost explodes.
"Sex...sex...sex?!" It suddenly clicked to what is about to happen.
You blush a thousand times more red than usual now.
"I-I don't know. We're not going too fast, right? I mean I never had that type of intimacy with a cursed spirit before. Well, I'm a half spirit, b-but still. Am I really ready, what do I do? What part do I play for this—"
Sukuna cuts you off and starts attacking your mouth. His tongue slips right in yours as he dominates your mouth.
Saliva strings out as he pulls apart from you. He sees your erotic face.
"You talk too much woman. Just follow my lead"
You only nod.
Sukuna pulls your robe apart slowly, your neck and shoulders were exposed. He pulled more as he suddenly sees your breasts.
They were a decent size that his large hand can hold completely. He guides you to kiss his lips again.
As a distraction, he pulls down his pants. Not realizing the size can frighten you. You were too distracted with his tongue in your mouth, along with his hand squeezing and fondling your breast.
You could've sworn you felt something wet there, but you didn't pay attention to it. You began to moan from the sensation.
"Sukuna, I—"
"Does it feel good?"
You didn't say a word, but your face said it all.
Sukuna opens your robe more, revealing your pussy soaked. He licked his lips and used his fingers to create some friction down there.
You moan. Wrapping your arms around his neck as you feel his large fingers rubbing against you.
"What a nice voice. Can you feel it inside?"
He plunges his fingers inside you and you yelp.
"Too much! I-it's too"
"Relax my wife"
You control your breathing as he plays inside you. You soon started getting used to it and went back to softly moaning.
This feeling...it feels good.
Sukuna smirks as he feels you moving.
"Kekeke, you were so reserved even down here. But now you're sucking me in so desperately seeking pleasure. I can enter you with no problem"
Sukuna lifts you as he props his dick at your entrance. Again you didn't see how big he was so you may be taken by surprise.
"Sukuna...wai—"
"Come and swallow me whole"
He guides his dick inside you. And you were taken back by his size.
"Ah...stop! Mnnh!"
You panic, but Sukuna holds you still. He slowly continues to guide you down until you fit all of him.
You shudder from the feeling, he rubs your back and sides to get you comfortable.
Sukuna licks your throat and can see the bulge just slightly showing in your stomach.
He really wants to ruin you right now instantly.
Sukuna's heat...it's like I'm being burned from the inside out...
Sukuna feels your inside clenched around him. He chuckles.
"Don't squeeze so hard. Do you like it that much?"
He pulls your arms away from his neck and sees your exposed body in view. You were a bit embarrassed but aroused.
He touches your stomach.
"Show me how you indulge in your own pleasure"
"I...I can't"
"You can't? Or you won't?"
You didn't say anything else as you slowly use your hand as leverage and start to move.
You were moving slowly, while Sukuna was rubbing your clit at a lazy pace.
"What's wrong? Is that it?" He teases you.
You then bring yourself up and slowly down. The size was unbearable. It was taking a while for you to get used to it.
But then suddenly Sukuna grabs your hips and brings you down hard.
"AH!"
He thrusts inside you at a moderate pace.
"Come now, my beautiful wife. Show me how hard you can work"
You can just hear the slapping noises along with your moans softly coming out as he moves. Each time Sukuna thrusts back inside you, a wave of pleasure shocks you.
You breathe out every hot breath.
"Sto—"
And soon you felt a strange feeling in your stomach. That feeling of pleasure just seeping out of you now.
You breathe hard as you collapse on top of Sukuna. Sukuna grunts and just looks at you as he caresses your face.
"It seems you have little endurance to keep going" he sighs.
He holds your flush face. It looks like you won't be able to make it back to the temple.
Sukuna smirks and gives a try on giving you a peck you on the forehead.
It felt weird. But he did not dislike it.
Looking at your face, he admires your beauty. But he would never admit that.
"I'll stop since this was your first time experiencing pleasure like this. But next time I won't be so forgiving...Kanzaki"
Soon his servant appears in front of him.
"Yes my lord"
"Take her back to the Kamigamo Shrine. You know where that is so take her before anyone notices"
At first, she was confused. She was surprised to hear him say that. Sukuna never cared for anyone. Especially to have them brought back to their homes.
He'd kill them after that as always. But she had been questioning it since the beginning. Uraume felt the same too.
But she knew better than to question Sukuna. So she did as he was told.
_____
Kanzaki sets you on your bed. Fixing you up so you wouldn't look like you just had sex with a demon recently.
She looks at your soft sleeping face. She grimaces in disgust.
"I may never like you...in fact I despise you," she says.
She continues to look at you. Those soft features you had. It would be no surprise that Sukuna would take an interest in a woman like her.
But he acts differently towards her than any woman he's been with.
Kanzaki just couldn't understand. It was annoying her. She sighs.
"But I suppose that doesn't matter anyway"
She jumps off the balcony from your window and disappears.
_____
Somewhere out in an unknown land.
"I can feel it...her powers grow. The time is coming soon, Tengen. Child of cursed spirit, child of wrath"
Notes:
If you wanna check out how the reader is like or is portrayed as then you can see in this link here! Though I imagine her with her hair down with the bow on behind her. But that’s how I portray her. You don’t have to imagine her like that if you want you can still be creative with whoever you want her (or you) to be.
No you don’t need to watch the whole video, I suggest starting from 0:53 to 1:56 or however far you like to go between them. It introduces her.
https://youtu.be/0AUmA1oXt6I?si=6DI1msZ5Vvd_Nlst
I’m really into this story so much and I’ve done a lot so far, and I appreciate you all reading so thank you!
Chapter 10: Chapter 9
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
You were walking.
You didn't know where you were. An unknown dusty land where trees and bushes were rotting.
Looking around you hear the sudden trottings of many footsteps.
Turning around you see a giant cursed spirit.
"A special grade?"
It's disfigured body, many limbs just crawling so fast towards you. Many eyes and the pitch black slime oozing out. You couldn't make of what it was. But it was coming after you.
You ran the moment as it was getting close. Looking back it breathes out.
"You are ours," it says.
You trip on the ground. And the moment it got close you used your powers and screamed.
"No!"
You take a deep breath as you suddenly wake up.
Breathing heavily, you can just feel the sweat on your skin. You sigh and rub your head.
"What exactly does it all mean" you whisper.
You get up but then fall back down. Your hips hurt as you feel the pain. But then you remember last night's event.
Your face steams up as you bury it in the pillow.
"That was not a dream!" You muffle.
_____
You were practicing your cursed techniques. Tengen told you that your domain expansion was the final lesson for you.
And after that, the elders expect to see it. This will prove that it's time to face Sukuna.
You sigh. You hated thinking about it.
You have had your fair share of exorcising cursed spirits. But in a way that Tengen didn't know you could.
When exorcising them, they normally turn into dust. The pain slowly creeps at them as they disintegrate.
But you, you touch their body, along with the soul. They get consumed with white light and disappear. Your method is quick and painless, and it gives the spirits peace.
Focusing on your energy, you released an arcane warding circle around you. It was huge and shaped like a flower.
That skill allows anyone's curse techniques to have a power-up boost, including yours.
Miyabi then throws a couple of pots your way at a distance. Soon you create a storm around you, hitting all pots near you.
"Okay, give me another!"
Miyabi wheels in dummies and you use your technique to freeze their entire bodies.
Miyabi claps her hands.
"That was amazing (y/n)! It looks like you have gotten stronger"
"Really? Well I just hope not to overdo it"
Before you go back to training, you sense something. Someone or something was injured.
Going to the source you were met with a huge bright green tree. At the top, you see that a huge branch was broken.
You take steps floating up in the air and holding its broken stem.
Light radiates from the palm of your hands as you close your eyes and focus. Soon the branch was healed. You smile.
"There you go" you whisper.
Floating down to the ground, Miyabi holds a cup of water for you.
"Master Tengen will be here soon," she says.
"Probably for my last lesson" you read about domain expansion.
You only wonder how it will all turn out. What exactly will your domain look like? Will it be strong?
"(Y/n), I will prepare your bath before Master Tengen arrives"
You nod.
Once you were alone, you wondered what other powers you had other than controlling elements. You pick up one of the broken pots and cut your hand.
You wince in pain but heal yourself immediately. You didn't have a problem with the reverse technique.
Then it hit you. You read it in books about channeling a huge amount of curse energy through your emotions and using it towards creating an output barrier.
So you wondered if you put all your energy into that barrier, creating a portal.
It sounds crazy, but you had this idea that if you can exorcise curses, then what about summoning one? And not the type of curse manipulation where you can summon a spirit from what you've captured.
So you were about to find out.
You shut out all of your surroundings. You focus on making the portal. All the energy you put into it was getting big.
A large black portal swirls around in front of you.
"Okay. Now see the outcome, and make it happen" you whisper.
Taking deep breaths you chant ancient words to summon a curse out of the portal.
A large monstrous hand pops out. Large claws clutching the grass as it begins to come out slowly.
You look with amazement in your eyes. You had no words.
It's huge. Is it a special grade?
And just when its whole body was about to come out, you heard someone yelling your name.
You felt a hand pull you away and soon the portal was gone. All that was left was the giant hand on the floor.
It was cut off when the portal was gone. It was disintegrating.
You look to see it was Tengen. He was upset. Upset.
"(Y/n), what have you done!"
"I...I was only—"
"Where did you learn something like that?"
"N-nowhere. It was an idea that I had. I wanted to experiment with summoning a cursed spirit"
Tengen lets go of your shoulders and sighs.
"There is such thing as summoning cursed spirits as shikigamis. But what you did there (y/n), that was nothing I have ever seen before" he says.
Your eyes gaze on the ground.
"Yes! And that's why there is much more research to be done! If you just let me, I think this can be a huge benefit for other sorcerers. This can be a breakthrough!"
"...Do not do that technique ever again (y/n). That is forbidden"
"But—"
"I forbid it. It's dark energy that can consume you"
You only nod.
"Okay then. Meet me back here in the garden at sundown. I am going to help you with your domain expansion"
_____
Getting washed up and dressed. You put away the books you have been reading. You look out your balcony and see so many things changing.
Miyabi brings tea for you and walks next to you.
"It's nice outside today. Are you excited for your last lesson" she asks.
You held a straight face while you were in thought.
"Your grace?"
"I just don't get it. I have discovered something new that could change the jujutsu society and yet Tengen shuts me down for it" you say.
"Maybe he just doesn't want you to get hurt that is all"
You grunt.
"I don't understand. What is he exactly afraid of? I'm not going anywhere. How can I? I have been trapped in this temple for the past five years now. Not knowing if my parents are okay?!"
Everything in your room starts to shake.
"My lady—"
"He and those damn elders have no idea, the physical toll I have made! The sacrifice of leaving my old life behind to become some "god" to them!"
"(Y/n)"
"They don't care about anyone but themselves. And they count on me to protect them! Well, I won't! Because I'm done with them!!"
"(Y/N)!"
The tea set shatters completely, Miyabi yelps as she covers her head.
You take rapid deep breaths as you see what just happened. You snap out of it and look at Miyabi. She was hiding in fear.
"Oh my god. Miyabi I'm so sorry, I don't know what has gotten into me"
You help her up.
"I-it's fine. I will clean the mess up"
She grabs bits and pieces of the shattered glass. A wave of guilt flows over you.
"You should go see Master Tengen, my lady"
Walking out of the room, you go down to the garden as instructed.
Tengen was by the pond. He turns around and sees you arrived.
"Good to see you"
You nod.
"What's wrong?"
"Nothing. I just have a lot on my mind right now"
"Is it about that portal you made?"
You didn't want to talk about it right now. Today was already stressful enough.
"I'm ready to perform my domain expansion"
Tengen nods.
He explains domain expansion, along with its strengths and weaknesses. He brings out low-grade cursed spirits, keeping them in place.
"Now expand your innate domain with your energy. Once you do, your barrier should be constructed"
"Won't you get sucked in my domain? What if you can't get out?"
"Don't worry, just focus on your domain"
You do everything that Tengen tells you.
"Now do your hand sign and open your domain"
You put all of your focus and curse technique within the domain. And you felt time shift for just a moment.
Clasping your hands together, you open your domain.
Domain Expansion: Nirvana
Soon a wave of fresh air hits you. The smell of flowers all around the open field. The sky is so blue with white puffy clouds surrounding it.
It was beautiful. Your domain was something you never wanted to leave.
Looking back, you see a huge tree. It was lush with little flowers adorning in it. But within the tree you see glass orbs hanging.
You pick one up. It was empty.
"What am I supposed to do with this?" Looking back at the two spirits, they were stuck.
Vines were holding them on the ground like metal chains. You thought for a moment then an idea came.
"I guess I'm supposed to use these on you"
Walking up to them slowly. You touch them with the empty orbs, and soon their whole body is consumed inside.
Light suddenly radiates from them. You look in awe.
Wow.
Soon you didn't know what to do with them. In this case, you could smash the orbs, making them disappear forever. Or you can hang them on your tree, trapping them forever.
Either way, their souls are gone forever.
Once you are done, you get out of your domain. Looking back Tengen was still in his same spot.
"I didn't see you"
"I escaped from your domain as fast as I could. But your outer shell of your domain tells me that it all went well" he says.
You smile and nod.
"It was amazing. My domain, it felt like I was in another world. I never wanted to go back. I wish I could show you" you said.
Tengen hums.
"Well don't get too excited. You have completed the final lesson. And with your domain expansion, it could defeat Sukuna with it" he says.
"Will it hit? I don't think I know how the outcome will be when going against another sorcerer's domain. What happens if I fail?"
Tengen takes deep breaths.
"Then...you may have died trying" he sadly says.
Your eyes widen. Not only do you have to go against your husband, but you still don't know if you want to. But you were risking your life if you did so.
Either you die trying or die at the elder's hands.
There was no win-win there.
"But I am certain you will survive (y/n). The prophecy states that the light defeats the darkness"
"But we can never know that until I face it, do I?"
Fear washes over your face. Tengen puts his hand on your shoulder.
"I told you this before, I will be there to help you. I won't let anyone hurt you"
"And what about the higher-ups? I have a feeling they just don't care about me and only care about themselves"
Tengen shakes his head.
"They worship you (y/n)"
"I overheard what they were saying to you about me. If I don't master each technique, I will be disposed of. It's bad enough I'm in a temple where someone close can hurt me. Those elders can't be trusted Tengen. I may be human but I am a cursed spirit. I'm scared"
Tears pour out of your eyes. You couldn't escape even though it's been in your thoughts for the past years.
If you fled, then they would come after you. And not only that, you didn't want to abandon Tengen and Miyabi.
They were the only two people you trust.
Tengen hesitates for a moment but wipes your tears away.
"Remember what I said. I won't let them do anything to you. You are in my care so I will not fail you"
He softly holds your head to look at him.
"I will always be there for you (y/n). If there comes a point in time where you must flee from them...then so be it"
"Really?" You sniff.
"To be honest. I do not know what will happen to you when you defeat Sukuna. But I know you will have saved so many people from him" he says.
He holds you close to him. And it felt warm, to have Tengen so close to him in embrace, your worries went away.
But then you felt a bit guilty. You didn't know if you should tell him the truth about your secret meetups with Sukuna.
If you do, you wonder how he will react.
"Tengen, I have something to tell you"
Before you say anymore, you hear a servant call out his name.
"Master Tengen, the elders are asking for you"
Tengen lets you go.
"Alright. (Y/n), tell me next time"
You nod.
So close.
Notes:
I don't specifically know too much of about domain expansion or other info about curse techniques as much as I can remember cause it's a lot of info to take in. But I do my best through looking it up on wiki and stuff like that. So if I do get some of the stuff wrong I apologize for that, I'm trying to speed up the process.
Chapter 11: Chapter 10
Summary:
“As long as we’re alive, goodbyes are inevitable”
Notes:
So very good news! I have became a guest on a podcast who interviews fanfic writers like myself. The podcast is called The Fanfic Writers’ Craft. My interview with the lovely host who created that podcast will be released December 1st!
Grateful to have been in it and grateful to have you guys listen if you are interested.
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
"It was like...a shock wave throughout my whole body. There was this thrill for a short moment. I was just so close to seeing what that spirit looked like...it was huge"
You were lying on a futon bed, naked next to Sukuna. His lower arm holds you around the waist while his upper arms are behind his head.
"This portal you've created. How big was it?"
"It was big. Well, not huge, but a decent size. I wish to have learned and discover more about it, but it's forbidden" you sigh.
"Who said that?"
"My master"
"You have discovered something that can give you more power, and yet your teacher is holding you back from it?"
"No...well if he says it, it's for a reason"
You grimace from saying that. A flashback just came to you.
Sukuna sighs with frustration.
"You are dull (y/n)"
"What if I use that power against you? I don't think you've forgotten about me killing you"
Sukuna looks you dead in the eye.
"But you don't want to. Do you?"
You didn't say anything more.
Sukuna gets up and puts his pants back on. You get dressed and the moment you were about to bid your farewells, you see that he still had the hairpin you gave him.
"You are still carrying the hairpin" You were in awe.
"Tch, don't be ridiculous. If I lose it, then I won't hear the end of it with your dumb cries"
Sukuna looks away. You smirk and see that he was trying to avoid your gaze.
How cute.
"Sukuna. Look"
You gently cup his cheeks and turn to meet his eyes. You then kiss his forehead, which surprised him.
You just smile.
"Don't be sad, okay?"
Sukuna looks at you and sighs. He pets the top of your head.
"Dumb wife"
_____
Pacing around your room, you are a nervous wreck. How do you start to tell Tengen that you have been seeing Sukuna?
Chewing on your fingernails you thought about so many scenarios on how it could go.
You didn't even bother noticing your door sliding open. It was Miyabi and she was carrying food in for you.
"Food is ready (y/n). Are you okay?"
She sets the food down.
"Thank you, Miyabi. I will have it later" you said.
Miyabi was concerned to see you act so nervous.
"(Y/n), forgive me but you have been acting a bit strange these past couple of days"
You look back to Miyabi.
"Oh. I'm just nervous. That's all"
Miyabi smiles and takes your hand. You gaze at her curiously. She leads you to your bed and pours you some tea.
"Maybe this will calm your nerves," she says.
Taking it from her hands, you take a drink and sigh.
"Whatever it is you are nervous about (y/n), I'm sure you will be fine"
"Thank you Miyabi...have you been practicing your writing and literature lately?"
She nods.
"Yes, I have. I am grateful that you taught me (y/n)"
"That's good. Has there been any word from Tengen?"
"He will be coming here soon. He wants to speak to you privately. He says it was urgent"
After finishing your meal and getting ready. You meet Tengen in a room. The thing keeping you to see was the candles lit all around.
"Tengen?"
He pops up from your side which startles you.
"I'm sorry to have asked for you so suddenly"
"No that's okay. I needed to talk to you anyway"
Tengen nods and grabs some scriptures.
"First we need to get down to important matters. Ryoumen Sukuna, he is not working alone"
You look surprised. He has his servants you have seen before, but he was never the type to work together with.
"I see..."
"Technically working together. It seems it's only temporary, but still. His name is Kenjaku, and he is a very dangerous spirit"
Tengen goes through the scriptures to find anything to help them with that spirit.
"Am I going to have to stop him before I stop Sukuna?"
"I don't know. The elders weren't prepared for that. That spirit is a master of disguise and is hard to find"
Now not only did you have to tell Tengen about Sukuna, but how were you going to handle facing an unknown spirit?
Sukuna didn't even tell you about it. He should tell you things as much as you do.
"The elders have formed a plan on how to stop Sukuna. They want you to join them so we have a winning chance"
Tengen reveals to you a picture of Sukuna.
"We can at least try and seal him, so you will be the finisher to seal him for good"
"Tengen, I have something to tell you"
Tengen turns around and looks at you.
"What is it (y/n)?"
"Do you trust me?"
"Yes with all that I am"
"And do you promise not to feel any different towards me?"
"Yes of course...(y/n), what's wrong?"
You hesitate for a moment but you just spit it everything you had.
"I have met Sukuna already"
Silence took over the whole room. The air was thick and Tengen didn't know what to even say anymore. He didn't even know whether he heard right.
"What..."
"I have met Sukuna already, and I have been seeing him ever since I lived with my parents. And I have been doing it since"
Tengen slowly takes a seat and stares into the distance.
"Do you hate me now?" You whisper.
"...I am lost for words"
"I'm sorry"
"What have you been telling him?"
"I—"
"What has been going on between you two since the beginning we retrieved you?"
"I'm sorry. I wanted to tell you, but I was scared. Before all of this, I didn't know that I was the one who had to kill or seal him away"
"When you became the deity of this society (y/n), you should have known now that he is an evil monster"
"If he was, then he should have already killed me the many times we've met"
Tengen gets up and walks up to you.
"He is a manipulator (y/n). You do not know what he truly wants. He may have plans for you that you don't know"
"If he does he would tell me!"
"What else have you done with him?"
You control your breathing and just say what you had to say.
"Sukuna and I...we're married. But we were married before any of this"
There was just a look of disappointment in Tengen's eyes. He couldn't believe everything he was hearing. And now he doesn't know if he should look at you the same anymore.
"Are you going to betray us now?"
"No. I...I don't know. I would never towards you or anyone that I love. To be honest, I don't care much for the elders, but I care for you. You and Miyabi were the only ones who cared for me"
Silence took over again. Tengen didn't have a heart before he met you. But ever since you two have crossed eyes and spent some time together, his heart melts because of your bright aura.
And he can still feel it. You were still that ball of sunshine since the beginning.
"We must keep everything hidden from the elders. If they find out, they will think that you are lost to the darkness and have you executed"
You nod.
"So you're not mad at me?"
"I am, just a bit. But you have taught me some things yourself (y/n). Things that I never knew were possible" he says.
You were almost about to cry the moment you just quickly hug him.
"But what about Sukuna?"
"You still need to seal him (y/n). Anything he says to you is for his benefit. He may have you think he cares, but he is still an evil spirit. He has killed many already"
You gaze at the floor and nod.
It was sad really. But you have read in one of your books before that the good can not co-exist with the bad. You can't escape your destiny.
No matter how much you have tried to turn the other cheek. You wanted to make Sukuna a little good. But a cursed spirit doesn't change like that.
But you also couldn't hurt him.
Tengen holds your hands.
"I don't want to lose you to darkness (y/n). We will do this together if we have to"
"...Okay"
While you and Tengen were having a short moment together, they didn't realize a servant overhearing everything.
They quickly walk away to address it all to the elders.
_____
In your room, you hold a flower. Closing your eyes you focus on its essence. Small light swirls around you as the flower glows.
You smelled the nice aroma and its energy radiating.
It was peaceful until you heard your door slide open.
"(Y/N)!" It was Miyabi.
She quickly runs to you and starts grabbing your items and putting them in a sack.
"Miyabi what's going on?"
"You have to escape quickly! Master Tengen is at the outskirts of the temple far up on a mountain waiting for you. Teleport yourself there before the sorcerers find you!"
"What?! Why?!"
"Because my lady, one of the servants overheard you and Master Tengen on everything! Being married to Sukuna, everything!"
"What!"
"At first they thought that you are being controlled by him, so now they are trying to bring you in for questioning"
This wasn't happening. You hope it was all a dream because you didn't want to be confronted by all those old geezers.
"Miyabi—"
"(Y/n), I know you would never betray us. Whatever the reason is you know best. I trust you, but you have to leave quickly! They are about to come to your room any minute!"
She gives you your things.
"Come with me"
"My lady I can't"
"I can't leave you with these poisonous people!"
Miyabi tears up as she smiles.
"I'm not a sorcerer (y/n). They won't do anything to me as they only see me as a mere servant"
She holds your hands.
"Thank you for being my first friend (y/n). And thank you for teaching me how to read and write"
Now you were tearing up. You didn't want to lose your friend, but she also couldn't leave. Because then she would be an accomplice.
Miyabi tells you the location of the mountain. You two share one last hug until you heard multiple footsteps running towards your room.
"Go, go!"
And soon you teleport yourself to a mountain far away from the temple. The location was a bit unknown to you, but you walk around to see Tengen standing outside a cave.
You run up to him and call his name. He turns around and braces himself for a hug.
"Why are we here? Are we running away?"
Tengen hesitates for a moment but then sighs.
"Not exactly"
He looks inside the cave.
"(Y/n), I want you to know that wherever we are. For how many years it may be. We will never be lost, but always be found by each other"
"Tengen...what's going on?"
He looks at you with sadness in his eyes. He tries hard not to crack his voice.
"I am going to seal you in this cave. Where no one will ever find you. I will put you in a deep sleep, but for any reason, if the evil comes back again, then you will be awakened by it" he says.
You couldn't believe what you heard. You were about to be sealed off from the world you know. Going into a deep sleep until god knows when you will ever wake up.
"Tengen. I don't know about this"
Tengen brings his hands to your shoulders.
"(Y/n), you can no longer roam free without sorcerers and spirits coming after you. Word is out already that you are the wife of Ryoumen Sukuna, the light of this society. Which means you are a huge target to Kenjaku" he says.
You hold his hands that were still on your shoulders.
"But what about you? What will they do to you?"
"They may punish me. But don't worry I can manage"
You shake your head.
"What about Sukuna?"
"We can manage. We will seal him ourselves. But for now, you must go (y/n)"
"I can't leave without you!"
"We will never be lost. We will always find a way to see each other again. Never lost, always found"
He leads you inside the cave. In there was a bed of grass filled with flowers. Light adorns it from the cracks of the cave at the top.
"This is it"
"Tengen"
"I have failed you (y/n). I'm sorry that I didn't realize sooner that you were miserable in that temple. You were already trapped and alone. And yet you smile so bright and help those so ungrateful...even me"
You cut him off and hug him. Cupping his face with both of your hands, you look at him.
"You didn't fail me. You taught me everything I needed to know. I still doubt myself that I'm a powerful deity next to Sukuna, but you and everyone else that I love gave me life. Thank you, Tengen. I'm glad that I met you"
You pull a flower from your bag and give it to him.
"Here, it's so we meet again"
Tengen grabs it and nods.
He sets you down on the bed of flowers. Casting his technique he puts you into a deep sleep. It almost felt like being in a long coma, but even a coma can almost be like death.
You were never going to wake up unless the evil of Jujutsu society comes back.
Tengen closes off the cave with a huge boulder. He creates a seal that only you can open yourself when the time comes when you wake up.
"Forgive me, (y/n)" he whispers.
_____
Sukuna was reading scriptures in his shrine. When suddenly he felt a shockwave in his whole body.
He gets up and shoves his scrolls and everything on the ground.
Uraume and Kanzaki were there witnessing their master's short tantrum.
"Lord Sukuna?" Uraume says.
He covers his face and looks back out toward his view of the land. He begins to laugh.
"How did I not see it? I didn't take her seriously the first time when she made her vows. But now that she is gone, I can't control her to do my bidding. I was so close, but now the bind is broken, and she is no longer in my hands. That dumb woman was very clever after all...it makes me want her more now than ever" he snickers.
Sukuna steps out of the shrine.
"Uraume, Kanzaki. I am in a bad mood right now, so accompany me to whatever village is near"
Many centuries will go by before you and Sukuna realize that you two will meet again.
Notes:
I might not be fully correct on how all this went, like history and all. I just hope I made you guys proud and entertained. I have read the recent manga of JJK and yet not much has been shown of how Sukuna was like back then, other than being a lazy fuck and killing people, so I at least tried to make him out to be how he is. He's bad, what's more to it.
But thanks for sticking by. Aight bye🩵
Chapter 12: Chapter 11
Summary:
“The choices she made at that moment, will be the screams their souls create”
Notes:
I might as well post this because who knows when I’ll be back. I got final exams coming up so let this be something to keep you guys happy and full for now.
Chapter Text
It felt warm when it was supposed to be cold. Darkness didn't have one hold on your sleeping dreams.
Your dreams had all your family and friends where you wanted them to be. When Tengen put you to sleep, he wanted to put you to sleep where your dreams would make you happy.
The voices and dark thoughts trying to creep into you from before didn't seem to make a sound. At least you thought.
The moment you were in dreamland, you heard a horn ringing in your ear. A horn that was ringing in the sky.
And soon everything turns white. The moment your whole brain was cut off for point one milliseconds, and then light cascades your eyes.
Slowly your eyes open.
You were awake.
_____
Somewhere at a high school.
A blindfolded man named Gojo Satoru was holding an unconscious boy.
He looks at another boy who was injured on the ground.
"Alright, I'll take it from here!" Gojo says.
"Wait. If Sukuna is revived in Itadori Yuuji's body. Does that mean the light of deity is awake?"
Gojo puts his hand on his chin.
"Hmm, yeah seems like it. Today just got more exciting, huh"
"Are the higher-ups going to retrieve her?"
Gojo smirks.
"Nope. Cause I'm going to get her. Those old geezers don't need to know that (l/n) (y/n) is awake after 1000yrs. Just like Itadori Yuuji here, they will be both kept secret"
The boy gets up from the ground.
"She can be anywhere in this whole city. How long will it take for you to find her?"
Gojo waves his hand.
"Megumi, you doubt me too much"
_____
Waking up, you didn't know whether to move your body or stay where you are. You weren't in shock, but you were also feeling everything around you again.
Slowly, you get up and feel the bed of flowers and grass under you. They didn't wilt. Looking up at the opening hole, you see hundreds of stars above you.
Your (e/c) takes in the scene before heading outside. You hesitated at first to open the seal. You didn't know how many years it's been since you were out to sleep.
Everything could be different. And you didn't know how you will handle it.
You took deep breaths, and mutter a spell that rolls open the boulder. The moment it opens, you take a peek outside. There were still trees and flourishing bushes everywhere.
You remember that you were kept at a mountain. Taking a couple of steps out, you look around and take in the fresh air.
You smile with relief that nothing hasn't changed here in this area. You decided that you had to make your way out of the mountain, and you warp to an open area.
And right there is when the shock hits you.
From afar you see a bustling city. So huge that you couldn't comprehend. You see things flying in the sky that you have never seen before.
Of course, you see small-town villages in some areas, but they were not like anything you have seen before in your life.
Everything was so modern.
"Is this...the future?" You mutter.
You decide to walk down to the nearest town. The closest was a countryside town not too far from you.
After walking for what seemed to be hours, you hug yourself because of the cold. It was still night, so the temperature was a bit low where you are.
Soon you remember Tengen. You wanted to see Tengen again if he was still around.
You remember his words so clearly 1000yrs ago that you two will find each other again.
"Never lost, always found" you whisper as you repeat those words.
You were scared. You wake up in an era you know nothing about, and you don't know the first thing to do. In short, you were completely lost right now.
Too busy being in your head, voices were calling out for you.
"Hey little woman, you lost?"
"Is she some kind of street performer?"
"Who cares, she looks cute"
Looking back you see a couple of men driving by. They stop to look at you. The man in the driver's seat comes out and walks towards you.
You take a few steps back as you look in fear.
"Hey, now I'm not gonna hurt you. My friends and I were wondering if you need a ride"
You look back and you see three other men in that vehicle.
You felt something wrong.
You shake your head and kept moving forward.
The man grabs you by the arm.
"Hey come on now don't be like that. Alright listen, we were looking for women like you who are willing to do little entertainment videos. You'll be famous"
You try to yank your arm from his grasp.
"Let me go," you said.
"Alright, you want to do this the hard way! Hey help me out here, we got a struggler!"
You push and shove every guy that was trying to drag you in the car.
"N-no! No!" You yell and grunt from their aggressive holds.
And that's when you heard a sound-like snap in your head.
You suddenly fall to the floor. You open your eyes as they begin to dilate and come back to normal.
The four men take a step forward to see if you were okay. But then suddenly your whole body rises, and your eyes rolled back until there was nothing but your sclera.
Voices begin to possess you.
"I say unto you, the era of bloodshed and terror is nigh"
"The time of the chill darkness and light will bare its fangs is nigh"
All four men were backing away slowly in fear and confusion. There was black dust forming around you.
"Wh...what the hell is this?"
"The time of madness and the time of contempt"
And soon everything goes black.
Next day.
You were in a daze. Someone was softly shaking your shoulder to wake you up. You hear the noises of sirens and people around you.
"Come on girl, wake up"
Opening your eyes you look around, you turn your head and see a couple of the men dead on the floor, and the other with a pole sign impaled in his chest.
The car they had was flipped over and crushed. One of them was under it.
You look in fear as you were lifted by a woman in uniform. She looks at you with caring eyes.
"Are you okay?"
You slowly nod.
"Do you remember what happened?"
You gaze forward with worry on your face.
"They...they tried to abduct me..."
The woman quickly grabs a blanket and wraps it around you. She slowly lifts you from the ground and takes you to sit in an ambulance vehicle.
"The paramedics are going to check on you for any signs of injuries. After that, we will take you to the police station to ask you a few questions about this incident"
You didn't say a word as you kept on looking straight forward. You didn't know what happened at all. All you knew was that everything went black.
_____
After the doctors have checked you for injuries, you were okay to go. The police took you in to ask you questions about the event.
You only said that the men were trying to abduct you and after that, you blacked out. Though you still looked daze.
"Do you have any family members to call to pick you up?" They asked.
You shake your head.
"Do you know where you live?"
You shake your head.
"I can take her in" a middle-aged woman comes in.
"I don't mind taking care of her until she gets back on her feet," she says.
The police nod.
"Alright, then you're free to go"
The woman comes towards you with a gentle smile.
"I was the one that called them. And I just had to see how you were doing. Are you okay? You seem to still be in shock"
You nod.
"I'm fine now...thank you"
The lady smiles and takes your hand gently.
"Alright then, let's go home. You're safe now"
Chapter 13: Chapter 12
Notes:
As an early birthday day gift to me I give you two chapters as thanks for sticking by this story💖
Chapter Text
The woman takes you inside her home. She lived in an apartment in Chiba. You were in awe by so many of the tall buildings and modern technology around you.
Opening the door, tiny footsteps were heard.
"Mom your home! Who's this?"
The little girl tilts her head and looks at you. She smiles.
"You're really pretty," she says.
"This is my daughter Hina. Hina this is...I'm sorry I don't think I asked for your name"
"(Y/n)"
"(Y/n), I'll get the bath ready for you and bring you a spare change of clothes. For now, take a seat"
She guides you to the sofa. Taking a seat, you look around and stare at photos. The little girl named Hana quickly takes a seat next to you.
Curiosity was in her eyes.
"Are you going to stay with us forever?" She asks.
"Oh, Uhm. I don't know"
"Because if you are then it will be more livelier here," she says.
"Is that so?"
"Uh-huh. It's just me and my mom. I'm not sure where my dad is, but my mom said that he had to take a business trip that requires him to stay wherever he is for a long time" she says.
You look at the little girl and see a bit of sadness in her eyes.
"How long has he been gone for?" You asked.
"I don't know. Long, since I was three. I'm eight now...I don't think he's really coming back" she says.
You can sense her gloomy aura around her.
You rub her head.
"Don't be sad. Maybe one day he will come back"
"And if he doesn't?"
"Well, then you know your mom will always be there for you. She hasn't left you and you know she loves you very much"
The little girl soon puts on a bright smile and nods.
You didn't understand why she was telling you personal things like this to a stranger like you. But maybe she's been lonely for a long time and she just didn't care who she'd talk to at this point.
It didn't matter though. No matter who was in trouble, you hope to do the best you can to help them.
"(Y/n), the bath is ready!"
You go and wash yourself up. After that the woman who you know her name now is Maira, gives you a pair of clothes.
You wear it and found how comfortable it is.
Modern clothes these days seem to be much better than the clothes back centuries ago. You thought.
"Oh my, it looks nice on you"
Maira gives you a nice long light pink dress that goes down to your calves, a red leather jacket, and nice short dark brown boots.
"Thank you for the clothes" you bow.
"Hehe, they are yours"
Quickly you raise your hands.
"I couldn't!"
"Nonsense, you don't seem to have any belongings so the least I can do is give you these clothes," she says.
Soon after, Maira, Hina, and you all go out shopping. Japan was very busy. It was no longer the quiet land you used to live in.
The population was massive. And you see so many signs and lights adorning the buildings. Strange vehicles riding around the streets instead of horses carrying along carriages.
Everything was better than before. It almost makes you jealous.
You felt hands pulling on your dress.
"(Y/n), let's go get you some jewelry!"
"Hina, don't drag her" Maira scolds.
"I-it's fine. And I'm not too big on those kinds of things" you said.
"But they would look nice on you" Hina pouts.
You sigh.
"Well, if you think so, then you choose for me"
Hina smiles and then runs inside.
Hina chooses bangle bracelets and a string flower necklace.
She pulls out some allowance money she has to pay for it, but sadly she was a bit short. Her mom laughs.
"I got it sweetie" She pays for the items and you wear them.
"Pretty!" Hina is in awe.
"Thank you. You two are doing so much for me. I don't know how to repay you"
Maira waves her hand.
"A young woman like you who has no family or place to stay, needs to be taken care of. You don't look like you have bad intentions so just let us help you"
You nod. Walking down the streets with them, you stop in your tracks and see a flower shop. There were so many pretty flowers you couldn't help but stare.
So pretty...
"Oh, you're looking at flowers?" Maira asks.
"Long ago, I use to pick so many wildflowers and gift them to so many people in my hometown"
"Really? Where did you use to live?"
You hesitate for a moment and did the best you can to answer.
"Ah, in...at the far East. North-east?" You pull a nervous smile and point in the direction.
"Oh, so you use to live in Kyoto?"
You nod.
That's what the town is called now?
Maira looks at your confused face and only chuckles.
"It's okay if you don't remember, hopefully, it all comes back to you. Here, I'll give you a few coins for you if you want to buy some flowers. Hina and I will meet you back at the house. Are you okay going back by yourself? Do you know where we live exactly?"
You nod.
"Alright then, see you home! Come in Hina"
Hina waves to you and you wave back.
Looking at the shop, you go inside and look at all the wonderful flowers. You remember some back 1000yrs ago, and some that were new to you.
Taking some in a basket, you spot a couple of apricot flowers. They were white and very vibrant. You remember that those flowers convey faithfulness, elegance, and purity of heart.
As you admire them, you didn't realize that someone walks up next to you.
"Let me buy them for you"
You snap out of it and look at who spoke.
A man with long black hair, wearing a monk robe, and what you can see appears to be a scar on his head.
He looked pretty weird.
"Oh no you don't have to. I have some money to buy some myself. People have been giving me things for free already today" you said with that warm smile of yours.
The man smiles.
"Well, I hope you don't mind if you let me. Just for once at least" he picks up the flowers and pays for them.
You at least pay for the rest you picked out.
He then gives the flowers to you. And the moment you touch his hands, you felt a wave of shock.
By surprise, you pull your hands away from him quickly and take a step back. The man looks at you confused.
"Are you alright?"
"...yes. I-I'm sorry, I guess that was weird" You laugh it off and grab the flowers.
"Thank you very much" You bow and walk back home quickly.
The man smirks.
"(L/n) (y/n), half curse spirit, half human. The deity of light. To finally meet you at last. All due in time, we will see each other again"
_____
Later in the evening.
Back at home, you take your shoes off and place the flowers on your dresser. You sigh as you rub your head.
You still couldn't get over that shockwave you felt earlier from the man before. His presence felt off and it bugged you a bit.
What was that all about?
You heard a knock on your door. You come and open it to see Maira.
"I hope I'm not bothering you, but someone is here to see you. He's saying that he knows you?"
Coming out of your room you see a tall man in black clothing. He had a blindfold covering his eyes and he has white hair.
He gives you a smile and waves at you.
"Yo, it's been a long time (l/n) (y/n)!"
Chapter 14: Chapter 13
Chapter Text
"Oh hello...you are?"
"Ah! I can't believe you don't remember me (y/n)! We use to be good friends! My name is Gojo Satoru" He dramatically says.
You heard that last name before.
You put on an awkward smile.
"Oh yeah? Interesting"
Maira gently puts her hand on her shoulders.
"She seems to have lost a bit of her memories"
"I see, I see. Well (y/n), we use to go to school together a couple of years ago. You would always pick a bunch of wildflowers and give them out to everyone for no reason. You would make lots of friends, even the asshole ones. You have such a big heart indeed"
He says as he pretends to blow his nose in tissue.
You couldn't help but spit out a laugh. You cover your mouth. You didn't know who that man is, but he had quite a sense of humor.
"Well, I do remember giving a lot of flowers away. And being nice to people is just a general act of kindness" you said.
"But you would go above and beyond for them, and those beautiful (e/c) eyes. I can never forget about them. Your eyes and kindness are what lure them in"
You sweat.
"Th...thank you?"
"Now that I found you, let's go home!"
As he was about to grab your hand, Maira stepped in.
"Wait! I understand now that if you two have been friends, but you're not going to hurt her are you? This is all very sudden for you to just take her like that. (Y/n) how do you feel about all this?"
Looking at Maira and Gojo, you look at Gojo and feel his aura. He had an insane aura going on, but it was loyal, strong, and true.
He seemed like he could be trusted. And you have a feeling that he wasn't just an ordinary person.
If the reason you were awake after 1000yrs was because of the evil coming back, then maybe he can explain.
"I think...I can trust him. Okay, I'll go with you Gojo Satoru" you smile.
He smiles back at you.
"I'll wait for you outside then"
He steps out so he can give you and the people a moment.
You look back at Maira and hold her hands.
"Thank you for taking care of me. I wish I could've done something to repay you for your hospitality"
She laughs.
"I told you, having company is good enough"
You nod. You quickly go to your room and grab the flowers you bought. You give Maira a couple and told her each meaning for them. She only smiles and hugs you.
Hina comes out of her room and you hug her. You tell her to be good and always keep smiling. She was about to cry but she holds it in and nods.
It hasn't been long since you stayed with them, but it almost felt like home to you.
Your memories of leaving home were coming back to you again.
As you wave goodbye, you come outside and see Gojo waiting for you. He looks at you and smiles.
"Flowers?" He looks at your basket.
You go through some and pick out one for him.
"It's a Kinmokusei it means true and noble"
Gojo takes it.
"And that's who I am to you?"
"In my eyes yes. I felt your aura, and it's pretty and wild. But in a good way"
Gojo chuckles.
"A compliment coming from a deity, I'm honored"
"Haha, I guess you know about me"
"You're all over history scrolls and books from the jujutsu world. A woman with (e/c) who is the light of hope, that will bring everyone together and peace to the jujutsu world"
Gojo imitates exactly what the prophecies had said 1000yrs ago.
He brings your body close to him and teleports away. There you two land in what seems to be a schoolyard.
He puts you down and you look at him.
"So I guess you also know that I had...meetings with Ryoumen Sukuna as well"
"Yup. The wife of the evil god himself. Though it was said that you were manipulated" he says.
"Do you believe that?"
Gojo hums and just shrugs.
"I'm not too big on all the history crap. Sometimes those old higher-ups have a way of writing what's true and not"
You laugh.
"Yeah, figures. I'm not a big fan of them either"
Looking around, you can see that the school didn't look so ordinary. It seemed secluded.
"So where are we exactly?"
"We are in Tokyo Metropolitan Curse Technical College. A school for curse users"
You were in awe as you look around the area.
"Everything looks so nice!"
Gojo nods.
"Here is where you will be staying. I have a room specifically for you" he says.
"So if I'm staying here. Am I going to be kept here forever?"
Gojo scratches the back of his head.
"It's pretty hard to say, you are a very powerful sorceress. You'll be under my protection, though. But you have freedom wherever you want to go, I'm not too strict. As long as you're with me or with my students"
"Okay, Thank you so much!"
Gojo looks at you and can see how big your smile went and the gleam in your eyes.
"You never had a lot of freedom have you?" He asks.
You shake your head.
"I mean, somewhat. But it wasn't much. In my old life, every sorcerer wanted to keep me to themselves. They said they worshipped me and stuff, but I had a feeling that they just never had considered how I felt. I guess they thought gods didn't have feelings" you say.
Gojo continues to listen.
"The reason why I was finally able to go out for a while was because of Tengen. If it wasn't for him, then I would've been pretty miserable"
Gojo smiles.
"You know it's funny, they still worship you. They made a shrine just for you and still offer you gifts so you can bless them"
You sigh.
"After everything that had happened? I ran away from confrontation and they still worship me as their protector. So draining" you groan.
Gojo laughs.
"Tengen has said some things to protect you. Especially being Sukuna's wife"
"My bond with Sukuna has been broken the moment I was sealed. So calling myself his wife is pretty unnecessary now" you sadly say.
Gojo hums.
"Some accepted that you were manipulated and would still worship you. While others look at you as a traitor. Forever lost into the darkness"
You just sigh and shake your head.
"Can't get away"
Gojo laughs.
"Do you have feelings for him though?"
You stop in your tracks and gave it some thought.
"...will it surprise you if I say yes? I know it's wrong since he's done a lot. And yet, all reasoning goes away when he gently caresses me. Holds me and gives me light kisses"
"He does that?"
"Only to me"
"Oh man, I'm totally gonna tease him on that then!"
You look at him confused.
"What?"
"Oh yeah, I almost forgot to tell you. So you know the reason you're awake after centuries of being sealed was that if the evil came back, right?"
You nod.
"Well, Sukuna is revived again and his soul is inside a teenage boy's body. Oh, and he lives here in this school" Gojo casually says.
You had a blank face for a moment, then soon it turns into shock.
"WHAT!?"
"Surprise!"
_____
Next day.
You wake up and get dressed. You were in a nice room that Gojo placed you in. At the end of the halls. It was nice and decent, but nothing like the room you had long ago.
And you liked it that way. He tells you to be ready for him outside of your room and go towards a dorm room a couple of hallways up. He said that he and two of his students will be picking up another student.
You were excited about what the day will bring for you.
Going down the hall, you see two young boys and Gojo himself.
"(Y/n), glad you can join us. Looks like your beauty sleep is showing" Gojo says.
You chuckle.
"Good morning, and these two must be your students"
You walk up to them and bow.
"Nice to meet you my name is (l/n) (y/n). But I suppose you already knew that since you two are jujutsu students" you say.
The boy with black hair greets you.
"I'm Fushiguro Megumi" he bows.
"Oh so nice and mature you are!"
And then you meet eyes with the pink boy. And something about him felt familiar. You remember the spark.
"And my name is Itadori Yuuji! I like girls like Jennifer Lawrence!" He says.
Megumi scowls while you just laugh.
"Well I don't know who that is but I bet she's a lucky lady to have an admirer like you!"
"Are we all ready to go then?" Gojo asks.
"Hold on just a moment" you rummage through your basket and pull out two flowers.
"This one's for you" You give Megumi a white orchid. He takes it but looks confused.
"It symbolizes maturity, other than love and beauty. I hope you like it. I give flowers as gifts to people" you say.
"Yup, she's a flower connoisseur, so if you have any questions about any flower, she's got the answer," Gojo says.
You blush.
"I'm not that great, I just use to forage different kinds of flowers. I actually wish to grow my own garden one day"
Without knowing you give Itadori a yellow lily.
"And this flower..." you gasp just for a moment as you look at the flower.
Itadori slowly takes it and looks at you curiously.
"What is it?" He asks.
"Oh sorry, Uhm, this flower. It means that we meet again"
"Really? But we just met?"
"Yellow lilies represent a reunion between two lovers. I'm sorry, I'm not...really sure why I gave you that flower"
Gojo smirks. He told you that Sukuna's vessel was here in school, but he didn't tell you who. He decides to tell you once you all pick up the third student.
He claps his hands.
"Hate to cut things short here, but it's time to go! Your ride is here"
"Huh? You're not coming with us?" Itadori asks.
"I'll catch up with you guys, but for now go ahead. And be sure to watch over (y/n)" Gojo waves.
_____
You three arrive at the destination where you wait for Gojo.
"Harajuku...? Wow this treat is so good!" You munch on a popsicle stick that Itadori didn't mind getting for you.
"How are there only three first-years? Isn't that too few?" Itadori asks.
"Well, have you ever met anyone who can see curses before?"
"Nope"
You butt in on the conversation.
"Hmm, it's kinda rare for a normal human to see the unnatural. That's why our world is very different than the average person's world. If you talked about it with them, they'll just think your mental!" You happily say.
Megumi sweats at your bubbly response.
"It just proves how small a minority of jujutsu sorcerers are," Megumi says.
"Didn't you say I was the third?" Itadori asks.
"Their entry was decided a while ago. You know what our school's like. Everyone has unique circumstances"
You continue to lick and munch on your popsicle until you see Gojo in sight.
"Sorry for the wait! Oh? Your uniform made it in time, I see" Gojo looks at Itadori.
"Yeah, it's a perfect fit. Though it's slightly different from Fushiguro's. It had a hood, for one"
"That's because the uniforms can be customized upon request," Gojo says.
"But I never put in any requests"
"I was the one who put in the custom order"
Itadori looks in awe and just shrugs.
"Whatever, I guess"
You clasp your hands and admire Itadori's uniform.
"I think it looks good on you Itadori! It looks very you"
"Thanks!"
"You just need to be careful. Gojo-sensei has a tendency to do things like that. More importantly, why are we meeting up in Harajuku?" Megumi asks.
"Because it's what she asked for"
"Hey, popcorn! I want some!"
"What is that?" You say.
"I'll share some with you, (y/n)!"
You give Itadori a thumbs up.
"Okay!"
Walking around you see so many people walking around the streets from corner to corner. You were fascinated by so many things you've never seen before.
And there were so many delicious treats you've never had.
That's when you stop and see a short brown-haired girl. She had the same uniform as Megumi and Itadori.
You point.
"Hey, I think that's the girl you guys are waiting on. Wow she's fierce"
You can see the girl clutching the poor man from running away.
"We're about to go talk to her? This is kinda embarrassing" Itadori asks.
You munch on a crepe Itadori got for you.
"Hmm, hmm"
"So are you," Megumi scowls at Itadori.
"Hey! Over here!" Gojo calls out.
"Damn, what's up with that blindfold?" The girl calls out.
Before introductions, she needed to put her bags in a locker. Soon after she did that, she looks over at everyone.
"Kugisaki Nobara. Be happy, boys. I'm the one woman in your group"
She does a stare down at the two boys, and then suddenly sees you. You were looking at her with your (e/c) that she has never seen before.
You just give her a warm smile and wave.
"I'm Itadori Yuuji. I'm from Sendai"
"Fushiguro Megumi"
Soon she begins to pull a face of judgment.
Kugisaki sighs.
"I always get stuck with unfortunate circumstances. The only one that gives me peace of mind is that pretty lady right here"
Kugisaki mentions you which surprises you. You smile and bow.
"Thank you, my name is (l/n) (y/n). It's a pleasure to meet you Kugisaki"
You pick out a flower for her.
"This is for you. It's a snapdragon, it represents strength and graciousness. Because of how strong your spirit is and how beautiful you look"
Kugisaki takes the flower and looks back at you. She then suddenly pulls you in a hug.
"Too kind! Nee-san is too kind! I want to keep you all to myself and away from these ugly guys!"
You only laugh as she has you in a hold.
“We’re right here you know” Yuuji mumbles.
"Are we going somewhere from here?" Megumi cuts in.
Gojo chuckles.
"We do have all three of you together. Not to mention, two of you are from the countryside. So of course we're going on a tour of Tokyo!"
Yuuji and Kugisaki gasps and excitedly chants.
"Tokyo! Tokyo! Tokyo! We love Tokyo!"
"Huh?"
"Eh?! Really?!" You butt in.
"TDL! I want to go to TDL!"
"Dumbass! TDL's in Chiba! Let's go to Chinatown, Sensei!" Yuuji says.
"Chinatown? Isn't that in a different country? Chinatown?" You mumble to yourself.
"Chinatown's in Yokohama!" Kugisaki yells back at Itadori.
"Yokohama's a part of Tokyo!
"The hell?! Quite spouting nonsense!"
You fidget with your fingers as you listen to what Kugisaki and Itadori were spouting.
"I will now announce our destination!”
The two teens get on one knee and listen.
"Roppongi!"
"Ro-ppon-gi?!"
"...Roppongi?" You tilt your head.
Megumi taps your shoulder lightly. You look at him and he just shakes his head.
Soon Gojo takes everyone to an abandoned building.
"There's a curse there," Gojo says.
"You liar!" Itadori and Kugisaki say.
You nervously chuckle.
"Oh, dear"
Chapter 15: Chapter 14
Chapter Text
"This isn't even Roppongi!"
"You are toying with us country folk!"
"There's a bit of cemetery nearby. The double whammy of that and an abandoned building bright out a curse" Gojo says.
"So they do pop up more often around graves?" Itadori asks while Kugisaki spins around in frustration.
"The issue isn't the cemetery itself. People associate cemeteries with fear" Megumi says.
"Oh, so it's the same with school wasn't it?"
"Hold up. He didn't even know that yet?" Kugisaki asked.
Megumi explains what happened making Kugisaki jump in shock.
"He swallowed a special-grade cursed object?! Gross! Unbelievable! That's so unsanitary and disgusting!" Kugisaki backs up in disgust.
"What?!"
"I agree," Megumi says.
"Special grade?" You mumble.
"I want to know what all of you are capable of. Just think of this as a field test. Nobara, Yuuji, you two go exorcise the curse inside that building" Gojo says.
"Huh? But I thought only curses could exorcise curses, right? I can't use any jujutsu yet"
"You're half a curse already. There's cursed energy flowing throughout your body. Though controlling that energy isn't something you can learn overnight"
It was funny to you that Gojo almost sounded like Tengen when he told you about your cursed energy.
"Use this" Gojo hands Itadori a weapon.
"Whoa!"
"It's the cursed tool, slaughter demon. It's a weapon imbued with cursed energy. It'll work on curses, too"
Once Kugisaki and Itadori head inside, Gojo calls out for him.
"Oh, one more thing. Don't let Sukuna out. I'd you use him, you'll get rid of all the curses nearby in a flash, but you'll also drag everyone around into it. Well, except (y/n) here"
Your eyes widen when Gojo mentions Sukuna. You wonder why his aura felt familiar. Sukuna was inside Itadori.
"Got it. I won't let Sukuna out"
Itadori gives a thumbs up.
You turn to look at Itadori as you walk up next to him.
"So it's you. I thought you felt familiar"
"Huh? Do you know Sukuna?"
You nod.
Kugisaki interrupts them.
"Hey, hurry up already!"
"Ah, yeah, yeah!"
Itadori runs inside while he leaves you standing in wonder. You wanted to feel his soul if you could see Sukuna. But right now wouldn't be the time.
You'll ask him later.
_____
Sitting on a bench you can hear the noise of curses along with Itadori and Kugisaki.
"Wow, it's getting pretty wild in there"
you said as you kicked your feet up and down.
"That Yuuji...he's missing a few up here. He has no hesitation when it comes to killing these things that take the form of living creatures, albeit bizarre-looking ones, trying to kill him" Gojo says.
You smile.
"That's some chivalry he's got then. Not a lot of normal people would face such things head-on"
"Right? And it's not like he's been familiar with curses for a long time. This is a boy who used to live a normal high school life. You've seen plenty of jujutsu sorcerers, even those with talent, give up in frustration because they couldn't conquer their fear or disgust"
"Gojo-san—"
"Satoru. You can call me Satoru if you like, (y/n). It's only fair since I call you by your first name"
"Oh, okay. Well, I just have a question. Itadori. How did he come across being a vessel for Sukuna?" You ask.
"Ah, well he pretty much was trying to save Megumi from a giant curse that wanted Sukuna's finger. So on the verge of almost dying, he took it upon himself to swallow the finger and have the souls of Sukuna inside him" he says.
"I see..." you understand now.
You woke up again because Sukuna was back. You weren't surprised since he's the evil spirit in this world.
You wish you didn't have to face him again just to kill him. And in another innocent person's body no less.
But if you don't, many lives can be at stake. You failed the first time when so many expected you to.
He showed some parts of himself that no one has ever seen but you. But he also showed you parts of him that explain the reason why he is the king of curses.
You just didn't know.
Your feelings may be the reason for getting in the way.
"Itadori Yuuji has to consume all fingers and then get executed. If all things go well. If he dies, then the curse inside him dies" Gojo says.
Megumi didn't say a word and gazed at you.
"Is that so..."
"Are you thinking about Sukuna?" Gojo asks.
You chuckle softly and shake your head.
"Just thinking about how messy things are getting"
You sigh.
"How does he feel about that?" You ask.
"He doesn't mind it. He was willing to accept that choice"
"With so much life ahead of him? What an interesting boy"
Looking up from the building, you see a cursed spirit fly out. The moment that Megumi was about to use his cursed energy, the spirit disappeared.
"She's crazy, all right" Gojo smirks.
_____
The sun was setting, and Gojo along with Megumi took the little boy back home.
You stick with Itadori and Kugisaki as you all wait.
"Did you know I get into a foul mood when I'm hungry?" Kugisaki says.
"When are you not in a foul mood?" Itadori mumbles.
"I'm so glad you two are safe," you said.
Itadori puts on his cocky exterior.
"It was no big deal, I was able to knock that cursed spirit away"
"Huh?! You mean I did!" Kugisaki intervenes.
"Yeah right! You let go of your weapon, stupid!"
You only sweat at their little argument, but smile.
"How about I heal you two then? You must be exhausted after all the work you put"
Kugisaki and Itadori just look at you confused as you clasp both of your hands together. You close your eyes and focus on them.
Soon green glowing energy starts to come out around the two teens.
"Nee-chan what's up with this!?"
"Hey, I'm starting to feel a lot better. Stronger actually"
You stop and then open your eyes.
"I fully healed you two, it's no big deal. It's just something I do" you shrug.
Kugisaki and Itadori both had tears in their eyes.
"(Y/n), you are a goddess from heaven"
"You're too good for this world"
You lift both of your hands and just laugh at their action and praises.
"Nee-chan, if you have cursed energy, then how come you don't have the same uniform as us? Are you a teacher like that weirdo Gojo-sensei?" Kugisaki asks.
"Not really. It's a long complicated story" you said.
"(Y/n), you've met Sukuna before right?" Itadori asks. You nod.
"Gojo-sensei has mentioned that he was some kind of evil god 1000yrs ago. Would that make you someone who lived 1000yrs ago too?"
You quirk your eyebrow and smirk at his question.
"Hehe, yup"
"Eh?! 1000yrs! But you don't look old, you look really good, nee-chan what's your secret?" Kugisaki asks.
You laugh.
"Lots of sleep"
Kugisaki didn't seem to like your answer and just crossed her arms looking sad.
"Hey guys!"
You all turn to see Gojo and Megumi coming back.
"We made sure the kid got home. Now shall we go grab some food?"
"Steak!"
"Sushi!"
"Whatever is good!"
"Leave it all to me! And you, Megumi?"
Megumi ignores everyone as he looks at his phone.
"Okay, let's go"
Megumi snaps out of his phone and looks back at everyone walking away.
You giggle and pull his arm.
"Come on Megumi let's go!" You make a fist and raise it in the air.
"Oh, yeah..."
While walking down the streets, Kugisaki just remembered her bags.
"Oh, I forgot about my biggest haul of the day. Hey, you, go fetch my things" she tells Itadori.
"Huh? Why should I do it? Right, Fushiguro?"
You look at Megumi while still holding his hand.
"Huh? What's the matter, Fushiguro?" Itadori asks.
"Nothing"
"He's pouting because he didn't get to join in," Gojo says.
"Aw don't pout Megumi, you'll get the next one" you poke his cheek. He blushes as he turns away.
"It's not that!"
"Fufu, what a child," Kugisaki says.
Chapter 16: Chapter 15
Notes:
Merry Christmas guys, and/or happy holidays🩵
Chapter Text
"Are they going to be okay?" You asked.
Gojo hums and spins around his chair to look at you.
"I'm sure they will be," he says.
"I don't mind going with them if they need a healer or give their techniques a boost!" You show Gojo your arm as you flex it.
Gojo laughs.
"I know. But you can't be roaming around too much. If something were to happen to you, things could turn out bad"
You sigh.
"You said your students can protect me, plus it's more than one. But I can also be of use to them. If you get reports back saying that it's a curse womb, it could become a special-grade"
"Then I'll be there to stop it. So don't worry"
Gojo gets up from his chair and gives your head a rub.
"I have a business trip to take care of, so you'll come with me and I can take you to some places to relax. There's a café I think you'll like"
You thought for a moment, gazing at the floor then nodded.
"Okay"
You still weren't sure of the situation.
_____
Itadori, Megumi, and Kugisaki were standing outside of a detention center.
Ijichi explains to Itadori about curse spirits and their grades.
"On a day like today, that would be Gojo-sensei taking care of a special-grade curse," Megumi says.
"I see...so where is Gojo-sensei?"
"Away on business. He's not someone who should be loafing around at the school in the first place" Megumi says.
"And who's watching (y/n)? Didn't he say once that someone should look after her?" Itadori asks.
"She's probably with Gojo-sensei. Honestly, she hasn't left his side for a while. The only time he does is if we're taking care of her"
"So what's so special about (y/n) that she can't be left alone when going out? I like the attention, but it gets too much does it?" Kugisaki asks.
Ijichi steps in.
"Some of you may not know if Gojo hasn't explained it already, but (l/n) is a 1000-year-old sorceress. It's written in scriptures that she is the goddess of light. In other words, she is the light of hope who will bring everyone together and peace to the jujutsu world. Her job is to stop the darkness and nothing more"
"She mentioned that she was around 1000yrs ago, but I never knew she had that much of a responsibility," Itadori says.
"So she's an actual goddess? Damn, that explains it. She's so pretty and kind. I wouldn't blame anyone being her friend" Kugisaki says.
"But not everyone knows about her. Gojo and us all know about her existence" Megumi says.
"How come?" Itadori asks.
"Long ago the light of deity fell in love with Ryoumen Sukuna. But many sorcerers have said it was manipulation. Every sorcerer still worships her as their savior while others see her as a traitor. There's a lot of texts about her but some may not be as accurate" Megumi says.
"The only one who knows the full story is her and her master. He was the one who saved her from almost being executed since it's said that she abandoned her duties. So if the higher-ups now know she's around, they can have her apprehended" Ijichi said.
Everyone didn't know what to say about all that. If they wanted to know more they'd have to come to you. But they didn't know whether that would still be considered a sensitive topic.
"Anyways, let's continue with the mission. In this case, it's an abnormal one, and most urgent. Do not fight under any circumstances. If you encounter a special grade. Your options are either run or die"
_____
Somewhere with Gojo.
You were sipping on a green cream soda. You had both of your hands on your cheeks while sipping the beverage.
You sigh as were in thought.
"How is it?" Gojo says.
"Hm? Ah, it's pretty good. Thank you"
"Sorry things are taking longer than expected"
"No worries, I'm just glad you had me stay in a nice room while you took care of things" you smile.
"I didn't want them to suspect you" he looks at the menu.
"So what else do you want to try? You can go crazy if you like"
You didn't say anything while you were still thinking. Gojo sees your face contorting so he leans forward and lightly flicks your forehead.
You come back to him.
"Stop thinking"
"I'm sorry"
Gojo sighs.
"The light of deity. I guess it's just natural for you to care so much about people's well-being"
"They are your students. You don't worry?"
"I try not to. Sometimes I do, but I don't think about it. I just think they'll come out alive. You can't let your emotions get the upper hand"
You nod.
"You're right about me caring too much. My emotions get in the way a lot. And I sometimes don't think I'm strong enough to protect anyone. I try to be, but...I guess maybe that's why I ran the first time" You try to smile, but it slowly fades away.
Gojo knew you were talking about your past. And every time you do you get even more sad than before.
And to be honest, he didn't like to see someone so kind and full of life like you to be that way.
He knew you had a rough life only because of the elders. But his curiosity got to him and wondered what was your life like before you were chosen as some god.
"What was your life before the elders took you?"
You quickly gaze at Gojo with wide eyes. You soon grabbed your smile back and reminisced about it.
"It was fun. I would hang out with my friends and neighbors whenever we weren't doing anything. I would pick flowers from different areas. Flowers I've never seen before. I did chores with my mother while my father worked. And my father would always bring back some sort of gift for me" you giggle from the memories.
Gojo smiles and puts his hand on his chin.
"What kind of things did your father bring back for you?"
"Books to read. He'd bring me books about flowers. I guess that's why I was so fascinated by them. And all other trinkets" you sigh.
"You're half human and half cursed spirit. Who exactly was a cursed spirit in your family?"
"My father. It's interesting, but I never thought my mother would fall in love with a cursed spirit like him. But he was pretty much more human than abnormalities" you laugh.
Gojo hums. He smiles as you are talking about your past. The good ones at least.
You stop for a moment and look at Gojo curiously. He noticed you staring.
"What is it?"
"You always wear that blindfold, and I'm curious to see what your eyes look," you say.
Gojo chuckles and soon takes his blindfold off. And you can see his sky-blue eyes. They were the most beautiful eyes you have ever seen.
"So this is the Gojo clan's jewels"
"You know about us?"
"I've heard about each clan. But never encountered them before. Your eyes are so beautiful" you say in awe.
"Not as beautiful as yours," he says.
You were taken aback by his words but just smiled and shook your head.
This was a moment that you won't forget.
_____
"I'll say it again, tell me where (l/n) (y/n) and I'll spare you and this brat's life," Sukuna says.
Megumi was face-to-face with Ryoumen Sukuna. The reason for that was that Itadori needed Sukuna's help to stop the special grade.
Sukuna stops the cursed spirit and retrieves his finger that was within the spirit.
But after switching off, Itadori didn't respond to switching back. This leads to Sukuna causing problems now at this moment with Megumi.
"Even if I knew where she was, I wouldn't tell you," Megumi says.
Sukuna sighs.
"I can live without a heart you know. But for this brat it's different"
Megumi hesitates for a moment, but he releases his shikigami on Sukuna.
Sukuna smirks.
"So be it. I'm outside, after all, so let's use the open area"
After the all-out brawl between Megumi and Sukuna. No surprise that Sukuna was gaining much of the upper hand.
But after time passes, Itadori comes back to his body. But his heart was missing. At that moment, Itadori dies from a withdrawn heart.
And so the news is sent to Gojo.
_____
The next day. Somewhere in Tokyo.
"Well, tell me. Was there any real reason to use a precious finger to test Sukuna's strength?" A curse with a volcano head says.
"Well, there wasn't much point to it with a half-baked test case. But we did learn a few things"
"Hmp, I'll be praying that's not just an excuse
"Lla refta ,sesruC fo gniK eht si eH"
"Stop talking! No one understands what you're saying!"
The light turns green and three curses along with a man and woman walk in the streets. The woman has her hands wrapped around the man's arm.
"We don't understand, yet the meaning flows right into our minds. It's creepy! By the way, you said you came across the light of deity?"
"Yes I did"
"Why didn't you capture her? If we need her for our plan, you should have just taken her by force!"
The man chuckles.
"I couldn't just simply take her. She has the same level of strength as Sukuna combined. It could've been a hassle"
The spirit scoffs.
"For someone like her who is half human and half spirit, she kisses the human's ass more"
"Hmm, I wouldn't be too sure. She believes in all fairness and morality that cursed spirits and humans should be treated with kindness if they aren't harming anyone"
"I do not understand what Ryoumen Sukuna sees in her. To be the wife of an evil god. They are two opposites"
The man chuckles.
"(L/n) (y/n). I wouldn't underestimate that woman. She is the light of hope to sorcerers. But she is also a child of wrath" the man says.
"Child of wrath?"
"She can summon a full army of curse spirits. If likely, special-grades. Think of the power she can use against the sorcerers. The goddess of light and hope would be no more. If we make her to be the goddess of darkness she will surely help us"
They all enter in a café.
"Welcome! Table for two?" A waitress says.
"Yes please"
Chapter 17: Chapter 16
Notes:
Happy new years everyone!🎉🩵
It’s year of the dragon too so where all my dragons at!
Chapter Text
Back in Jujutsu High. Deep within a dark hallway, you were inside a room with Gojo and Ijichi.
You were sitting next to Gojo.
You stare at a person who you know to be Itadori under a tarp. You had no words to say, nor any tears to shed.
You were just sad and angry at the same time. You told Gojo that you wanted to be with his students in case of any danger. But he didn't want you to.
While having a good time, his students were in trouble. You weren't upset at him, he was only trying to protect you. But you’re mad at yourself. You couldn't save anyone again. And that guilt transpired in you more.
"If you encounter it, your choices are to either run or die. I warned them that fighting was not an option" Ijichi says.
"It was intentional"
"Huh? What do you mean?"
"There was a special grade. Sending first-years to rescue five who may or may not be alive should be out of the question" Gojo says.
He takes a glance at you and back at Itadori's body.
"Besides, with Yuuji. I was the one who forced the issue and got his execution indefinitely suspended. Some higher-ups who didn't like that took advantage of my absence and the special grade to tactfully dispose of him"
So that seemed to take some weight off your shoulders. Gojo didn't know about there being a special grade involved. If anything it was the higher-up's fault.
"If the other two had also died, it'd be more harassment for me. And two birds with one stone for them" he says.
"But no one expected it to become a special grade by the time the dispatch was issued," Ijichi says.
"Searching for someone to blame us is just a pain"
"Satoru..." Gojo looks at you while you try not to scrunch your face.
"...the higher-ups are so cruel" you whisper while clutching your dress. Gojo takes your hand in comfort.
"(Y/n)...do you want me to just kill all of the higher-ups?"
You look at Gojo as your eyes widen. Ijichi gasps from his question. Before you say anything the door slides open as a woman with tired eyes comes in.
"You're not usually this emotional"
"It's good to see you, Ieri-san!" Ijichi says.
The woman named Ieri looks at you for a moment. She inspects you and hums.
"So this is the famous (l/n) (y/n). The goddess of light and wife of Ryoumen Sukuna"
"Ieri" Gojo warns her.
"It's alright" you smile as you stand up and bow.
"It's nice to meet you. And I wouldn't say that I'm his wife anymore" give a small smile.
Ieri nods.
"So I've been overhearing the conversation. And it looks to me...that you've taken quite a liking to him" She looks at Gojo.
"I've always been a nice guy who cares for my students," he says.
"Don't torment Ijichi too much"
"I don't care about that man's hardships"
"That so?"
Ieri removes the tarp to reveal Itadori.
"So this is..."
You can just see the open wound in the middle of his chest. It made you sick to your stomach.
Just who would do such a thing? You thought.
"Sukuna's vessel, huh?"
"I can take him apart as I please, right?"
"Don't!" You yell.
Everyone turns to you as you pull yourself back.
"I mean...I'm sorry"
"(Y/n), come here" Gojo waves his hands to you.
You walk towards him and he hugs you. You were taken aback by his action, but you succumbed to it.
"I know this is hard. Especially since you care about people so much. But you have to understand. He chose this" he says.
Without saying anything more you just nod. Gojo rubs your back for comfort.
"Make sure to get good use out of him," Gojo says.
"Oh, I will. Who do you think I am?"
You look at Itadori's pale body and wonder if Sukuna's soul is dead along with his. Would it take that much to kill him just like that?
_____
Inside Yuuji's body.
"This isn't the afterlife. It's my innate domain"
Right now, Sukuna was sitting on Yuuji's back.
"Innate domain? That thing Fushiguro was talking about?"
"You could also say we're in my mind. In other words, we're not dead yet. If you'll accept my conditions, I'll fix your heart and bring us back to life"
"Cocky bastard. You act all big, but I know you don't want to die either. I know you want to see (y/n), don't you?"
"The situation's changed. Shortly. I'll be able to see something interesting. And as for (y/n), I can feel her every time she's near. The thought of seeing my beloved wife again will be an intriguing reunion indeed. I will feel her again, her body, her power"
It didn't take long for Itadori to see that Sukuna has an obsession with you. He just couldn't believe that someone so beautiful and kind was the wife of some monster.
"What do you want with (y/n)? If you hurt her..."
"That's for me to know and for you to never find out brat. She's my wife so I can do whatever I please to her"
"You asshole"
"Now then. I have two conditions, one: when I chant "extension," you'll hand over your body for one minute. Two: you'll forget this promise"
"No way. I don't know what your goal is, but it's shady as hell. After what you did this time, I finally got it. You're evil. I'm not lending you my body again"
"Then I'll promise that I won't kill or injure anyone during that minute. So annoying"
"Like I can believe you!"
"It's not about whether you believe me or not. Besides I promised (y/n) that I wouldn't hurt anyone who wasn't a threat to me"
Yuuji scoffs.
"Like you can keep that promise"
"Technically I did. I just killed those who I thought were a threat to me. And let's just say a majority were" Sukuna sneers.
Yuuji wasn't even surprised. He honestly wishes to tell you these things about him right now, so you would see just how evil he is.
You probably knew, but you also had that set of mind that something could change inside him.
He won't change.
"This is a pact. I'll be the one punished if I break it. If you pursue selfish gain beyond your means, you'll earn retribution. I'm pretty sure you've experienced that before yourself"
"It wasn't a problem before!"
"Huh? Oh...that time I wanted to switch. And you were doing as that sorcerer told you to. A pact founded in mutual interest. That's one of the key factors behind all jujutsu"
"Fine. Move. I'll accept your conditions"
Sukuna gets off of Itadori and Itadori stands up to breathe.
"I don't know what you're trying to do. But it means I'll come back to life!" Yuuji punches Sukuna in the face.
"Like hell, I'd say that. Bring me back to life without any conditions? It's your fault I died in the first place. And I'm going to expose you to (y/n), just so she knows clearly who you are!"
Sukuna stays silent for a while. There was no need for you to know about what Sukuna has plans for you yet.
"And who is she going to believe? Her husband, or a pathetic immature brat?"
"She's nothing like you so of course she'll take a chance and believe me dumbass. That's who she is!"
Sukuna wipes his mouth.
"Then how about this? We'll fight to the death, and if you win, I'll do it without conditions, and you can tell (y/n) everything we conversed about. If I win. You come back to life under my conditions, and forget everything we have discussed"
"Sure! I'll beat you to—"
Everything went black.
And it ended just like that.
Chapter 18: Chapter 17
Chapter Text
Back in the living. You were sitting next to Gojo on a metal lounge chair.
"You know. I have a bad personality"
"Really? I'm finding that hard to believe" you said.
"Gojo-san has his moments once in a while" Ijichi sighs.
"Ijichi, expect a hard forehead flick later," Gojo says.
"F-forehead flick?!"
You lightly chuckle as you try to bring up your mood.
"Being a teacher isn't my style"
"Why did you want to teach at school then?" You kindly ask.
"Because I have a dream"
You sigh in awe as you continue to look at Gojo.
"A dream?"
"Yup. As you can see in this case with Yuuji the top of the jujutsu world is a den of vice. Conservative fools. Traditional fools. Arrogant fools. Just plain fools"
You chuckle and nod.
"I believe it"
"You? I'm surprised that you agree, (y/n)"
"Ah sorry! Was that rude of me to say?"
Gojo chuckles.
"No, I'm just teasing. But it's like a bargain sale on rotten mikan. I want to reset that garbage jujutsu world"
Ijichi gasps while you look at Gojo seriously.
"Killing everyone at the top would be an easy task. But they would just get replaced. It wouldn't bring a revolution. And if I did that, no one would follow me. That's why I chose education. To raise strong, clever comrades"
You smile and grab Gojo's hands in yours. He can just feel how soft your hands are. The feeling felt so good to him.
"You are a good man Satoru. And I know this isn't like me to support murder. But I understand the feeling. If you kill the higher-ups, well...just this once, I, (l/n) (y/n) give you my full support. And me being the goddess of this jujutsu world, that's all you need right? But continue to guide the young future sorcerers and show them the right path" you said.
Your voice was like milk and honey to the two men. Especially to Gojo. He felt something there from your words.
You were truly the sweetest woman he had ever met. And just being here and feeling your touch gives him so much comfort.
"Heh, you should be the one doing the whole "guiding sorcerers to the right path," thing"
You chuckle and just shrug.
"Besides, I occasionally toss my missions to my students. It's tough love" he playfully says.
"Aren't you just slacking off?" Ijichi ask.
You just giggle.
"They're all talented. Especially the third-year, Hakari, and second-year, Okkotsu. They'll become jujutsu sorcerers on par with me"
You never left Gojo's hand as you can feel his veins. He was clutching his hands to a fist so hard that it alarms you.
"Yuuji was one of those, as well"
You give him a sincere apologetic look.
"Hey, you three. I'm about to get started. Do you want to be here for this, (y/n)? You aren't squeamish are you?" Ieri asks.
Your eyes widen as you see the dead Itadori lift himself back to life. You had no words as you and Gojo just stared in awe.
Ieri turns around and looks surprised.
"Whoa, my dick is hanging out"
"G-G-G-Gojo-san! H-H-H-H-He's alive!"
Gojo sneers and laughs.
"Ijichi, be quiet"
You were still left with no words. Itadori is alive and you have a feeling that Sukuna was responsible for it.
"It's unbelievable" you whisper.
"I'm kinda disappointed" Ieri pouts.
"Uhm, I'm embarrassed to ask, but who are you?"
Gojo walks up to Itadori. You follow.
"Yuuji. Welcome back"
"Yeah. Good to be back!"
The two gave each other a high five.
"Yuuji?" You walk up to him and examine his body. Hence his dick.
"(Y/n)!"
He pulls you in for a hug and you stutter and blush like crazy.
His junk is out! His junk is out! His junk is out!!
"I'm so happy to see you!" He says.
"...yeah, me too" You blushed but still looked confused.
Gojo tells you that he is going to go for a short walk with Ieri. So in the meantime, you were with Itadori as he was getting dressed.
"I bet everyone will be surprised," he says.
"Yuuji. Do you feel any different?" You ask.
"Hmm. No not really?"
You nod. You wanted to ask him more questions, but since Ijichi was with you two right now, you thought it would be best to ask him when you two are alone.
Sukuna definitely had something to do with it. Just what did Yuuji agree to for him to revive his heart?
"(Y/n)?"
You snap out of your thoughts.
"Yes!"
"I hope I didn't make you sad"
You smile and sigh.
"It's hard not to be that you were dead for quite a while. But I'm happy now" you smile.
_____
"Gojo Satoru. I wonder if we could kill him if we joined forces" the volcano head curse spirit says.
"Nothing but an idiot beast rambling" the woman mutters as she sips her drink.
"Hah?!"
"He'd flutter out of your grasp, or worst case, you'd all get exorcised. I would recommend you pour energy into sealing him rather than killing him"
"Seal him? Do you have a lead?"
"Well use the special-grade cursed object, Prison Realm"
The curse spirit and woman widen their eyes.
"Prison Realm?! You have that detestable thing?!"
"Jogo, don't get too excited. You'll make it hot in here" The man then feels a tug from his robe. He turns to see the woman.
"What's wrong Kanzaki?"
"I'm hungry" she was starting to salivate.
"Tch, if you don't feed the beast, she'll go on a rampage"
"I'll eat you head first, Jogo" she snarls.
A waiter then soon comes near their table.
"Excuse me, sir, ma'am, have you two decided on your orders"
"Tasty..." Kanzaki mutters.
Soon the waiter starts to burst into flame. Soon people started to scream and panic.
"I wish you wouldn't cause too much commotion"
"Jogo don't burn everyone to crisp. Humans are the best when tender...Ah, there that one, he's mine"
Kanzaki points to a random middle-aged man.
"Shut up, you'll have your snack. Besides this is hardly anything" he smiles.
Jogo starts burning everyone up, except for the man Kanzaki chose. If anything he would leave the man immobilized before running off.
"I'm glad we didn't choose an expensive restaurant"
"Geto, how strong am I in terms of Sukuna's fingers?" Jogo asks.
Geto hums.
"At a low estimate, I'd say eight or nine fingers?"
Kanzaki scoffs.
"Don't encourage him, Geto. You'll only boost his brainless ego"
Geto chuckles.
"That's plenty. Give me the prison realm! I'll add it to my collection. In return. I will kill Gojo Satoru, and retrieve the light of deity"
_____
Down in a basement, you were with Gojo and Itadori while looking around the small space.
"So you're above the rest when it comes to close combat, Yuuji. What you need to learn right now is how to control cursed energy, as well as the bare minimum of jujutsu knowledge" Gojo says.
Itadori just smiles as he feels all bubbly inside. You cover your mouth to hold a laugh as you see him.
"What's the matter?" Gojo asks.
"I figured you'd be the best person to train me, so I'm just happy. I'm weak, and I couldn't save anybody. Worse, I nearly killed Fushiguro. As I am now, I won't be able to face them. I want to become strong. Teach me to be the strongest!"
So confident!
You look at Yuuji in awe and Gojo smiles.
"You got a keen eye," he says.
"Sensei, you're the one who called yourself the strongest"
"Someone that cocky would know already" you grumble.
"...alright! First, take a look at those drink cans over there"
The cans explode out of thin air. This surprised Itadori.
"This is curse energy, and this is cursed technique"
"I see. I don't get it" Itadori makes a face that makes you laugh.
"Right, well...(y/n), you want to explain?"
You cut your laughing and got scared.
"E-eh erm...well, I don't mind explaining, so...think of curse energy as a spark...electricity! And cursed techniques as..."
"Appliances" Gojo steps in.
"Yeah, right...maybe clouds. Electricity would be hard to produce by itself, right? That's why electricity is run through clouds to achieve its result. Clouds produce electricity to make it roar" you said as you sweat.
You never thought you'd be the one to step in and teach someone something.
"I hope that makes sense..."
Gojo claps his hands.
"Good work, good work, (y/n). Now it's my turn. Electricity would be hard to run by itself, that's why we run electricity through appliances to achieve various results"
I mean isn't that kinda the same with my cloud reference?
He points at the green can.
"Here, I just fired off pure cursed energy"
He then points at the orange can.
"And here, I channeled cursed energy into a cursed technique to activate it and twist the can with jujutsu," he says.
Yuuji got excited.
"In other words, I'm about to learn a very, very good cursed technique?!"
"No, you can't use cursed techniques"
"Huh?"
"Setting aside simple shikigami and barriers, cursed techniques are fundamentally etched into your body from the day you're born. So the power of a jujutsu sorcerer is roughly 80% innate talent"
Yuuji suddenly turns into paper. You cover your mouth to prevent yourself from laughing.
"You okay?" Gojo asks.
"This sucks, I wanted to pull off a spirit gun or Bankai, or Rasengan, or dodon ray"
"What is all that?" You mutter.
"Let's just ignore what you can't do. We're going to enhance your strengths" Gojo says.
Gojo talks to Yuuji about cursed energy and its uses. The same teachings that Tengen taught you thousands of years ago. So you were familiar with it all already.
"There are several methods to train this. I'll be having you use a pretty exhausting one"
"Like what..."
Gojo pulls out a couple of movies.
"Watching movies!"
"Watching movies?" You and Yuuji said.
"Yup. Everything from masterpieces to C-grade horror films and terrible French movies"
You walk to the table and rummage through a bunch of piled-up DVDs.
"You'll be watching them nonstop as long as you're awake. Of course, you won't just be watching them"
Gojo pulls out a sleeping curse doll.
"You'll be watching them with this guy"
"So cute!" You squeal.
"What's up with that cute but creepy doll?"
"You two think it's cute?"
Gojo hands Itadori the doll.
"It's a curse corpse the principal made"
"Ah, I knew it! It has his sense!"
"Huh?"
Yuuji examined the sleeping doll and didn't understand the concept of it.
"I don't get it"
"Don't be hasty now. You'll see it coming"
Soon the doll wakes up and punches Yuuji in the face. You were surprised.
"That curse corpse will wake up and attack you, just like that, if you don't keep pouring an amount of cursed energy into it"
"Ow!"
You stare at the cursed corpse and grab it. Holding it up in your arms while it sleeps like a baby in your arms.
"Hehe, I've never seen these types of methods before. It's fun! Yuuji you're really lucky" you said as you pet the stuffed bear.
"I'm lucky?!"
"We have all kinds of movies available here. Heart-throbbers, thrillers, exciting ones, etc. Your first goal is to watch an entire movie from start to finish, without waking the cursed corpse"
The cursed doll grumbles in your arms.
"This trains you to maintain a steady output of cursed energy, no matter what emotions you feel. You can't use too much or too little"
Yuuji takes the doll from you, and as he did the doll was flailing its arms around. You cover your mouth to prevent a laugh.
"I have it set on faint low cursed energy you can produce right now. But slowly it'll start demanding greater output. What do you want to start with"
You crouch next to Gojo and start looking through the movies with him.
"I recommend this one. The heroine's annoying but she does spectacular in the end"
"Major spoilers. I say we start with an action—"
Yuuji gets punched by the doll.
_____
"Do I cut the red wire or the blue wire?"
"You know, in the area where I used to live, the designated trash bags..."
"Hey, what are you going on about right now?
"...we're red for plastic and blue for combustible trash. I always thought it shouldn't be the opposite. It should be red! Anyone would go with red!"
"I'll trust you"
You and Yuuji sit on the couch together invested in the movie. That is until Yuuji got punched in the face.
"Don't do that while I'm drinking soda!"
"Don't drink it, then" Gojo says.
"But you gotta have chips and soda when watching movies at home!"
"Ah, I tried to grab that woman's attention to just confess her feelings for him, but she completely ignored me. How rude" you pout.
"That's because it's a recorded film (y/n). It's not interactive"
You just gulp your soda in silence while being fully embarrassed.
"Okay, I have some business to deal with. Come along (y/n)" he waves to you.
"Satoru, can I stay with Yuuji to watch these movies?" You asked.
"Well, he needs to focus his energy while watching movies. It's not a free day for you and him to talk all day. He can't have any distractions"
"(Y/n) won't distract me. I'll be focused while she's here. Plus it'd be nice to have someone like her around" Itadori says.
You blush and smile.
Gojo took a moment to think then nodded.
"Alright then"
Before leaving, he brings your attention. Distant from Yuuji.
"I'll let you be here for a while. But after that, I'll be coming to pick you up. You can't stay here too long" he says.
"Is it because of Sukuna?"
"Keep your distance between him okay?"
"I'll be fine. He won't hurt me. He can't hurt me"
Gojo rubs the back of his head and sighs.
"Just be careful. You are a deity after all"
You nod.
"I appreciate your concern Satoru"
There it was again. The warm feeling.
Satoru didn't say anything else but smile and rubbed your head.
"Oh by the way. Did you talk to Sukuna while you were dead, Yuuji?" Gojo looks towards him.
"Talk?"
"When he fixed your heart, sus he propose any conditions or contracts?"
"Oh, I think we did talk about something...but I can't remember what it was"
You stare at Yuuji then gaze your eyes toward the floor with concern.
"I see"
While you and Yuuji continued watching movies, good and bad, your eyes shifted to him while he was focused on the screen.
Just one touch. That's all it takes.
The moment you slide your hand close to Yuuji's chest. He looks at you. He holds the punching doll back.
"(Y/n), what are you doing?"
"A-ah, well..."
"Did you want to see Sukuna?"
You fidget with your fingers.
"Sorry. Is that no good?"
"What did you want to see him for?"
You stayed quiet for a moment. You wanted to talk to Sukuna about what he did to Yuuji. What kind of pact did he make him take?
If Yuuji didn't remember, then there was something wrong.
"You should go back to watching the movie. Focus on your cursed energy" you kindly said.
He nods.
"Yeah...okay"
He turns back on the movie.
It was a horror film this time, and it was about zombies infecting people one after another.
"Yuuji. If you don't mind, can you hold my hand? This movie is pretty frightening to me" You lied.
Without looking, he hums and extends his hand towards you. The moment you grab it, you focus on entering his soul.
And the moment you did. You can feel him.
The dark aura. The same as it was many centuries ago. When you open your eyes, you can see a huge rib cage enveloped at the top.
The pool of blood at the bottom of your feet, and what catches the eye is the mountain of skulls and bones.
There you see him in all his glory. Sukuna stares down at you and grins wickedly.
"Did my dear wife miss me?"
Chapter 19: Chapter 18
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
You put your hands behind your back and lazily walk around taking in the environment.
"This all seems you. Are you happy?" You ask.
Sukuna scoffs.
"What kind of question is that? To be stuck in this brat's body is hardly any treat"
You goad at him.
"Aw, I'm sorry. Do you want a hug?"
Sukuna grunts and then jumps down from his tower of bones. He walks up to you and takes in your features.
"It seems you haven't changed a bit. Though your appearance has in such an interesting way" he smirks while checking you out.
You chuckle.
"I could say the same to you"
Sukuna hums. He lifts his hand to grab strands of your hair. You didn't move as you looked at him with a straight face.
"And what did I deserve to have the goddess of light visit me in such dubious pleasure" he mocks.
You move his hand away from you.
"Yuuji. You ripped his heart out, did you"
Sukuna rubs his mouth, and just sneers a smile. He just couldn't keep a straight face.
"Was it noticeable?"
"When you fixed it. Tell me what you asked of him"
Sukuna smiles.
"I have no idea what you mean"
"Sukuna..."
"I fixed his heart that is all"
"I know you Sukuna. You do things out of terms, and I know you did it for a cost"
You wait to see what he'd say. Sukuna walks back and takes a seat on the pile of bones on the ground. He motions for you to come.
Keeping your guard up, you follow. Sitting down next to him, Sukuna wraps his arm around your waist and pulls you close to him.
"Do you miss this moment?"
"Sukuna—"
"The feeling of your body against mine. How I enjoyed hearing my name from your voice"
He inhales the scent of your hair to take in that you are close to him again after centuries.
"Sukuna please..."
His smile collapses and grunts.
"Do you not miss me? After centuries of being apart from each other. Why do you resist your desires for me?"
"It's not that I don't miss you...I mean, I don't know. Tengen told me not to believe every word you say to me. And Satoru told me not to get so close to you"
Sukuna laughs.
"It's amusing how you listen to the man who had you trapped in a temple your whole life. And that white-haired dumbass who you barely know" he says.
He was starting to show his aggressive side again. The side that you came to hate so much.
"Tengen was my master and my friend. And Satoru...Satoru is kind"
"And that makes him your friend as well? Is he not doing what the sorcerers have done to you thousands of years ago?"
"What do you mean?"
"Entrapping you inside a chamber"
"He lets me out whenever there's a chance to go out"
"Under his order. You don't go anywhere unless someone's behind you. It's moronic, things haven't changed for you. Just like before, you are forever shackled by these humans. Pleasing them instead of yourself, and you call yourself the goddess of light?"
There was silence in the domain. Sukuna smiled as he thought he did a good job with his words. All he needed was to put some doubt in your head about Gojo and everyone else you're staying with.
The idea was to not trust the humans so you could end up relying on Sukuna more than anyone.
"If you stay with me by my side. I will give you anything your heart desires. Have people worship you and fear you as they should. I would even kill a whole town just for you. All you need to do is lend me your powers" he said.
The moment he was about to touch your face, you lifted your head and gazed at him. It surprised him to see rage in your eyes.
"How dare you. How can you say such things to me like that? I have put up a lot of shit with your words Sukuna. But the line is drawn if you ever question my title and the people I am responsible for protecting. Don't you ever disrespect me or I will have you exorcised. I hope you haven't forgotten that I'm the one who is supposed to kill you. But I don't, because there's a side you only show me that makes me fall so deeply in love with you. But you also give me this side where you want to torment me and break my spirit. These mixed signals have me question my love for you"
Sukuna pulls back for a second. He never once heard you stand up for yourself like that. It actually aroused him.
He could've grabbed your throat right then and there and punished you for your behavior. If he could, he could've. But he didn't. He just couldn't get himself to.
At that moment, seeing that side of you made his body hot. It was getting hot with the pleasure of seeing you so feisty.
He wanted you.
Sukuna slowly takes your face. He comes closer to take in your fierce gaze. His eyes were engrossed in lust.
"I love this side of you. Give me more of it. Your power, your wrath, this is what I enjoy so much from you" he caresses your face.
"I love this"
"Sukuna, I'm not your wife anymore, remember?"
"Vows don't mean shit, (y/n). I won't accept having you leave my side or anyone to have you. You are my wife, and I'm your husband. So it's not over until I say it's over, my dear wife. You are mine"
He was like some plague that was trying to rot your brain from the inside out. The feeling felt so wrong. You knew that, and yet those sweet words he'd use on you would blind you.
Sweet words that could have you sink too deep into the abyss. If the voices of the past would scream that you were in danger, they would be far away.
The evil always seemed to have some way to manipulate the innocent. And Sukuna is that evil.
"I will tell you about the pact I had with the brat, in exchange for you to lend me your powers"
"You know I can't do that"
You walk down from the tower of bones.
"I said lend, not take. Just for a short minute. One minute is all I ask" he asks softly.
Clutching your dress your knuckles turn white. You take in a deep breath and out.
"30 seconds"
Sukuna chuckles.
"60"
"35, my final offer"
Sukuna walks up to you, he looks down at you with authority. He lowers his voice.
"(Y/n), just this once. My precious flower"
There it was again.
Giving him a straight face, you responded without feeling any different.
"35. Final. Offer"
Sukuna sighs.
"Fine. You are such a downer"
You smile at him and just caress his cheek.
"Just for you my husband"
He grunts.
You extend your hand out to him. He stares at it and looks back at you.
"I'll let you borrow one technique from me, but nothing too big. So if you touch my hand, I'll give one to you"
Sukuna takes your hand but then pulls you close to his body. He then aggressively takes your lips. Slipping his tongue in your mouth.
It startled you for a second but then you relaxed as he pulled away. You were blushing like crazy.
Sukuna licks his lips.
"Mm, you still taste the same too"
"D-don't just do that out of the blue!" You blush.
"I got what I needed. So I'll tell you...I asked that boy to give me one minute to use his body however I liked. And the second was to forget about the pact we agreed on" he said.
"That's why he couldn't remember..." you didn't say anything else but climb down the tower of bones and carcasses. Sukuna looks at you with an intrigued look in your eye.
"Are you going back to tell the brat about our pact? If you do, I will punish you, (y/n)" he says.
You shake your head.
"No, I'm just going to leave it be"
"Oh?"
"Because if you use his body to hurt anyone Sukuna. I'll know and come after you. That's a promise" you said and left his domain.
Sukuna just smiles to himself and laughs.
"Funny, you say that with confidence. But I felt the hesitance inside you. Keke, you are so amusing and fun to play with, my love"
_____
Back in the real world. You slowly open your eyes and see that you are resting your head on Yuuji's shoulder.
He was focused on another movie, but when he felt your body move he turned to see you.
"Hey (y/n)"
"Hello. Sorry, was I sleeping on top of you?"
He shakes his head.
"Nope. I didn't mind anyway" he says.
Getting up you touched your head. There was a throbbing headache. Getting up from the couch, you go towards the stairs.
You look back at Yuuji who was still watching the movie. You silence your steps as you are heading up the stairs. And once you open the door to leave, Gojo is in front of you.
"Yo, going somewhere?"
You step back.
"Just needed some air. You're back already"
"I came to pick you up. But looks like you were about to leave. Without me knowing?"
You stayed quiet and turned away from his gaze. You did need some air. The throbbing headache you've been feeling was making you a bit impatient to leave the small room.
And it's not like you were going to go anywhere else. Where would you wander off too?
You rub your head.
"I'm sorry. I really do have a headache and I just really want some fresh air" you say abruptly.
Gojo doesn't take it into account and just lets you through. Walking down the hall towards outside, you take in a deep breath and let out the stress.
Gojo was behind you and steps next to your side.
"Are you okay?" He asks. You nod. Taking a moment, you ask Gojo a question.
"Satoru...you would never leave me, or use me, would you?"
He was baffled by your question.
"No, I told you, you're in my hands. And I won't use you for any reason at all (y/n). I'm not like those geezers and I would let you do whatever you want if there's time" he says.
You give him a short smile and nod. Heading out to the corner of the building, you slide your back down to the floor against the building and sigh.
"I'll let you borrow one technique from me, but nothing too big. So if you touch my hand, I'll give one to you"
You grimace from what you said a couple of minutes ago. You raise both of your hands to your head. It was a mistake giving him any power from you at all.
And all for just information about what he did to Yuuji? But better to know now so you can monitor him if Sukuna pulls anything funny.
No.
You weren't clever in the end for that. You helped him by granting him your power. In the end, it was your fault.
"So stupid..." you whisper.
After taking a breather, you went to see Gojo. He turns around and smiles at you.
"Feeling better?"
"Yeah," you smile back.
You kept walking with Gojo while wrapping your arms around his. It was a silent walk and your curiosity was getting the best of you.
"Where are we going?" You asked.
"Oh we're taking a little car ride"
_____
On the ride, you look out the window as you take in the environment.
"We have a bit of time before your appointment with the principal," Ijichi says.
Gojo turns to you.
"Do you want to stop anywhere?"
"No, I'm fine," you said.
Gojo looks at you, he can see that there is something on your mind. But if he asked, you would brush it off and just smile.
He doesn't want to keep pestering you on it or else he'd see you shut down and lock yourself in your little world.
Gojo sighs.
"I guess I'll show up early for a change"
The quiet was calm. It was calm until you quickly grasped Gojo's hand.
Your breathing hitched.
"Satoru, there's something here"
"Yeah...stop the car"
"Huh? Right here?"
Ijichi stops the car and Gojo gets out. He stops you from getting out.
"I need you to stay in the car and go with Ijichi," he says.
"What? No, I'm not going to leave you here"
"(Y/n), please do as I say" he strictly says.
You grimace but nod as you don't want to argue with him any longer.
As the car drove away, Gojo waved goodbye to you.
"Now..."
Suddenly a cursed spirit jumps at Gojo to the floor.
"Who are you?"
Notes:
Next chapter will be an explanation about Sukuna and the reader’s (you) relationship.
Chapter 20: (Info)
Chapter Text
I just want to give a clear run down on this relationship train between the reader (you) and Sukuna in this story for some to understand.
Sukuna is an evil power hungry cursed spirit that I don’t tend to break his character given from the anime/manga. So he tells the reader (you) that he loves you in his own way or he just “cares” what’s good for you and what isn’t.
But his way is really an act of manipulation and psychological abuse, to take you down the wrong path beside him (more cursed spirit than human). He is possessive over you because of how much power you have. And he’s hoping to take some and make it his own. (Manga spoiler: like how Sukuna uses Megumi’s technique).
He wants to keep you for himself and obey him. He will find it a turn on for your submissiveness or see you try to act tough so he can break it.
Remind you, you are a powerful god that ranks up to his and have many techniques that you still haven’t uncovered yet or have been kept from being used. So he has some kind of obsession towards you because of those things.
That’s why you have been unsure about killing him because of his “love” for you. But right now after your recent encounter, your mind is scrambled and confused of the right and wrong. You just don’t know what to do nor how to think for yourself. Remember you were always told what to do than think for yourself in serious situations.
You will slowly start to come to your senses of Sukuna’s true intentions. But this is also why Satoru and everyone else is trying to bring you back together again mentally and be the deity you were meant to be.
I know this is a Sukuna x reader story, but I wanted to make something different out of it. I apologize that there isn’t too much intimacy in this, but I would rather like there to be a plot than constant romance and/or sex scenes all the time because it can be a bit draining. (Sometimes? Maybe?)
I want there to be a plot. I get dialogues and other actions out of the anime/manga, it’s nothing new, but it’s always fun to include my characters and the reader(you) in that world to experience exactly what the jjk characters are experiencing.
Thank you for sticking by, I never thought you guys would literally be so into this story. I was feeling self-conscious that I would make this boring, but you all have been giving me kind words. Writing’s kinda hard guys like trying to remember all what happened in previous chapters so you don’t lose your audience with writing something different or having motivation. But thank you for believing in me and I’ll post the next chapter when it’s ready.
If you have any questions or like to share your thoughts go ahead on the comments section below.🩵
Chapter 21: Chapter 19
Chapter Text
Jogo attacks Gojo out of nowhere. The explosion from his cursed technique impels him.
"That was easier than I expected"
The magma swirls around Gojo to his surprise.
"Who are you calling easy?"
"Tch, brat"
Gojo looks at the cursed spirit's image. He smirks.
"A cursed spirit just comes out of nowhere?"
Jogo scoffs and smiles.
"Where is the deity?" He demands.
Gojo shrugs.
"Don't know what you mean"
"I felt it. Her presence is bigger to sense than any other. So I wouldn't be surprised if she was being protected by Gojo Satoru"
_____
While Ijichi drives back you clasp both your hands together really tight. You couldn't help but think back to Gojo's safety.
You know he's the strongest. He's mentioned it many times. But you couldn't stand to just sit around and do nothing.
What kind of deity are you if you let people protect or die for you more than you should for them?
"Mr. Ijichi turn around," you said.
"Ah, but miss (l/n), Gojo said—"
"Yes I know, but I have to see how he's doing. Please"
"I'm sorry miss (l/n), but I have orders. I know it's hard for you to stand on the side but Gojo does care about you and we all care about you and your safety—"
While Ijichi continued to talk, you muffled him out and focused on teleporting back toward Gojo.
I'm sorry Satoru, but I can't just not do anything. I can fight too.
And just like that you were gone without a trace.
"And that's why you should stay in this car miss (l/n)...miss (l/n)?" Ijichi looks at his rearview mirror and gasps.
"M-miss (l/n)!!"
_____
What's already been seconds of fighting, jogo was already damaged to the floor by Gojo.
"It wasn't just talk...if I can't hit him, I'll just drag him into my domain"
"Sorry about that!"
Gojo floats down with Yuuji in his arms.
"Where the heck?! Hey, where are we?!"
"Were you waiting?" Gojo asks.
Jogo looks surprised to see the vessel of Sukuna in clear view.
"This is Itadori Yuuji, and he's here to watch"
"Mt. Fuji! His head's Mt. Fuji! Sensei what's going on here?"
"Oh, we just warped here"
Yuuji just scowls at him.
"Satoru!" Gojo turns around and sees you running towards him.
"Oh, Yuuji's here too?"
Seeing Gojo's reaction, he didn't seem all too happy.
"What are you doing here, (y/n)" he says.
"I came to help"
"I told you to go back"
You shake your head.
"I'm not going to stand around and do nothing when I can fight too!"
"You're a huge target to these spirits, if you get hurt or worse captured, then there will be some serious problems!" He yells at you.
Yuuji just stands around awkwardly, while the cursed spirit takes in your features.
It is like history books say. Your beauty holds no bounds, so it's no wonder why the king of curses made you his wife. But more importantly, he wanted to see just how powerful a god like you is.
His goal was to solely capture you for the plans Geto had in store.
"Excuse me, but if you are done with your rambling, I came to take that woman away. And why'd you bring the brat for? He a shield?"
"A shield? No, no. I told you, he's here to watch. I'm in the middle of teaching this boy lots of things. Don't worry about him. And if you want (y/n), you'll have to keep fighting me" Gojo smirks.
Jogo smiles.
"Bringing people who will slow you down just makes you a fool"
Gojo laughs.
"It'll be fine. After all, you're weak"
The cursed spirit blows and unleashes his cursed domain. You all were sucked into a volcanic cave. Everything was just hot.
"Wh-what is this!?" Yuuji says.
"This spirit has an unbelievable domain" you mutter, looking around.
"Domain?"
After explaining all about domain expansions to Yuuji, Gojo smirks.
"Watch closely (y/n). I'll show you that you don't need to worry too much about me. Cause I'm the strongest"
Gojo forms a sign on his hand and calls out his domain expansion.
"Domain expansion: Infinite Void"
Sucked into Gojo's domain. It was like space and time stood still. The inside of Gojo Satoru's infinite void was like none other.
It was beautiful, yet so deadly.
Gojo's domain felt almost on par with yours. Almost? To be honest, you wouldn't know who would win in a battle of domains.
"So pretty" you whisper.
Gojo smiles at you.
"Yeah?"
Gojo clutches Jogo's head.
"This is the inner world of limitless perception, communication...every action involved in living is forcibly carried out an infinite number of times. It's ironic, isn't it? When granted everything, you can't do anything...but just die peacefully. I have questions I want to ask you though. So I'm letting you off the hook with this"
Gojo starts to pull on Jogo's head and tears it apart from his body.
Once everyone is out of Gojo's domain, Gojo throws the spirit's head on the ground.
You look at the head and analyze it.
"Fascinating. So there are more like you?"
Jogo scowls at you.
"Don't act like you aren't one of us, child of wrath" he spats.
His words made your eyes widen with surprise.
What?
Gojo then steps on Jogo's head.
"Hey, who told you to come after (y/n)? You don't seem the type to act on orders. Was something good supposed to happen if you killed me? I want to know. Who was it? Come on, just tell me already"
Gojo steps on the spirit's head with more pressure.
"Like I'd ever tell you, brat!"
"You sure you should be saying that? Hurry up and tell me, or I'll exorcise you. Of course, I'll do that either way"
You butt in.
"Satoru, wait—"
Suddenly something came crashing down on the floor between Satoru. Flowers started sprouting everywhere on the floor.
It looked like something that was stripping away Gojo's will to fight for a second. But it didn't seem to affect you much. You seemed to be immune.
Gojo snaps out of it and Yuuji suddenly gets grabbed by a vine. Lifted in the air you see him way up high.
Gojo burns the cursed tree bark. Yuuji falls on the floor and you go to see him for any injuries.
You look back and see another cursed spirit taking the other away.
"Wow, he got away"
Yuuji suddenly bows and spouts apologies.
You walk next to Gojo.
"Cursed spirits at that level are working together? This may be worse than I thought" you said.
"Really? This is actually getting exciting for me"
You gulp. Gojo laughs and pats your head.
"Hey, thanks for worrying about me though. But don't put yourself in danger for someone like me" he says.
You pout.
"I'm sorry. But even if you are the strongest Satoru I will still protect you!" You had determination on your face.
Gojo just smiles and caresses your head.
"You're wonderful"
You knit your eyebrows together and blush as you just look away.
Gojo turns around and looks at Yuuji.
"Yuuji. I want you, or rather, everyone to become strong enough to beat that"
"Huh? Beat that?"
"It's better to have a goal right? Man, I'm glad I brought you here"
Yuuji looks at Gojo with a tired look.
"I had no idea what was going on though. Are you serious?"
After minutes of talking, Gojo tells Yuuji that for the next couple of months, he'll be in training with him. And of course, he asked if you could train with him as well.
You were nervous at first. The fact that you didn't want to hurt Gojo, but he just laughs and waves that off. He wanted to see how strong you are. Plus it got him excited, knowing that he'll be fighting a god.
Gojo wanted to get to know you more. He enjoys spending his time with you. It was more than what books say about you, and even in scripture texts, they were either theories or lies.
The only ones who knew truthfully about you were you and Tengen.
And your sweet smile was something that would make any person immediately fall in love with you.
And he did.
He fell in love with your kindness as much as he did with your beauty.
But he wasn't going to say that to you...yet.
"Alright then, let's get to it!" Gojo says.
_____
At night, somewhere in the city.
Geto walks up the stairs from a building and opens up a door. The door led to a beach paradise, the sun was out and the water was clear blue as the sky.
Right there was a couple of people under an umbrella along with another creature in the ocean taking water.
"Sure is peaceful here"
A man with a stitched body was sitting on a lounge chair, reading.
"How's Jogo doing, Geto?"
"On death's door. Hanami stepped in to save him, so he'll probably be fine. How irresponsible"
"You're the one who egged him on"
"Heavens no. I tried to stop him. But Kanzaki told me to let him go" Geto says.
The stitched spirit chuckles.
"She probably wanted a kick out of that"
"Maybe. Where is she right now?"
"Who knows, she wouldn't tell me. Up to no good probably" the curse says.
Soon the door opens, revealing the headless Jogo being carried by another spirit which is Hanami.
"Speak of the devil. Jogo, Hanami. Glad to see you're safe" the spirit smiles.
"How can you say that when you see me like this?!"
"You're lucky you got off with just that"
Jogo growls at Geto. Geto just playfully shrugs at him.
"Why you!"
"At least you got to see what the deity looked like, didn't you?" Geto asks.
"Tch, she was right there, I could've grabbed her right then and there if that Gojo Satoru wasn't in the way!!"
"I think you understand now. So we'll go about dealing Gojo Satoru at the appropriate time in the appropriate place, once we've secured our advantage over him. We'll carry it out on Oct. 31 in Shibuya. I'll contact you with more details later. Good enough, Mahito?"
The spirit named Mahito on the lounge chair closes his book.
"No objections here. Let's be cunning about this like curses should. Like humans should" he chuckles.
_____
You walk down an underground path with Gojo and Yuuji. It was a dark cave and the only thing leading you all were the dim lamp lights.
"I won't be able to lead you this time. But don't worry. I've called in a friend you can trust" Gojo says.
Opening the entrance, you see a well-dressed man with goggles on his face. He looked sophisticated.
Oh, he's pretty handsome. You thought.
"This is Nanami Kento, the ex-salaryman jujutsu sorcerer!" Gojo says.
"Please don't call me that"
"Plenty sorcerers are oddballs, but since he worked for a company he's got a good head on his shoulders. He's a first-grade sorcerer"
"Wow that's pretty amazing," you said.
Nanami takes a good look at you. And soon he realized who you are. Bringing his attention he walks up to you.
"Eh? I've never seen Nanami take any interest in anybody?"
"Shut up Gojo...you must be the deity of light"
You only blush and just nod.
Gojo didn't like how you reacted to Nanami. It made him feel some type of way. He randomly steps in.
"Nanami, quit making (y/n) uncomfortable!"
Nanami ignores Gojo.
"Ex-salaryman? Why didn't you become a jujutsu sorcerer from the start?" Itadori asks.
"Let's greet each other first. Nice to meet you, Itadori-kun, (l/n)-san" he bows.
So courteous! Wait, how did he know my name...oh yeah.
"Nice to meet you, too" You and Yuuji bow.
"I studied at Jujutsu Tech and one thing I learned...jujutsu sorcerers are shit!"
"Huh?"
You cover your mouth to prevent yourself from laughing.
"Then I worked at your typical company, and one thing I learned...work is shit!"
"Really?!"
You started to laugh. Nanami was a complicated man. His desire to do something was nowhere to be found.
"But if both are equally shit, I'll take the one I'm more suited to," he says.
You giggle.
"Nanami, you're a pretty complicated man"
"And that's dark" Yuuji mumbles.
Gojo agrees.
Nanami crosses his arms.
"Itadori, please don't believe I'm of the same mindset as Gojo-san. I do trust and have faith in him,"
This sparked Gojo's ego while Yuuji looked skeptical and you just put up a cringed smile.
"But I do not respect him!"
Gojo loses his ego as he looks at Nanami confused.
"Huh?!"
You put your hands together and pretend to look towards Gojo.
"Poor Satoru. You have my condolences" you say.
After Nanami talks and explains everything, Yuuji looks determined to get stronger so he won't be useless.
His confidence made you want to be more involved with everyone. No more being hidden and kept at the side, that's been haunting you for decades.
You needed to train on your techniques anyway, so you're glad that Gojo offered himself to be your sparring partner.
You walk up to Yuuji and grab his arm. You were close enough to make him blush from the contact.
"Me too! That speech you did Yuuji got me pretty fired up! So when do we all start?" You asked.
"Gojo isn't coming with us," Nanami says.
"Oh, I'm sorry Satoru. I'll do my best for you!"
"You're not coming with us either"
You pause for a moment there.
"...what"
Gojo chuckles as he puts his hand on top of your head.
"You'll be sparring with me, but it's just gonna be us," he says.
You pout.
"Come on, I don't mind the audience. Besides the more the better. We're a team aren't we?"
"In this case, Itadori and I will be going on an investigation. There isn't any action at all in this particular case. And I rather have my hands full with one student. I'm sorry (y/n)-san"
You couldn't accept this defeat. So you playfully put your curse techniques to use.
Curse technique: Puppy eyes!
You give Nanami the puppy-eye look. Your eyes look so innocent and pleading. Yuuji gasped as he got in the crossfire, he covered his eyes as if he couldn't take your cuteness.
But it didn't budge Nanami at all.
"If you're trying to pry yourself into changing my mind, it won't work. My answer is still no"
Not effective!
You but then had another idea. You turn to Gojo mischievously and give him the puppy eyes. Gojo dramatically tried to shield himself, but he couldn't help but look.
"Gojo please?" You ask sweetly.
"Ah, who can say no to such a cuteness overload like that!" He dramatically says.
"Me," Nanami says.
"Just this once?"
As you wait for an answer, Gojo smiles and lightly hits your head.
"Nope. Sorry but no can do (y/n). It's just you and me" You groan.
Oh well, but you hope that training won't be boring. It is with Gojo after all.
"Fine"
Gojo claps his hands.
"Alright then! We'll be going now!"
He takes your hand and warps you to another location.
He takes you to an open field in the forest. As you look around, you notice that he is stretching and getting ready.
"Okay (y/n), don't be afraid to give it your all. Just show me what you got" he says.
You gulp, but shake off the nervous feeling and get ready.
Okay then. Let's do this.
Chapter 22: Chapter 20
Summary:
“Only the insane equate pain with success”
Chapter Text
With the open air blowing through your hair, you focus for a moment and release your curse tool. An arcane scepter that you've had for a very long time. Sometimes just a flick of your fingers is all it takes to exorcise a curse.
You haven't fought anything too big to have any means to use the scepter. But since it's Gojo, you might as well show him all that you've trained for.
He sees your staff and smiles brightly. It was a beautiful scepter, and he can only imagine what you can do with it.
He's so excited to fight a god like you.
"Don't hesitate now" he teases.
You scoff as you play along.
"You should say that for yourself"
You kick off by swinging your scepter.
Curse technique: Glacier Pillar
A sphere magically appears under Gojo's feet and creates a tall sharp pyramid-like ice pillar.
He dodged it in the air and you point your scepter at him.
Curse technique: Ray of Judgement
A shot of light beams out at a long distance from where you are to him. Gojo makes a move and uses his technique.
"That's a big move right there!" He says.
You giggle.
"You said not to hold back"
Gojo smirks and extends his arm.
"Then I guess it's my turn"
Curse technique: Red
He repels you with a red orb that explodes on you critically. He didn't want to go to the extremes, but he'll do whatever it takes to see how far you'll go.
The dirt and dust clear up from the explosion, and he checks for a moment to see if you are okay.
And to his surprise, you weren't there
"Shit, did I go to far?" He mumbles.
But then he felt your presence from afar. He turns his head quickly and soon uses your scepter to create a storm above Gojo.
The storm crashes down and hits him. While in shock you create a warding technique under you.
Curse technique: Arcane Flower
With that, you power up your curse energy and techniques for your next move. You create a circle of fire around you just in case Gojo comes close to you for combat.
I'll keep him distant for now, I do well in range anyway. You thought.
Soon you pull off a fire technique and shoot at him. Huge orbs of fire magma just straight at him. Gojo dodges and warps to you at a distance.
"So she can use a lot of elemental magic. And I'm assuming that the magic flower under her is giving her some power-ups. Guess I'll have to push her away from it"
Gojo warps behind you, and before you point your scepter at him, Gojo pushes you back away from the magic circle with just the force of air from his fists.
Being pushed back with force your back gets hit by a tree. You gasp from the impact.
Not good.
You grunt as you have to quickly get up. But you were too slow as Gojo came close to you.
"Sorry about this"
Black Flash.
He punches your gut to the point of spewing a bit of bleed. He then grabs the collar of your red jacket and throws you in the air.
Everything was a blur as you tried to regain yourself. When you catch your focus again, you see Gojo.
Curse technique: Red
He uses it again, and this time it hits you. Hitting straight through the ground so hard that it creates a huge crater.
Gojo takes a look to see if you are okay. You were on the ground face down, but you were twitching to get up.
Gojo knew that he shouldn't go too far with you. It made him a bit nervous if you can keep going. But in a matter of life or death curse spirits won't go easy on you. Especially when they want your power.
He wants to see it. He wants to see how far you are willing to use your ultimate move.
Gojo sweats as he collides his fingers together.
"Please do something (y/n). If you truly are who they say you are, let me see it"
You grunt in pain as you try to get up. Slowly lifting your head you gasp as you see Gojo ready for his final move.
Hollow Technique: Purple
An orbital creation was made as it comes straight at you. Your eyes went wide as life flashed before your eyes.
Your mind was racing as voices of the past screamed at you all at once. As the repeating sounds and words convulsed through your brain.
I can not die here, I can not die here, I CAN NOT DIE HERE!
As purple explodes the whole environment, all that is left is a massive crater on the field. Bigger than before.
Gojo huffs in distress. This was a mistake. This was a mistake from the start to even have gone this far.
Goddess be damned, titles don't mean shit when you were still a woman with limits.
"(Y/n)! (Y/n) talk to me! Shit" Gojo was freaking out inside as he couldn't sense your presence anymore.
He might have killed you.
That's all that was running through his head. And he won't ever forget it.
"Fuck...(y/n), I'm so sorry. I should've never done this" he said.
As he thought about how he was going to break the news to his students and punish himself, he felt the wind move aggressively. Gojo looks around confused that something was up.
Soon a flash of fire swings at him. He flies back but regains his posture.
"What the hell?" There was a burnt mark slashed through his clothes. He looked at who attacked him and couldn't believe his eyes.
A rat-looking man with nice-looking robes. He had armor around his body and arm and there was a scar on his chest. He held a double-edged blade that was on fire. His eyes were red and fierce.
Gojo looks with curiosity. He didn't know who that creature was. Did you summon it? No, he looked around and still couldn't find you.
"Hey, you, rat-looking guy. Where's (y/n)?"
The creature didn't respond as he was getting ready for an attack.
Gojo gets himself ready.
"Fine, but don't get upset when you're torn to pieces," he says.
The creature jumps in the air and swings his blade around, creating fire all around him. And then he launches himself at Gojo.
He grunts as he takes the force head-on. He didn't use his technique to not have that curse touch him. But the damage did catch him.
The blade burned hot on his skin.
Gojo grabs the spirit and attacks him in close combat.
The rat man grabs Gojo in a headlock and elbows his back. Gojo pushes the man back with force and uses his red technique.
As it was coming straight at the rat man he spins his double edge in the air, creating a fire vortex. And soon he slams it down on the ground where the fire vortex collides with the red.
A huge explosion goes off as dust flows around the air. Gojo's senses doubled up than normal as he tried to see where the mysterious spirit was.
As he soon realizes where he was, he turns around to make the final blow but then the fiery blade is at his neck.
Gojo stays still as he looks deep into the spirit's eyes. Gojo smirks as he looks at him.
"You're supposed to kill me when you come this far. That's the whole point right?"
The spirit didn't say a word as slowly yielded. And for a moment he only bows. This made Gojo confused even more.
"Alright. Who exactly are you? And where's (y/n)" he demands before taking any action.
Soon a swirl of smoke wraps around the spirit and then low and behold it was you.
You were on the ground with your eyes closed. Gojo couldn't believe his eyes. He didn't even have words to describe it.
Was it curse manipulation? This seemed something beyond that. Were you that thing just moments ago?
Whatever it was he needed answers. He smiles as he picks you up bridal style.
"Thank god, you're okay. You never cease to amaze me (y/n)" he gently moves your hair away to see your beautiful face.
_____
In the infirmary.
"Well, she seems to be fine. All things considered, we'll just let her rest" Ieri says.
Gojo was sitting on a chair as he was next to your bed. He scans your body and face as he is in thought.
Ieri exhales smoke as she looks at Gojo.
"You know you shouldn't have been too hard on her" she scolds him.
"I know. But she has to get the idea that no curse spirit or sorcerer will ever go easy on her. She's still a huge target" he said.
Ieri sighs.
"Still it wouldn't kill you to dial it down a bit. Besides you almost shit your pants thinking you killed her"
Gojo cringe.
"But I didn't"
"But what if you did?"
Gojo didn't say anything more about it. He did regret ever being so hard on you. He wanted to train you for when you had to face curses alone yourself, but at the same time, all he wants is to protect you.
When you wake up Gojo hopes that you don't get mad at him. He wouldn't bear for you to hate him for a long time.
"So what did you get out of fighting her?" Ieri snaps Gojo out of his thoughts.
"She fights well. She has really strong curse techniques and energy. It's no joke that she's a deity. She's got potential. The problem though is she's slow to react. She doesn't do well in close combat so she's more on the defense side" he says.
"I guess that'll be a problem for her"
"That'll be a problem with her period. If she ever fought Sukuna then that'll be her downfall"
"Didn't the books say that she was trained by Tengen himself? I'm surprised that she lacks in that area"
Gojo shakes his head.
"She was taught how to master curse techniques. I'm pretty sure those old higher-ups didn't give a fuck for anything else she'd do but that" Gojo sighs.
Ieri inhales her cigarette as she shrugs.
"Guess that's something you can teach her then"
"But I'll tell you this. Something crazy happened when I fought her. She turned into some kind of curse spirit"
"Turned?"
"Yeah it was like curse manipulation, but it was something so much more than that. She was a whole different person"
Before Ieri was about to respond, you groan slightly shifting your body as you begin to wake up.
Opening your eyes, you look around your surroundings. Ieri and Gojo were next to you.
"Where am I?" You mumble.
"Glad to see sleeping beauty is awake" Gojo teases.
You slowly lift your body and rub your head.
"You alright?" He asks.
You nod.
"How long was out for?"
"Not too long, we checked you for injuries and it looks like nothing broken," Ieri says.
Gojo helps you off the bed as you gain balance on your feet. Your head wasn't spinning anymore like crazy as it did before.
The voices seemed to stop too.
"We're going to see Nanami and Yuuji in a couple of days. But before we do, we need to discuss a few things" he says seriously.
You nod.
"Can we talk somewhere private?" You asked.
"Sure"
_____
Gojo and you were at a nice little garden that the school had. You two sit on the floor on a blanket as you feel the nice soft grass on your hand. Shade was above you both as you enjoyed the nice breeze and smell of the flowers.
Gojo smiles as you look so happy to be outdoors. He wanted to make sure you were comfortable as you two talked about what happened. He hopes that you say more about yourself and your life if you are ready.
"So I hope you can remember what happened back there on the field. Do you remember?" He asks.
You look back at him and think for a moment.
"I blacked out for a moment, to be honest. But it felt like someone pulled me away and I collided with them. Body and soul " you said.
Colliding together with a cursed spirit is unlikely. But can be possible. Just looking at your expression this was something you had never done before.
"You somehow became a spirit and just started attacking me with full force. You've never done that before?"
You shake your head.
"I guess when I felt like I was about to die it came out through instincts"
Gojo frowns at that. He scratched his head as he felt like the tension was slowly rising in him.....
"Yeah...I'm sorry that I hurt you like that. It was a huge mistake to make and I will never do that ever again"
Gojo was sincere and there was sadness in his voice for that. You were a bit surprised to see him show that side of himself. Since you have always seen him to be the most confident and egoistic guy there is.
But this genuine feeling he showed you was enough to make you hold his hands and softly caress them in comfort.
He looks at you.
"Don't apologize. Yes, it did seem over the top, but you made me uncover something I never knew I had. I guess I have more techniques to reveal" You smile.
Gojo had a tint of blush displayed on his face. He has never shown that side before, but you were so cute and so kind that you had to be protected at all costs.
He leans his head next to yours as he closes his eyes. He didn't want to waste this lovely moment with you.
"Satoru?"
"Just for a moment. You're so kind you know that?" He whispers.
You giggle.
"Yes, you have said that many times now"
As the moment passes, you clear your throat and move away from him. Gojo was a little upset to be away from your warmth.
You sigh.
"I'll need some time to meditate today to uncover that spirit. Usually, I end up getting something"
You get up along with Gojo as he offers you to wrap your arm around his. You do so walking back together.
Notes:
So I'm gonna have to say sorry if I don’t completely remember Gojo’s techniques work very well? Let me know if I need some changes to that cause yeah my research was all over the place.
_____By the way here’s a look at your new summon, 2 more will be introduced later. Art credit goes to yang_qi917
New summon: Quiang
https://cdna.artstation.com/p/assets/images/images/043/654/502/large/yang-qi917-concept-huodaolang.jpg?1637874922
Chapter 23: Chapter 21
Notes:
It’s raining and windy in my area so I’m happy about that, and so I’m giving you guys this chapter, enjoy🫶🏽🩵
Chapter Text
A couple of days later.
Sitting in a secluded area in a garden that Gojo took you, you were meditating and focusing on your energy to connect to the spirits and the spirit world.
The process was long and needed to be quiet. The only thing you would hear was the rustling noises of the trees. But even then you were slowly blocking it out.
You felt your body being light and felt the air becoming different. Your eyes were glowing the moment you slowly opened them. Looking around your environment time seemed to stop.
Your spirit was no longer in the human world but on the other side being the spirit world. Getting up you walk around to find anything that the wisdom of the gods can provide for you. A sign maybe.
You looked and couldn't find anything. You sigh as the time goes by.
I'd have something by now...
You concentrate again and chant to build a connection with the gods. Still, you felt nothing.
You grunt while rubbing your head.
"What can any of you tell me when you're not even here! I can't gain any wisdom when you all are just silent"
You lean against a tree and slide down on the floor. Putting your head down between your legs as you wrap your arms around them.
"This is hopeless. I know it's been about a thousand years but that doesn't mean you should give me the silent treatment" you grumble.
"Guess I'm going back. This was a waste of time"
"You didn't even acknowledge me"
A random voice spoke out. You quickly look up and see a rat-looking man standing high and mighty above you. His arms were crossed and he stared down at you with an apathetic look.
You were in awe.
"Who are you?"
"You don't know me?"
You shake your head.
The spirit sighs.
"That is fine. It makes sense you do not know me, since you have never summoned me before. Until now that is" he says.
"Wait! You are who I summoned? But I don't...remember?"
"Of course not. I became you as you became me. In terms, I took over while your soul was resting inside me"
So many questions were running through your head that you were about to get a headache.
"Where to begin"
"Let me introduce myself as a start. My name is Quiang. And yes, I am a cursed spirit who was chosen to be your protector employing any help. You can summon me or you can be a part of me" he says.
Quiang bows to you with respect. You take in his features. It's amazing how he looks so strong and even handsome. And yet he held this soft tone for you so you wouldn't be scared.
"Quiang? That's Chinese"
"We cursed spirits travel anywhere. I just so happen to have been picked by the gods and was given the responsibility to protect you"
"Are there any more like you?" You ask.
"You can summon other spirits like me if you are in any danger. Just like that strange white-haired man who had tried to kill you" he casually says.
You nervously laugh as you wave it off.
"He didn't mean to. He apologized for that anyway"
Quiang hums.
He offers you his hand and you accept. Lifting you he was a very tall spirit.
"I have been with you for many years. But I suppose it has never come to you that you can summon cursed spirits it seems"
"I haven't summoned cursed spirits ever since that day I opened a portal of the unknown. My master told me that it's forbidden" you said.
Going back hundreds of years ago, you tried to do something different with your powers to summon a cursed spirit from a portal you created. The creature that came out of it was huge. You haven't seen anything like it before.
This frightened Tengen to the point that you never used that technique ever again. The reason was that the technique you implied didn't seem too good for it to be in use.
"I can assure you that I will never hurt you if that is what you're afraid of. My brothers too"
"Brothers?"
"Liu Kang and Jiang"
"Are you by any chance the oldest brother?" You ask curiously.
"Yes. Liu Kang is the middle child while Jiang is the baby of our family"
So cute!!
You couldn't believe you could summon three cursed spirits. You assume they are around first to special-grade spirits.
"Again my lady, you can summon cursed spirits like me anytime. Just say the words and we'll be there"
As you two walk around you feel like it is time to go. You stop in your tracks bringing Quiang's attention.
"Quiang, thank you for this, unfortunately, I do have to go back to the human world"
Quiang nods.
"I understand, you can get to know my brothers later when you have the time. You can summon us whenever you like...even when you are lonely"
Quiang knew your moments. Moments when you would cry due to being alone. He and his brothers seen it all. He wanted to comfort you many times when you had those days, but he couldn't unless you summoned him. So he only witnessed.
He's seen it all. Even your time with Sukuna. He didn't say anything about that because he knew looking into your soul, you were still the same wonderful person as you had been trying to be since you were born.
The problem he needed to address with you was your confusion with humans and cursed spirits. You had an agenda, but every time Sukuna tried to disrupt it, you would lead yourself into the pits of uncertainty.
Whether or not you can trust sorcerers still.
That evil spirit was nothing to take lightly of. No matter who he tries to gain the upper hand over. At the end of the day, Ryoumen Sukuna was still an evil god, and you were a good one he tries to taint.
The good cannot coexist with the bad. No matter what the case may be.
Quiang had seen it all. Allegedly he may be thinking that Sukuna is just using you to support him to help with something he might be planning. To use you or your powers.
But he and his brothers will do whatever it takes to protect you from evil. Even if it means to die trying.
You hold Quiang's hand and smile so sweetly at him.
"Thank you, Quiang. You are so sweet. Tell your brothers I said hi!"
You waved to him goodbye and returned to the human world.
Taking slow deep breaths you look around and sit where you were in the beginning. Getting up you walk out of the garden to meet with Gojo.
You went to his office to see him sleeping on his chair. He looked so peaceful. You giggle as you swipe a strand of hair away from his face gently.
I wonder what he's dreaming about?
You stop as he shifts. Waking up he smiles the moment he sees you. His blue eyes make contact with your (e/c) ones.
"Guess I woke up to seeing a pretty sight," he says.
"Hope you slept well" you smile.
Gojo stretches.
"Yeah...how was your meditation? Any contact from the creepy spirit world?"
You chuckle.
"Yes actually. The spirit you fought, his name is Quiang and he's been around with me for thousands of years too"
"I'm not surprised then. What about the body shifting?"
"He told me that I became him and he became me. So while he was taking over, my soul was resting inside him. In a way I was recovering myself," you said.
Gojo smirks as he rubs his chin.
"That's why Ieri didn't find any broken bones on you. You keep surprising me every day you know that?"
You blush and laugh.
"I mean I can do reverse cursed technique anyway but I surprise myself too. I also realized that he's not the only one that I can summon. He has brothers!"
"Brothers?"
"Yeah, their names are Liu Kang and Jiang"
"That's Chinese"
"They were all from that country. They traveled here but I suppose the gods had plans for them with me"
Gojo smiles and pats you on the head. He couldn't wait to see those spirits again. He hopes to fight the one he fought last time out on the field again.
"Before we see Yuuji and Nanami, I need to ask you something and I hope you're comfortable to answer," he asks.
You listen intently to what Gojo wanted to ask.
"Long ago, as you were training with Tengen. Was there anything that you had trouble with? Anything that disrupted your mind spiritually and mentally?"
"What do you mean? I don't understand?"
"Voices? Had Sukuna said anything to you back then that would have your mind racing in confusion?"
You didn't understand why Gojo was asking you these kinds of things. But you knew that he only cares about you. He wasn't being hostile and forceful with you.
He knew if he asked himself you could be open to him. If anyone else asked, you'd be a closed book. Avoiding the question as much as you can.
Especially if a higher-up asked, you'd shut down.
"I suppose there had been voices chanting to me before. I haven't heard it lately but I've been trying to uncover what it all means"
"Do you mind sharing?" He asks gently.
You nod. Remembering the words so clearly.
"I say unto you, the era of bloodshed and terror is nigh. The time of the chill darkness and light will bare its fangs is nigh...the time of madness and the time of contempt"
When you were done, you looked at Gojo and he was confused with what you said. He was thinking for a moment what it meant for himself. But he didn't get it.
"Yeah, that's something to look into alright. But sad to say even I can't quite figure out what it means" he says.
"I've heard it before in my dreams...a-and then for some reason, I started to chant it...I think I killed those men who were trying to hurt me" you whispered.
Gojo turns back to you a bit of shock.
"What do you mean?"
"I don't think I was in my right mind. It felt like I was being controlled. I blacked out and suddenly those men who were being aggressive towards me...they died because of me I think"
"Shit" Gojo rubs his hair back and sighs.
"Are you going to seal me away?" Your voice quivers.
He shakes his head.
"No. I don't think you would do that intentionally. This is all big news but you're still in my care. I'm not giving you to those old fucks. When was all that?"
"Right when I came out of my tomb"
Gojo didn't want to deal with that at the moment, but he was going to help you uncover what those words mean. It won't be easy, but he was willing to try just for you.
He only smiles, offering his hand to you, and you just grab it gently. He gives your hand a firm squeeze.
"I know you know how to control your energy and techniques no doubt. You're a damn good fighter too. But I won't stop protecting you, okay? Think I've mentioned that"
This was a nostalgic feeling for you. You remembered long ago that Tengen said something like that.
"Yes you have, you've mentioned how you would use your big strong arms to fight the bad guys for me" you tease him.
"I can't help being the strongest!" He plays along.
You only laugh. You honestly wish that moments like these last forever. If you needed to ever get away from everything, you'd ask Gojo and he'd be more than glad to do it. Being in the spirit world didn't seem to do much, but after meeting with Quiang, you were excited to see the rest of everyone else.
"I don't know how you feel about me mentioning this but, is Sukuna giving you a hard time? Is he the one doing this to you?" Gojo asks.
You didn't know how you felt about him. The relationship was up and down for you two, so your mind has been spinning.
"No, so far everything's okay. He has his moments, but I don't let him get to me…at least I think so"
Gojo looks at you for a moment and analyzes your expression. When he sees that there wasn't anything wrong with you, nor a hint of a lie, he nods and let's it go. For the most part.
There was a voice of uncertainty though.
The worst thing he could ever witness is you being controlled by him.
Gojo sighs and then smirks.
"This is gonna be a long two months"
"Two months?!"
Chapter 24: Chapter 22
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Two months have passed. And you have improved your techniques more than ever. You let Quiang out to train alongside you with Gojo.
This was also the first time they met, and the results were...uncanny. The first time you summoned him, Gojo acted how you knew he did. Which didn't surprise you.
"Oh, so this is the rat man!"
"What!? Don't you call me a rat man you shameful brat!!"
You just laugh.
"Oh my..."
And on that day Quiang looks at Gojo as a strange childish man. But strong.
Walking down the hallway with Gojo, you see Nanami waiting for you two. You smiled and jogged up to him.
"Nanami it's good to see you again. It's been so long" you said.
"It's only been about three days" he stoically says.
You pout.
"Still too long, I was almost starting to worry. Oh by the way"
You check your dress pocket and soon pull out a nice little flower from the garden you were in before.
"This is—"
"A calla lily. It represents maturity. Yes, I've seen those flowers before" Nanami says.
Your eyes sparkle at Nanami's knowledge of a flower. You almost squealed at how a man who enjoys flowers is pretty attractive.
"Then this is for you!" giving him the flower Nanami accepts.
"Thank you, I will be sure to care for it"
You blush happily while Gojo just pouts.
"So where's Yuuji?" You ask.
"He's coming, he just needed a moment," Nanami said.
While waiting you suddenly spot Yuuji walking down the hall. You were about to smile and wave to him but unfortunately, your smile died down once you saw his expression.
It didn't take an expert to know that there was a hint of dejection and seriousness. And it was gravitated towards you.
"Yuuji?"
"(Y/n), can I talk to you for a moment? In private?" He asks.
"Yes of course!" You were eager to know what happened with his time with Nanami.
Gojo and Nanami understood as you went into a room not too far from them. Closing it Yuuji sits down on a chair and you take a seat across from him.
Yuuji's gaze was on the floor as he was thinking. And then he just spoke.
"My friend died recently. His name was Junpei"
"I'm so sorry Yuuji"
"I'm not done. He died by a cursed spirit with a patchface...I tried to ask Sukuna to help. But all he did was laugh at me. He and that other spirit both just laughing and mocking me"
Hearing his voice there was a hint of frustration.
Taken aback at what he said, you couldn't believe that Yuuji suffered like that. You didn't know what to say, but all you wanted to do was comfort him.
"You asked Sukuna to help you?"
"I thought if I gave him something he would. But I forgot that cursed spirits can be cruel"
There was this slight discomfort you felt just hearing all this. It's okay that he feels like this. In that kind of situation where you'd lose a friend to something like that, it's normal that you would feel that way.
"So I need to ask you a question," Yuuji asks.
"What is it"
"Why did you ever make Sukuna your husband (y/n)? Do you tolerate his behavior?"
You shake your head.
"No, never. I would never let him do anything to harm an innocent being"
"Then what made him special to you? Did you really love him? Once in a while, I hear him inside my head. And you have no idea the foul things he says. It's like he's trying to pick at my brain. I just don't get it"
His questions were valid. You didn't hold anything against that responding to him in a well-out manner.
"It was complicated back then. To be honest he wasn't nice to me at first either Yuuji"
"Then why did you love him? Do you still love him? Did he feel anything towards you?"
So many questions are being bombarded on you all at once.
"I do! I mean...no. I don't know now. But I promise you Yuuji if he does anything to you or anyone any harm, then I will personally do something immediately!"
Yuuji stayed quiet for a moment. Takes one good look at you, impassive as he suddenly opens his mouth.
"I'm sorry (y/n)"
"You don't have to apologize"
"I'm sorry that you're being played"
And just like that Yuuji gets up and walks out of the room. Leaving you baffled and surprised by his words.
You thought he didn't mean it since Yuuji just recently lost his friend. The feelings are still overwhelming him.
You tried to convince yourself that, but you couldn't. Deep down it stung you badly.
You started hyperventilating as you tried to calm yourself down. Suddenly memories of voices started to speak in your head.
"He is a manipulator (y/n). You do not know what he truly wants."
"Fuck..."
"The wife of the evil god himself"
"Fuck..."
"Why do you resist your desires for me, (y/n)?"
"FUCK!"
Your outburst creates a wave of energy just tearing and breaking wood. This commotion caused Nanami and Gojo to speed walk their way into the room.
"(Y/n), what happened?" Gojo asks.
Looking around the disheveled room, you control your breath and wave them off. Trying not to cry as you just let your frustration out.
"It's alright...I just need a moment, please" you said.
Without saying a word they went away to give you some space. They will be waiting for you outside the hallway.
You controlled your breathing and just clutched your chest. Frustrated with the fact that you were confused and couldn't do anything but mope around.
You needed Tengen for guidance because you knew for sure you couldn't handle this situation alone.
All the warnings about Sukuna and even from Tengen you have just ignored because of your love for him. Or was it mainly lust overshadowing it?
He never even laid a finger on you and told you these words that were close to sweet in his dictionary.
He had major loose screws, but he would never treat you badly. It's just his character. At least that's what you have been thinking.
When he told you that he missed you and tried to caress and kiss you, it was like the missing warmth that you have yearned for thousands of years.
But meeting him after those years didn't seem to go as planned. At least not when he's inside a boy's body that he's technically holding hostage.
The first time you ever spoke up for yourself against him, he was exhilarated. He wanted to see what you would do to him. If he would, he wouldn't mind fighting back just to see how things end up.
He would probably end up fucking you in his domain. You knew that for sure.
Sadly, the realization would hit you and suddenly you would lose that confidence you just had.
Sukuna had this twisted feeling of your love. His love is entirely different from yours. And yet it clashes together somehow.
A perfect relationship does not exist. You have realized that many years ago. The perfect marriage doesn't ever exist between two lovers without quarrel.
Sukuna and you are the definition of a toxic relationship. The opposites that destiny placed on you both.
And yet, that so-called destiny keeping you two apart is trying to be overthrown by the conflicting decisions and confusion that's been messing with your head for centuries.
It shouldn't be too hard to understand. Sukuna is evil, and your job is to kill him. Simple as that.
It's wrong to keep that feeling of love for him any longer. But it hurts to lose it.
That sick twisted love.
What was happening to you? Was this your cursed spirit side talking or your human side? You didn't know anymore.
You had to keep moving anyway. Whatever problem you are facing, you will have to deal with it later. Maybe Gojo can help you if he can.
He was the closest you know who would understand, besides Tengen. He was somewhat the closest like Tengen.
But either way, if you don't fix this ongoing issue, then you might as well be overthrown being the prophet of jujutsu history. Not like you cared, you never asked for it.
But being shamed is what you will be facing for the rest of your life.
Maybe being executed isn't a bad idea either. A punishment for your lack of helping the people long ago.
Coming out of the room slowly, you look around and see that Gojo, Nanami, and Yuuji aren't in the hallways anymore. Maybe you spent too much time in the room.
You see that there is a note on the floor. It’s from Gojo.
"My sweet (y/n), when you feel better be sure to come down to the basement. Yuuji made some really good meatballs and we want you to come to eat and enjoy them with us" Love, Satoru.
Meatballs?
_____
You didn't reject the invitation so you came downstairs and got a whiff of something good.
You see Yuuji and Gojo sitting down as they pick at the hotpot.
"Oh, (y/n) you came!" Gojo says. He scoots over for you to sit down next to him. Taking a seat you look at the food.
"This all looks very good," you said.
"Yuuji made it all"
Picking up chopsticks you grab a meatball and put it in your mouth.
The seasoning and texture of the meat almost melt your mouth. You have never in centuries ever tasted anything like it.
"So good!" You squeal.
"Right?"
"I'm glad you enjoy it. It's super easy to make actually. Even Fushiguro can make them. I taught them how" Yuuji says.
"You are a good cook Yuuji," you say.
He smiles at you but it slowly fades as he remembers the conversation you two had.
Gojo even mentioned the little panic attack you had when he left the room. He didn't mean to have you end up reacting like that, but you did.
But he also didn't want you to take what he said the wrong way. Gojo already talked to Yuuji about how sensitive you can be with the whole Sukuna topic.
It was hard and right now Gojo has been noticing the way you would act when it comes to that. You would have your little episodes like just recently.
He needs you to be right beside him at all costs if anything like that were to happen again.
Especially since you told him about the incident.
"(Y/n), I want to apologize"
You look at Yuuji confused. Gojo listened in.
"For what?"
"For what I said back there with you. I didn't mean to sound rude and to be honest I was just still feeling down about everything that happened. But I know that isn't an excuse to act the way I did to you" he says.
You shake your head.
"It's okay. Your feelings are valid. And I say you had every right to. I still need to figure myself out really"
Gojo comes in and caresses your head. You snap back to reality and look at him. He smiles.
"Now that we exchanged some heart-to-heart words, let's just enjoy this meal while we can together," he says.
You smile and nod.
Challenges are meant to be faced. And true feelings are meant to be unraveled.
You will in no time realize Sukuna's true feelings about you. And face the challenge of what you have escaped centuries ago.
For now, you were in the depths of confusion and imbalanced peace. Facing it alone.
But of course, there was one man who would pull you out of it all. You just need to come closer.
Notes:
I promise you all that you will be getting Sukuna moments. Please for now enjoy the flow of the story as if you were watching the anime or reading the manga. It’ll get better soon.
I’ll take fault that I should’ve mentioned that there’s a slow burn with it that but leave a comment if you like on how you feel about this story.
Chapter 25: Chapter 23
Chapter Text
In a room where it was quiet, a clock ticks away the hours going by while Nanami busies himself with a newspaper.
You busy yourself with meditation on the floor while Gojo sitting next to you slumps back on his chair and sighs in boredom.
"Nanami, talk about something interesting"
Silence.
"Okay, I've got it! Let's play catch with discarded rice balls while discussing the separation of church and state! Let's post a video of it and troll people" he says.
Nanami flips the newspaper.
"Enjoy that on your own"
Gojo then claps his hand.
"Drinking game time! Name things you love about Gojo Satoru! Everything! (Y/n), what do you love about me?"
He turns and sees that you weren't paying attention to Gojo at all. You were in your little world with meditation and making a connection with your aura. There was a faint glow around you.
"Ah, she's busy at the moment...I'll just assume she'd say everything too!"
"Please keep that attitude going. Itadori-kun needs that kind of idiocy right now"
Gojo thinks and rubs his forehead.
"Nanami, does Yuuji know about that finger in Yoshino's—"
"I haven't told him. Knowing him, he'd just feel unnecessarily responsible"
Gojo smiles.
"I'm glad I left you in charge. And the finger?"
"I submitted it to the higher-ups, of course. If I gave it to you. You'd just feed it to Itadori-kun, right?" Nanami says.
Gojo pouts and just look away.
"But is it okay to bring him back? If the fact that he's alive becomes known at the exchange event, won't the higher-ups just target him again?"
"Even if they do, Yuuji will be just fine now. You know that better than anyone, don't you?"
"And what about (y/n), are you going to bring her along to the event?"
"I don't see why not. Besides she's under my protection. If anyone's going to harm her, they're gonna have to get through me" Gojo says.
"What happens if you're not around for her though? What will be the situation then?"
Gojo didn't think much about that. Only because he always knew that you'd be right there beside him when there was trouble.
But the problem with that is he slowly came to realize that he shouldn't keep babying you since you are supposed to be strong.
You are strong. But he can't keep you to himself when you need to do things yourself. He thought about training you again to work on some areas you lack.
But if he does, he's afraid to hurt you badly again.
But there he goes again with babying you. The deity of light yourself needs to learn and face challenges yourself. There will be a moment where you will have to make hard decisions.
Gojo will be there for you, but he'll always follow whatever you plan. Gojo would be honored to follow someone like you who may be stronger than him.
Just like now with your meditation, whatever it is you doing in your little world right now, he hopes it's something that will strengthen you.
Strength, wisdom, elegance, grace, beauty.
He's excited to see something amazing from you.
"You forget Nanami. (Y/n)'s a strong sorceress. I've seen it. I know she may not look it, but if scriptures and prophets say who she says she is, then I believe that something cool might unleash in her" he says.
Nanami didn't say anything more but acknowledge Gojo's words. He takes a quick look at you and takes it all in curiosity.
Nanami has seen some crazy shit in his life before. Good or bad. But not every day he would be around someone who lived in the Heian period. A goddess at that. Maybe for once he'll see something interesting from you.
"Sensei! Oh, Nanami and (y/n) are here, too. Eh, what's she doing right now?" Yuuji was about to poke her shoulders until Gojo stopped him.
"Don't disrupt her, she's meditating"
"Whoa, she's glowing"
"(Y/n) meditates to connect herself to the spirit world. No one knows what it's like nor knows what she does in there. But don't wake her up or else she'll be stuck" Gojo says.
"You mean like forever?"
"I doubt it, but you could never be too sure"
"Well, I came to tell you guys that we gotta hurry up and go see everyone! So excited! So excited! So excited!" Yuuji's eyes sparkle.
"Are you planning to just show up like normal after dragging it out this long?" Gojo questions.
"Huh? I can't?!"
"Even among sorcerers, you rarely see someone say they've been alive two whole months after they died. We have to make it a surprise!"
Yuuji looked confused at the idea.
"A surprise?"
"Just leave it to me. The first-years will be laughing and crying from happiness and shock. The second-years and Kyoto students will cry with them. And someone among them will choke and vomit. And in the end, it'll even solve global warming!"
"That seems like a very strange response"
Gojo and Yuuji turned around and saw you getting up from the floor. Stretching as you dust off your dress.
"Glad to see you finally woken up," Gojo says as he comes and hugs you.
"(Y/n), what do you find when you're in the...spirit world right?" Yuuji asks.
"Oh, usually I go find some answers that the gods are trying to tell me, scriptural texts, or cursed spirits who I can talk to and guide me through the unknown" you casually say.
"Whoa, that's pretty cool! So what were you looking for?" Yuuji leans in curiosity. You just chuckle and smile at him.
"I'm looking for an old friend"
And that's all you said. Before Yuuji was about to ask who, Gojo brought your attention to what was going to happen today.
"So today is the exchange event festival. All the years are coming together for it. And especially the principals. I'm taking Yuuji to surprise everyone that he came back from the dead!" Gojo's aura sparkles around you.
The heavy scent of ego was just radiating all around him. You sweat and just nod.
"A-ah okay. That's nice"
"But I will be around many other sorcerers, not just the principal. So I'm going to ask you, are you okay having everyone see you?" He seriously asks.
You look away and think about it. Hiding really won't do you any good when you are about to face so many sorcerers one day anyway.
You take a deep breath and look at Gojo with confidence.
"I don't want to keep hiding anymore. So if I'm going to be seen then I don't care. It's like you said, I'm a strong sorceress no doubt" You wink to him.
"So you were listening!!"
"I mean just you praising me, hehe"
_____
"Is this...a good idea?" You look at Yuuji with concern as Gojo shoves him inside a box.
"Don't worry he can breathe in there!"
"That's not what I meant..."
"All Yuuji has to do is come out of the box and pose in front of a whole bunch of students. Simple as that!"
Once Gojo grabs all his things he gets a text from the principal that everyone is waiting on him. He knew for a fact that he was gonna be late. Be he honestly couldn't care less.
"And I guess I'll be introduced by everyone as well" You try not to show it, but your voice is almost quivering.
Gojo noticed it and patted your head.
"Hey, if you don't feel like doing this. You don't have to" he says.
You shake your head.
"No, I said that I'm tired of hiding so I'm going to be confident and face everyone," you said.
"You sure?"
"I'm just nervous. But I'll be fine"
Gojo only smiles and takes your hand. Soon you all warp to the entrance of the school. Gojo grabs the handle of the box and starts strolling off.
You were walking at a moderate pace while he glided himself from the cart. You just smile at his silliness. But you hope Yuuji was okay in there.
As you catch up to him, Yuuji is already out of the box doing a strange pose. Everyone didn't seem impressed or cared.
"Okay, everyone from Kyoto! This is Sukuna's vessel Yuuji-kun!"
But no one even cared from that side!
As you got close to Gojo, you clutched his shirt to signal you are here.
"And this is..." Gojo chuckles as he tries to move out of the way, but for some reason, you would move at the same time as him. You were hiding behind him.
Gojo grabs your shoulder and moves you in front of him.
"And this is (l/n) (y/n), the deity of light who will save us from evil!"
You grimace.
I wish he didn't have to say all that.
The second years take a look at you with a bit of astonishment. The third years slowly lose their attention from their weird ass pink dolls and look at you.
I mean, not every day will you meet an 1000yr old sorceress who's labeled as the savior of jujutsu society ever.
You blush in embarrassment.
This is too much attention!
"Sukuna's vessel and the light deity?! What's the meaning of this!" An old man named Gakuganji says. He is the principal of Kyoto School.
Automatically for some reason, you didn't seem to like him.
"Oh principal Gakuganji!" He walks up to the old man leaving you standing with a shocked Yuuji next to you.
"Thank goodness, I was worried you might just die from the shock"
"You damn brat!"
While Gojo was having his contemplation with the old man, the taller guy with sunglasses kept observing you. You look away and went to go great the second year.
You bow in respect.
"Hello, uh as Satoru already told you, my name is (l/n) (y/n). And yes I am the light deity"
The girl with glasses looks over you.
"You don't look like a god?" She says.
"Not all of them would look supernatural," you said.
"Can you make water into wine?" A panda says.
You sweat.
"Uhm, no. I don't think so?"
"Ignore him," Maki says.
"Salmon, salmon"
"Ah, I guess I don't look like someone from thousands of years ago. Thank you for the compliment!"
The boy with grayish hair named Inumaki gives you a thumbs up.
"Shake"
After having a humble greeting with everyone, you hear that the school event will be held over two days. With those two days, you were pretty excited to get to know everyone more and see their skill sets.
So for the first day, it was a group battle. The Wacky Cursed Spirit Exorcism Race. You almost laugh at the weird title.
Once the principal of jujutsu high was done explaining and punishing Gojo everyone was to go to their quarters until then.
Gojo leads you with him inside a room with comfortable seats. The only one in the room was a beautiful woman with a scar across her face.
"Here, here, you can sit down and relax with some tea" he hands you a cup.
"Oh thank you" While there was silence, you turned your head slowly to the woman looking at you.
She quickly averted her eyes so you wouldn't think she was staring.
You gained the courage to say something to her.
"Hello"
A bit startled she looked at you and didn't know what to say.
"Oh, Uhm...hello"
"I would introduce myself but it seems you'd know already. So what's your name?" You ask sweetly.
She gathers herself and bows.
"My name is Utahime"
"That's a really pretty name! I will remember that"
After that, the silence continues. You were relaxing in your little world, but also thinking about Tengen and where he could be.
That was when Utahime spoke up.
"If I may. It is an honor to meet the goddess of light and life. I've read so much about you, and seeing you in person is much better than what scriptures had said" she says.
Hearing Utahime's generous talk, it looks like to you that she's a follower and seems to worship you more than see you as a traitor. You smile and wave your hand.
"Please I don't need any special treatment"
"Of course. There are just so many questions I have" While she rambles on, you didn't realize it till now when gazing at her features.
She reminded you of Miyabi.
"Also is it true that you can bring a person back from the dead? That would be...lady (l/n), are you okay?"
"Huh?"
Tears were falling from your face. You quickly wipe them off and laugh.
"Sorry, I don't know what came over me" you rub your head.
"Geez Iori are you bullying (y/n)? What a heartless woman" Gojo then comes in and takes a seat next to you.
"Hah?! I wasn't bullying her you jerk!"
You try to calm the tension.
"Now, now"
After cooling off, Utahime takes a breather and relaxes.
"So what did you want?" She asks.
"Huh? Why are you mad?"
"I'm not mad, actually" she sarcastically says.
"Right? I haven't done anything, after all"
Utahime gets pissed for that response.
Gojo soon was explaining a situation that someone may be working with cursed spirits and that there would be a traitor in the school.
Utahime flabbergasted by that assumption didn't know what to think.
"Please handle investigating those at Kyoto, Utahime," he says.
"...what would you do if I was the traitor?"
Gojo chuckles and waves his hand.
"Not way. You're weak. And you don't have the guts—"
Utahime throws her tea cup across from you towards Gojo. You only smile and sweat from the responses.
"Scary! Hysterics won't win men, you know"
"I! Am! The senior here!"
"Oh my..."
_____
Juju Stroll!
Q: What kind of person is your type?
Maki: Someone who's stronger than me, at the very least.
Mai: Huh? What makes you think I'll answer?
Kugisaki: I totally can't stand a UBSSD.
Momo: Do you know who Sebastian Stan is? Hehehe, he has a great body.
Miwa: Well, you know, I like hot guys, like most girls, but I want someone fun to be around too, and it's important whether or not he can make you feel like he's the only one for you...! Oh, gosh, how embarrassing!
(Y/n): My type? Oh my type...eh well...haha, ah well that's a bit hard to say right now...
Gojo: uh, you know, uh, um...w-what is it? Um, um, um, you know, she's a girl who's really nice and beautiful, she's got a lot of heart. She smells like flowers. Come on, come on, you know!
Utahime thinks.
"Nice girl, nice girl, nice girl" she thought of you but that couldn't be possible.
"Miwa?"
"Eh, she's nice too, but not her..."
Chapter 26: Chapter 24
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
A couple of hours later, people started coming into the room. You see two of the principals you've seen already, but you see a new face that looks mysterious under that well-braided hair.
You didn't want to say anything, but you knew the two older men were looking at you. You didn't need to see it to know it. Honestly, it was annoying as hell.
Two screens turn on and you can see everyone from different backgrounds.
"We're starting in one minute. Now, let's hear a few words of well-appreciated encouragement from Iori Utahime-sensei"
"Huh?!"
You silently clap as you look towards her.
"U-uh...uhm, some degree of injury will be unavoidable, but, uhm...now and then, help each other out...or something..."
"Times up"
"Hey! Gojo, you little!"
"Now, let the sister school exchange event...start!"
"Respect your seniors!"
You try covering up your laugh as you enjoy the Gojo playfully mess with Utahime.
But while it was starting, you felt a barrier wrap around the forest of the event. It was a familiar feeling. Like a warm feeling. You haven't felt it in a long time. Who was this barrier again?
After time passes, you can see everyone doing their best in combat with each other. It surprised you that the third years ganged up on Itadori more than the others.
After that, it was just him and Todo alone. Todo looked strong and fought hard. But everyone else was like that.
Seeing everyone look so alive that it made you excited. You rooted for everyone.
You look at a screen where a mecha robot is fighting a panda.
"That curse doll and robot is really good. I've never seen anything like this before" you say.
Gojo hums.
"Every year all the students get together and show off their skills. The kids just having fun and beating each other up"
"You say that so casually Satoru" you giggle.
Looking at the wall you see a talisman go out in flames. Satoru mentioned that they go off when they are exorcised.
Moments passed while you were so into everyone fighting on the screen you spotted a girl lying on the grass asleep.
"Is she okay?" You ask.
Utahime sighs and gets up.
"She fell asleep. I'm heading out real quick. I can't leave her in the woods with cursed spirits wandering around"
You grimace for a moment but shake it off. Although Gojo noticed your reaction.
"Are you okay (y/n)"
"Yeah...what kind of curses do you send out to these kids?"
"Usually second grade, why?" Utahime says.
You stare off for a moment but then shake your head.
It just doesn't feel like it.
"I'm impressed that you can sense cursed spirits all the way here (l/n)-san," a braid-haired woman says. Her name is Mei Mei.
"That's true. I'm worried about Miwa. Go to her quickly" Gakuganji speaks.
For some reason, his smile gave you shivers down your spine. Something a bit unnatural.
He's capable of feelings? Gross!
Suddenly all the talismans went into flames.
"The game's over?" They all burned red?"
You felt this unusual pressure again. This time it was stronger than before.
"That's odd, my crows didn't see anything"
"I'd love to say Great Teacher Gojo's students exorcised them all, but..."
"The charms will burn red for unregistered cursed energy," Yaga says.
Suddenly you get up, catching everyone's attention. Gojo grasps your wrist.
"(Y/n) what's wrong," he said sternly.
"It's...I don't know...I just can't be here" you try to steady your breathing.
"Here sit down" Gojo calmly guided you back to your seat.
"Do you think it's an outsider? Some invader that could be a threat to you, (l/n)-sama?" Utahime says.
"Does this mean Tengen-sama's barrier isn't functioning?" Mei asks.
It clicks to you now. That familiar feeling of the barrier was Tengen's. But does that mean he's somewhere near? Why did they have access to his technique in the first place?
"Whether it's an outsider or not, something unexpected is happening all the same. They could be fairly skilled exorcists that could be after the deity herself" Gakuganji says.
Yaga gets up.
"I'm going to Tengen-sama"
You snap your head around and look at the principal astonished.
"Satoru and Principal Gakuganji, please protect the students. Mei, you stay here with the light deity and identify the location of the students. Stay in constant contact with the other two"
"Fully understood. I look forward to this hefty bonus"
"Excuse me" you call out.
"I do believe that if you are going to see Tengen, then I'm coming too"
It's who I've been looking for all this time since I woke up from my deep sleep.
"No, it's too dangerous"
"I'm not asking. As the deity of light, I demand you let me see Tengen, or else there will be consequences. I do have more authority than you" you said.
Where did that come from?
Gojo was surprised and amused that you suddenly started acting like a god out of nowhere. It almost made him laugh in a good way.
Principal Yaga sweats a little.
"Please lady (l/n), you may be a target to these intruders if they know you are here," he says.
"I can handle my own"
Gojo then steps in.
"How about this, (y/n) sticks with me like always with gramps. She needs fresh air anyways"
He claps his hands.
"Come on Gramps, time for a walk! You just finished your lunch, didn't you?"
Gakuganji only scowls at Gojo.
"Let's go then" Utahime walks out with everyone in tow.
"Stick close by me okay?" Gojo says to you. You nod. Looking down you see him holding your hand while running out of the building. You ignored it, it was nothing.
_____
Jumping above the rooftop with Gojo, you see a veil expanding across the sky.
"Gojo! You go ahead before the veil comes down!"
"No, not happening"
"Huh?!"
"That veil is practically complete already"
Coming closer to the veil, you see it as a black dome covering the inside of the forest along with the students.
"Well, now that it's down, I just need to break it" Gojo touches the veil, but it pushes him back.
"Satoru are you okay?" You take a look at his hand for injuries.
"Hey wait a minute. Why are you being kept out while I'm able to enter?" Utahime sticks her arm in without a problem.
"Let me try"
you walk up to it and stick your arm in. You were able to go in without trouble either.
"I can get in too"
Gojo smirks.
"I see. Utahime, gramps, (y/n), you guys go on ahead. It only denies Gojo Satoru entry" he says.
"What? Let me help you break this veil, it's not a hassle for me"
Gojo smiles and rubs your head.
"Where's the fun in that? Besides it'll take a while for this barrier to be lifted. And we need strong protection for these kids. So please help them out, (y/n)" he gives you a genuine smile.
You think for a moment then nod with good determination.
"Go on, get moving. I don't know what their goal is, but we lose if even one of us dies or (y/n) is taken"
Everyone heads inside and feels the strong curse presence.
"What a strong curse presence! Don't tell me a special grade curse is here" Utahime says.
"We need to move. Let's go" you said as you continued to walk in front.
"(L/n)-sama wait—!"
"Hey, hey, hey, hey!"
Stopping on your tracks you see a man wearing face paint and a dark apron. You didn't waver.
"Gojo Satoru and that deity isn't here?" The man said. You guess because he didn't know what you looked like, he had no clue that he was standing in front of a powerful being right now.
"That degenerate monk tricked me"
"Excuse me but what monk do you speak of?" you ask.
The guy deviously smirks.
"Wouldn't you like to know"
You sigh. No point coming across him.
"Utahime, (l/n)-sama you two go on ahead. Protecting the students is a priority. Avoid fighting as much as possible" Gakuganji steps up.
"Hey, hang on! At least let me kill those women. I can't make anything from an old man's hollow bones and wrinkled skin!"
Gakuganji pulls out a black box and takes out an instrument of a guitar.
"Why don't you kill me and find out if they're hollow!"
"Utahime, let's go"
_____
Over the stone wall, Utahime and you run to find any students in trouble. Utahime was on the phone to check and see what is going on right now.
"Roger that, Nishimiya, you keep going, too, and head to Shouko...it's okay, Mei-san has eyes on Miwa" Utahime hangs up the phone.
"Thank god it didn't cut off my reception"
"What's happening right now"
"Miwa is still okay, and right now some of the students are trying—"
You cut Utahime off as you sensed a presence behind you two. Quickly summoning your staff, you fling it and unleash electricity around you two.
The enemy steps back.
"Whoopsie!"
You both step back and face a blonde-haired guy with an odd-looking sword.
"I thought I cut you for sure"
"Utahime, are you okay?"
"(L/n)-sama I should be protecting you!"
"...."
"A-ah but yes! Thank you!" She bows and looks back at the man.
"It's a human. A curse user?!"
The blonde guy sighs.
"This is my problem. This is nice though, isn't it? Juuzou made it for me"
"Juuzou?" You question.
"Didn't you run into him earlier?"
You didn't sweat nor did you waver. You knew that you were going to face some battles and protect people, and that's what you're going to do.
"Hey, what will you two ladies give me?"
He's no big deal, I'll finish this off quickly.
"Girls hate you, don't they?" Someone calls out.
Looking back you see Kugisaki and Mai.
"You meet someone new, and all you talk about is yourself. I'll charge you for this"
"Kugisaki!" you smile.
"What makes you think you're a good enough listener to charge for it?" Mai says.
"Shut up! Stop picking fights in moments like these!" They start to argue back and forth.
Ah...guess their attitude toward each other didn't change.
"Wow! So many girls! I'm so popular!"
"Were you listening to me?" Kugisaki was annoyed.
"I'll cover you. Be careful not to get hit in the crossfire"
"You be careful not to hit me!"
Suddenly the veil is lifted, making the atmosphere back to normal.
"For real? It hasn't even been 30 minutes, has it? Time to run!" The blonde guy runs away in the other direction leaving you all alone.
"What's his deal?" Utahime says.
Looking stoic you can feel the overflowing curse energy way up in the air. You didn't need to guess that it was Gojo.
"Utahime, I'm going ahead to the source of the immense energy before it escapes. That special grade can't leave" Before you head off Utahime tries to stop you but you don't listen.
You warp to Yuuji and Todo. Where you believe that's where it was coming from.
Yuuji looks surprised.
"(Y/n)!"
Not saying a word you look at the cursed spirit. A large black and white looking creature with an arm that has a flower blooming on the shoulder, and branches for eyes.
"It's you, isn't it? You're who I've been feeling this whole time here...what do you want" you said.
It looks could kill then that spirit would be dead. You never have been so serious in your entire life like this. Even Yuuji was surprised to see you change character.
The creature didn't speak.
"I know you can talk. There is no point hiding anything from me or running. So speak now. Let us be friendly about this, or face punishment"
The spirit sweats. It knew that it was face-to-face with the light deity. Sukuna's wife. There was this great immense curse energy that it couldn't comprehend.
There was no intention of hurting her other than kidnapping, but that backfired.
"Child of curse spirit, child of wrath. I am withdrawing. I'm not arrogant enough to face you or Gojo Satoru" it says.
There it is again.
It wraps itself with bark. You were about to stop it from escaping, but that's when you felt Gojo's curse technique. You stayed still.
"Screw you! What were you all trying to do here!?" Yuuji runs but Todo stops him.
"Don't take another step forward..."
And so a purple orb runs across the environment. It felt so powerful. You were amazed for a moment. He split the entire woods in half.
Was he going to do that technique to you when you two sparred the last time? Oh well, it didn't matter anymore. What mattered was that everyone was safe.
"Are you boys alright?" You check and see for any injuries.
"Yes!" Yuuji says.
You smile as you clasp your hands together and focus on your energy to heal them.
Green light radiates on Yuuji and Todo making them look fine now.
"Good"
Notes:
Just to let you guys know again, the reader portrayed is based off on a video game character I love, but the reader being you can also be anyone if you like.
_____Life update: I just got accepted to my college I’ve been wanting to go to for a long time now. It’s been pretty much 6 years I have been going to community college. I’m just glad that hurdle of my life is over and now I’m heading to the next step.
Thank you guys for sticking around in this series. Honestly I know I’m writing this for you guys to enjoy. But it’s also at the end of the day for me, because it helps me de-stress and it’s not something that I HAVE to do. It’s for my enjoyment and fun. This story is not always going to be for everyone’s taste and that’s ok. I’m just glad to share with you guys my interest. Alright bye🫶🏽🩵
Chapter 27: Chapter 25
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
They say that you were the chosen one. The daughter of Amida Buddha who he chose to make you the goddess of immeasurable Light and Limitless Life like him.
Those were old scriptures dated back to the late Heian period, right when you were sealed. Many believed you went back home.
Home as in the West Pure Land. But some say that you were judged by the deities, for leaving your duties of vanquishing evil yourself. And you went to hell for it.
Funny, some people say that you left Fudo Myoo all the work to vanquish evil himself. And that one day he will look for you to face justice for leaving your post.
But those were stories told for entertainment. But a bad omen for you, you guess.
But at the end of the day, these stories are labeled just like any others would be—a story tale. Whether one would believe it or not, religious devotees decided that for themselves.
You were just a woman. A woman chose to be put in a world you didn't want to be in. But what choice did you have?
If Amida Buddha ever chose you, you had no choice. Either do your duties or go to hell where all those horrible stories in the hell scrolls were told.
But you already seem to have been experiencing that lately. At least for the most part with yourself. You try not to waver. You knew how to hold your sad feelings when you still had some hope.
Was that good? Yes and no.
There have been moments already when Tengen and Sukuna have seen you burst like a volcano emotionally. And even now in the modern day, you've been contemplating.
Peaceful gods can have melancholic feelings too. However, you would feel guilty after that. And you try your best to hide it again.
But soon that will all stop one day. Sooner than you think, you'll understand the reason the choice that the prophecy scrolls made was right.
You'll be put back to pieces again.
But for now, you wish you could just go back to sleep again where you lived a happy dream, away from the real world.
You didn't want to be a god. But you agreed to be for people's sake. Even if you said no, you would be forced to anyway. Nothing will ever be the same anymore. You can't live your old life again.
_____
After the whole fiasco, you told Gojo that you would visit Itadori, Kugisaki, and Megumi to see how they were doing.
He didn't mind and let you go. Assuming they all had to be in Megumi's dorm.
Holding a bouquet, you gave light knocks until you heard him say come in.
"Hello, I hope I'm not intruding," you said.
"(Y/n)-san, I didn't expect you to come here," Megumi said.
"Well, I wanted to give you all these" You gave each bouquet.
"It's a gift for how hard you all fought. You all did wonderful and should acknowledge how much you've grown" you said.
The trio couldn't help but blush at your caring warmth. You just radiate it.
"(Y/n), do you want a slice of pizza?" Yuuji asks.
You tilt your head.
"Pizza?"
"Yeah, this" he points at the savory goodness.
You slowly grab one and take a bit. Eyes beam and sparkle with delight. Never have you ever tasted anything like it.
"So good! The flavors are overflowing!" you squeal.
As they all smile and laugh from your moment, Kugisaki turns back to Itadori.
"So, when did you start getting along with that gorilla?"
"Well, we got along, but like...I remembered what happened but I wasn't exactly myself then..."
"What, were you drunk?"
"I don't think that would be possible in that situation. Maybe an adrenaline high?" You asked.
"I'm shocked that you both think that. But I'm glad you weren't seriously hurt, Fushiguro. You're able to eat pizza now, too"
You all take a bite from the pizza as you hum in bliss. "Come on, bring me something easier to digest" he grumbles.
"No complaining"
"Megumi, I heard that you fought that special grade as well," you said.
He nods.
"I got off easier because my cursed energy was all dried up. Ieri-san was able to fix me up as soon as the roots were removed"
"I see. I'm glad you're okay though. That's all that matters"
"(Y/n)-san...you're too kind," he says.
"Well I can't help myself can I?" you giggle.
You pull a gentle smile.
"I have high hopes for this generation of sorcerers. So everyone, continue to grow strong"
They all smile and nod.
"That's my brother's friend for you!" A new voice suddenly pops out of nowhere.
You turned to see, that it was Todo sitting idly at the edge of the bedpost.
"Oh hello," you wave.
But suddenly you hear the window open and you see Yuuji escaping.
"Where are you going, brother?!"
"I'm grateful to you, but give me a break! I wasn't thinking straight!"
"What are you saying?! We've been so close since middle school, brother!"
"I didn't go to your middle school!"
Kugisaki and Megumi only stare with blank faces, while you smile and laugh at the same time clapping your hands.
"I just love seeing you all get along," you said.
_____
At a baseball field, everyone was in a baseball uniform as they prepared themselves for the game.
"Play ball!" Gojo yells.
You sit on a bench in the shade next to the first and second years to observe this odd game you have never heard of.
How did it come to this? More in context was where the decision was made from a box.
Back at the building. Everyone was waiting what the next challenge.
"A lot happened and some people died, but how about it? Want to continue the exchange event?"
"I don't know what to say about it..."
"Obviously. We're continuing it, of course," Todo calls out.
After giving a reason why, he made some good points that even you would agree with.
"I hate routines," Gojo says.
"So every year, we put the competition methods in this box and open it on the day of"
He gives the box to Yuuji and the moment he grabs a paper. It read.
"Baseball?!" Yaga yells out.
"What's going on here, Yaga?" Gakuganji asks.
"No, I know I put individual battles in— get back here, Satoru!!"
You turn your head and watch as Gojo leaves the building. No doubt that this was his plan all along.
And so here you all are, watching everyone play ball.
You watch as the ball flies in the air only for it to be caught and thrown back to the person on base.
"So this baseball? How exciting!" You said.
Right now Tokyo and Kyoto were changing sides, this time Tokyo was up to bat.
Yuuji and Inumaki were both sitting next to you side by side.
"They call me the Mah-kun of Tohoku," Kugisaki says.
"Who is that?" You ask.
"No, Mah-kun is the Mah-kun of Tohoku," Megumi says.
"Mah-kun's a pitcher, you know!" Yuuji shouts.
Kugisaki just grits her teeth. Soon Mai rolls in with a pitching machine.
"Just what a minute!" Kugisaki throws her helmet on the ground and walks up to Mai.
"Kugisaki snapped!"
Everyone ran to hold her back from punching Mai in the face. And soon after the dilemma was over everyone started batting.
Some did great while others didn't take much effort. At least in your eyes, one person didn't seem like they didn't want to play at all.
You didn't understand the terms for outfielders, pitchers, or whatever, but you were at least having a good time watching everyone play.
Gojo offered if you'd like to be the cheerleader of the team. You didn't mind, you were just hyping people up.
"Everyone! You're doing so well!" You shout.
Next up was Maki. And soon after hitting the ball she slowly takes the stroll.
That was until she got an out from Momo.
"Huh?!"
"Ah, she got out. It's okay Maki, you did good!" You said.
"That's cheating though!"
"Bonito flakes!"
"Kugisaki, go back"
With Tokyo and Kyoto now having zero, they change sides with Todo batting.
But that soon ends with him getting hit in the face intentionally.
"Nice pitch"
"Nice pitch"
"Maki-san nice pitch"
"Nice pitch"
"Is that good? That looked like it hurt" you ask.
"It's fine," Megumi says.
"Oh okay then...nice pitch!" You give a thumbs up.
After what seems like an hour gone by, you get up to grab something to drink. But not long after Yuuji went up, you can see the ball just flying out from the field very high.
Everyone was impressed and so were you. You look at it in awe, being amazed by such a hit.
"Wow!"
Tokyo won by two to zero.
Once you went, Gojo offered to take you. But not after Yuuji stops you.
"(Y/n), why don't you take a hit!" He gives you a bat.
"Ah, I don't think I would know how," you said.
"I'll go easy on you don't worry!"
You head to the field where Maki, Panda, Inumaki, Fushiguro, and Nobara all watch as you take your first hit ever on baseball.
Yuuji gets ready and throws the ball to you, but it is more like a toss as he tosses it underhand. You take a poor swing with your eyes closed.
"(Y/n)-nee, you have to have your eyes open!" Kugisaki calls out.
Once again, Yuuji tosses the ball towards you, and this time you hit the ball. It was pretty low, but you were happy you got to hit one.
"I did it! Wow, this is so much fun!" You said. Everyone was happy to see you happy. A moment like this will be remembered.
After that little play, you wrap your hand around Gojo's arm as you two go. It was a nice walk until you passed by the two principals.
You just ignored them while Gojo just chuckled as he stepped on walking ants.
_____
"It's so nice to get away from all the stares. This garden is very beautiful Satoru" you say.
Looking around you were at a zen garden that was filled with lush trees and bright-colored flowers around a pond filled with fishes.
"Glad you like it. I wanted to bring you here for a while now"
"Out of all the others? Besides you are a busy man, I'll respect your duties you know"
Gojo waves his hands.
"Not at all. For you, I'll always make time"
He puts his hand on top of yours and rubs it gently. You started feeling weird with this contact again.
Of course, this isn't the first time Gojo would make physical contact with you, but it started to become more than just minor touches.
"Actually, I've always been trying to make some time to be alone with you" his voice started to get a bit low.
"What do you mean..."
Gojo smiles and takes your hand. He looks you in the eye. You remain impassive.
"I know these are small moments, but we've spent some time together that we practically know one another by now. So I want to show my appreciation to you. If you let me?"
You knew it. You felt it inside Gojo's soul that there was a feeling that you didn't think would happen. But it did.
"Satoru"
"Yes?"
"...you can't fall in love with me"
Notes:
I studied Asian art history in college last semester, so I thought this would be a good time as ever to use it.
Let me know if you guys have any questions!
Chapter 28: Chapter 26
Notes:
“It was the first time he fell in love, but it was kept as a dream”
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
"...what?"
You remove your hand from his and gently touch his cheek,
"Even if you think you have...it's not real"
"...What makes you say that?"
You make a gentle smile. Turning around you clasp your hands together in prayer. Closing your eyes in a solemn moment.
"...everyone dies eventually. Some sooner than others. Once my mission to stop the evil is complete, I'll disappear in thin air. But at least then I'll know and be satisfied that I finally saved a life. Even if I don't achieve my ideal of curses and humans being together in harmony...that's okay"
You tried to hold your smile, but Gojo knew that behind it was guilt and disorientation.
"(Y/n), I know you had your moments but...have you been sad this whole time before or after you awakened?" Gojo says.
You didn't want to think it's true. You hate to say it was. But you didn't want him or anyone else to worry about you.
You had to worry about them and protect them. Not the other way around. That's been done a lot already for you.
You turn and smile at him again.
"Why would I be? I'm fine Satoru"
He had a straight face. He knew that was a blatant lie. And he wasn't convinced in the slightest. He looks back at the garden.
"Liar"
You widen your eyes and arch your brows in shock. Gojo gets up and walks away, but before he does, he looks at you to the side.
"You don't always have to try and please others because of what happened years ago (y/n). What's done is done. And you made your decision for the first time back then as yourself. Granted it wasn't the best. But not everyone has to be strong all the time because of some title...well I shouldn't talk should I?"
You didn't say a word nor had an expression.
"But anyway, it's okay for you to not be okay. It's okay to be sad once in a while, and it's okay to cry. That's what feelings are. I know you've shown them to me before and I'm okay to comfort you anytime. Everyone is here for you and you're not alone nor should you take full responsibility alone in protecting everyone here"
Tears slowly started falling from your eyes.
"Who gives a shit that you're a half-curse spirit, half-human. You are who you are, and that's all that matters. And I know you want to achieve this "have cursed spirits and humans get along" thing. But that's a long and hard journey ahead. Not saying you can't do it, I believe that you can. And if you fail, don't act like it's the end of the world. People fail all the time. That's why we learn from it and try again, or try a different way"
He rubbed his neck and held a light blush on his face.
"And you may not have feelings for me now, but I'm not gonna stop until I make you my own. Just because you're a deity, doesn't mean you have the right to tell me how I should feel! Gojo Satoru will have your heart for sure! Even if it cost me my life to fight for it! Though I doubt it cause I am the strongest"
He stands in confidence. You were baffled over the fact that he said such a thing. Then again that is Gojo for you.
You suddenly started giggling which turned into laughs. Gojo looked confused while you reacted that way.
"I was hoping for a different reaction" he pouts.
"No, haha, you're just too much" while you were done laughing and wiping the tears away.
You look at Gojo and hold a smile—a genuine one.
"If that is what you want, thank you, Satoru. And thank you for telling me what I should hear"
Quiet hits the atmosphere. This precious moment is something that you will never forget.
"Everyone is getting stronger here. I can feel it" you say.
"Can you?"
You soon started to get serious.
"We need to make the most of the time we have—to live our lives the way we wanna live. Every minute...every moment, matters"
"I'll remember that," Gojo says.
You turn to him and smile.
"Good...I'm glad I met you, Satoru"
"You're not saying that just to ease my broken heart are you?" He teases.
You only chuckle.
"I'm serious. You've made me more happy than you know. I'm grateful for all the words we've shared. And I'll always cherish the moments you and everyone else here have given me"
Gojo couldn't say a word. He was struck by what you said to him. Never has he ever heard anyone tell him this before. It made his heart swell and warm up so much that he couldn't believe you were real.
He has got it bad for you. And he's grateful to even be in your presence to experience this moment. It wasn't a kiss he longed for, but just you being here was enough for him, for now.
Gojo smiles and just comes up to you, kissing you on the forehead. You blush and blink as you look up to him.
"Let me just leave you with that for now," he says.
_____
You walk around the halls in the school building. It was late evening and Gojo asked you to give him some privacy while he talked to Utahime.
You accepted and now you were just walking around. You hope to find Yuuji somewhere in it since you feel his presence near.
Ever since the mission Megumi, Kugisaki, and he went to. Fighting three special grades, he must've been having some deep thoughts lately.
It honestly worried you that you just needed to talk to him.
The moment you spot him from a distance, you hear Sukuna's voice. Stopping on your tracks as you tune in.
"It's all your fault. You took me in, and now the severed parts of my soul have awakened. To save lots of people, was it? Brat! People are going to die because you live. What will (y/n) then? She will hate you forever"
Emotions started to consume you. Hearing those words made you finally realize Sukuna's acts.
It's not like you haven't seen that side of him before. But you've been letting him do as he liked for a long time now. Only because he somehow had his way with words that you never thought of holding against him.
You can never hate Yuuji. It's not his fault.
"Don't say that to Fushiguro. And you don't know how (y/n) thinks, so don't say that either" Yuuji says.
"Yuuji?" you call out.
Yuuji stops for a moment then turns around to see you standing in front of him.
"(Y/n). How much did you hear?" He asked.
"Enough to know that if you want to talk about it," you say.
Yuuji thinks about it for a moment and shakes his head.
"It's okay (y/n). His words don't get to me. Plus I don't want you to feel some type of way if I talk about him"
"Oh...okay?"
The moment Yuuji walks away, you stop him again.
"Yuuji. You can always talk to me if you want"
He shakes his head.
"I'll be fine (y/n). Thank you. And thank you for caring about me" he says and walks away.
You do the same as you end up outside behind trees. Once you were out of sight, you sat down on the soft grass.
Taking a moment of the wind kissing your face, you quickly put your hands on your face and begin to burst into tears.
"How can I've been so blind...I let this happen" You continued to cry until there was none left.
You stayed still with your head down on your knees while time passed by. You never felt your feelings more lost to the unknown than ever.
"Nee-san, don't cry" you heard an unfamiliar voice.
"I told you not to meet her like this you idiot!" there was another voice you weren't familiar with.
You look up and see a big-looking curse spirit, wearing a traditional Chinese armor garment, his weapon on his back. He looked threatening but his soul was kind.
The other spirit was short and wore a red robe with armored pants. Tiny skulls were around his waistband.
The large curse bent down to his knees eye leveled with you, wiping the tears off your face.
"But nee-san was so sad, I couldn't help myself. Besides Quiang was going to have us meet her soon anyway" he says.
The small rat curse grunts.
"What a pain, after all these years not being used, now you call us crying?"
"Don't be mean big brother"
These spirits were the ones that Quiang was talking about. Liu Kang and Jiang.
"Uhm, excuse me"
You interrupt their bickering.
"But which one of you is Jiang and Liu Kang?" You ask.
"I'm Liu Kang, don't forget it, and this is Jiang. And before you ask, no he is not the big brother, that would be me" Liu Kang says with confidence.
"But Quiang is still the oldest out of us"
"Tch, but I'm still the handsome one!"
"Hmm, no?"
"You!"
You sweat for a moment. Liu Kang had this sort of attitude going on that's pretty tsundere. His soul burns like fire, just like Quiang but not as much.
"Quiang told me about you two already. I just never expected to see you all..."
"Different? We came from different fathers, but our mother was the same. We're still related by blood" Liu Kang says.
You never expected curse spirits to have families. Then again you had one. But that's a different case.
Jiang gets up and takes your hand. His hands were soft and gentle. Lifting you he looks for any injuries.
"Are you okay? You're not hurt are you?" He asks.
You shake your head.
"Why did you start to cry out here all of a sudden?" Liu Kang asks.
You gaze towards the ground.
"I just heard something very horrible today. Something that made me question my own life with them for centuries"
"Was it Sukuna?" Jiang asks.
You nod.
"That's not a surprise. We were trying to tell you he was bad news, but our voices couldn't reach you. And now here you are in shambles" Liu Kang says.
"Brother..."
"I'll take fault for this. And for all the lives that were taken because of me"
"Hey now that's—"
"I let him kill who was "threatening" to him. And so that gave him the go of just killing whoever. Because of my carelessness, many died. I had a mission to exorcise him a long time ago and I avoided it because of my feelings"
Your mind remembered Gojo again.
"But what's done is done. However, history will keep repeating itself if I don't do anything" You walk back to the school.
This startles the two spirits.
"He-hey! Remember what that white-haired human freak said!" Liu Kang shouts.
You turn to them.
"Oh, I know. I'm not alone for the worst to come. And quite frankly, I'm tired of crying and watching people die" You continue to walk as they follow.
"So what are you going to do now?" Jiang asks.
"I'm going to find Tengen. But first I'm going to need to get stronger. I'm done being nice. And I'm going to need both of you and Quiang's help" you said.
They smile.
"Yes ma'am!"
"Well, now you're starting to act like a deity. What everyone has been needing for a long time now" Liu Kang scoffs.
You look at him as you come towards him. Suddenly you just pinch his ear.
"Ow! Ow! Okay, I'm sorry!"
You only smile as you let go.
"You should die your ego down, brother"
"Shut up" he grumbles.
_____
Back at school, Jiang and Liu Kang vanish leaving you alone to meet with the second-year students. They were all outside training in the field.
Panda was the first to notice you.
"Ah, (y/n)-san what are you doing here?" He asks.
"Just wanted to see how everyone's doing"
"We're training to get stronger. The first years fought special grades so we don't want to get left behind" Maki says.
"Well then I hope you all get there," you said.
Watching Maki and Panda fight it out, you sit next to Inumaki on the grass as he keeps score.
From the looks of it, Maki was really strong. If she got into a serious fight she'd win for sure.
After the score settled with four for Maki and three for Panda, everyone takes a break sitting on the grass and having water.
"Have you ever spared with anyone before (y/n)?" Maki asks.
"Hmm, a long time ago. Usually, it would be with dummies. But recently I have with Satoru"
"How did that go?"
"Ah, well not so good. But not so bad either? I guess my shikigami stepped in and saved me" you said.
"What kind of shikigami?" Panda asks.
"I guess a special grade one. I have three"
This piques Maki's interest.
"Do you think you could have them spare with us?"
You scratch your head.
"I don't know..."
"A friendly match is fine, right? Since the first years experienced fighting special grades, why not us?" Panda says.
"Salmon"
They all waited for your approval, and you couldn't say no to their excitement.
You sigh.
"Alright, but just one...I guess maybe Liu Kang?"
You close your eyes and summon him. The smoke fades away as he steps out.
"I was just taking a nap, but what do you need" he yawns. Looking around and sees two teens and a panda around him.
All over towering him.
"Who are you?"
"Eh, you're a special grade?" Panda asks.
"He's small," Maki says.
"Tuna"
This suddenly irks Liu Kang.
"Ha?! Who are you calling small!? I'm stronger than you brats...and panda!" He says.
You place your hand on top of his head.
"He's a little grouchy" you laugh.
"So you're going to make us fight this cursed spirit? You know we're better than that (y/n)" Maki says.
Soon Maki gets hit in the head all while her staff weapon is stolen. It happened at the speed of light and nobody saw it coming.
Maki frantically looks everywhere and she soon sees the spirit sitting on the benches, holding her staff on his shoulders.
"Don't underestimate a special grade like me, human. You'll make yourself look bad" he says.
Maki smirks and gets up.
"Well now you got my attention"
Getting her staff back, Maki and the other two students took pleasure in sparring with Liu Kang. Liu Kang specialized more with agility and switches between offensive and defensive fighting. He had a sickle weapon along with an uchiwa maple leaf fan.
Not to be deceived by looks, the fan throws powerful gusts of wind that could take the average person out over one thousand kilometers. He can adjust the power of course.
Once Maki, Panda, and Inumaki see an opening they make their attack. However, Liu Kang uses his uchiwa fan and pushes them away at a distance.
"Tch I was so close!" Maki says.
"Don't beat yourself up. You guys got me a couple of times so be proud" Liu Kang puts his tools back.
"Well at least we're getting stronger," Panda says.
"Mustard leaf"
"One more time," Maki says.
Liu Kang looks at you for approval.
"I'm going to have to stop this match for today. I have some things to do" you said.
Once you stored Liu Kang away, you bow and leave them to their training.
"Do you think we can have another match next time? With you this time" Maki asks.
"Of course"
Walking away, you go to find the first-year students.
Notes:
These artworks are credited to the amazing Yangqi.
Visually this is what the two brothers look like, the large one is the youngest while the smaller one is the middle child. Quaing is the oldest. (Ignore the little gremlin being held lol)
I’m just having my fun here so I thought I’d share with you guys. Ok bye🩵
https://www.artstation.com/artwork/v1o8NO
Chapter 29: Chapter 26.2
Notes:
“No doubt there will be painful and sad times, but there will definitely be happiness so great that it can wash away that pain”
_____
Just so you guys are preparing for the Shibuya incident arc, I'm gonna give you some extras, so save your sorrows till then.
Chapter Text
Looking around the school you noticed a room with many books and scrolls in storage. The library.
Heading inside you see so much literature that you could imagine. Ranging from sorcery training to knowledge of curse spirits and sorcerers throughout the years.
A book caught your eye as you take it from the section.
It was a book about you. Going through pages you see yourself painted in beautiful yamato-e style. It was nice that someone depicted you how they saw you.
The old you from a thousand years ago was right there on a scroll. And another sight which you weren't too fond of seeing. It was a painting of Sukuna.
Going through every part of the painting, this was about your life that didn't seem too accurate but was painted as it almost was.
Going through each book that was about you. You discovered good and bad literature that depicted what life was for you thousands of years ago.
Taking a seat you contemplate each one and can't help but sigh. Rubbing your head you found it frustrating.
"So you've been in here" Hearing that familiar voice you turn around and smile.
"I was going to meet with the first years but I thought I'd get some reading done first," you said.
Gojo walks up behind you and looks at the literature in front of you as well as the ones stacked up.
"About you? Don't you already know who you are?" He playfully asks.
"Sometimes I wonder. I just wanted to read what others knew about me"
He shakes his head.
"You won't find much. It's not like they're all accurate anyway" he says.
You sigh.
"I know...some are pretty depressing, but some aren't I guess"
Gojo can see right through your small smile. He thought about it for a moment and wondered if it was a good time to show you something that relates to you.
"Hey, are you okay?" He asks.
"Don't I look it?" You smile and playfully present yourself to him.
"Just making sure. I have something to show you. Something that not a lot of sorcerers know"
"Is it special?"
"For you, yes. I had to get it off from the higher-ups' hand without them noticing" he says as he takes your hand.
You were nervous at first but intrigued to find out what it was.
Gojo takes you to his office and has you sit down on his comfortable and expensive chair, hoping to have you relaxed.
He opens up his drawer and carefully pulls out a wooden case. Opening it he gently takes out some letters. You look at him confused.
"These letters were hidden from the world and kept in archives. But I just knew that the senders would've wanted you to see these someday" he gave you the letters.
You open them up and no doubt these were for you.
As you read who sent them to you, it was none other than your father and mother. Letters from your father and the others from your mother.
You gasp and look at Gojo with grief.
"When did they send these?"
"Probably around the time you were at the Kamigamo Shrine"
You didn't know what to feel right now. Anger, sadness, and confusion were swirling in your head at the moment. You just wanted to scream at the ones who held these letters from your family for a long time, without you knowing.
The problem was that they were all dead.
Gojo puts his hand on your back while your hands are on your head to process all this.
"I'll give you a moment to read them by yourself if you like" he softly says.
"...can I have you here for support? I don't think I want to be alone for anything like this" you asked.
He nods as he pulls up a chair and sits down across from you. He gazes to the floor while you read through the letters.
You first started with your father.
(Y/n), if you are reading this, then it means that I am so sorry I broke my promise. For all the things I wished I did for you that I could not. I hope that I was a good father to you.
I wished I would have at least seen you grow up into a strong woman and see if you were okay. To see your beautiful smile again. That is all I ever wanted before heading towards my deathbed. It was hard for your mother these past couple of days which turned into months. The tears were never-ending.
I am sorry that you were not born like all the other kids. It is not your fault but mine. The world of love would want no monsters like me in it.
If I had the power to help you out of this "destiny" of yours I would have. Then at least we would be whole again. But I hope once everything is over, you will come back to us. I hope you receive this letter and write back to me soon.
You had no words after reading your father's letter. Gojo was ready to comfort you but you kindly waved him off and continued with your mom.
(Y/n), I hope you are doing well. Your father and I think about you every day, ever since the day you were taken away from us. I know you made your choice to go, even though there was no choice in doing so. You were going to be taken from us anyway.
But your father and I, both hoped that we did the best we possibly could to have raised you to live a normal life. We are so sorry that we did not tell you sooner about you being a half-blood-cursed spirit child. We only wanted the best for you. But of course, you were bound to know what you were sooner than later.
I promise, your father and I would never hurt you.
We did not want you to be ostracized by anyone. All we ever wanted was for you to be happy and loved. Ever since you were gone, it was just never the same again for your father and me.
Every moment, and every second that we spend time in the house, all we can ever think of was you. Every memory was spent together as a family. But now that has been shattered. We prayed that one day you will come back home to us. It wasn't easy to see you go, we both loved you very much.
Years have passed, and I have thought about ending my life, but I didn't want to leave your father alone and heartbroken. So I stayed strong and waited at the house for many months when you came back. I love you, (y/n). Please come back soon.
You rub your eyes, wiping away the tears as you take a moment to process these letters given to you.
Tears turn to soft whimpers, and you sniff as you lower your head. Gojo slowly walks up to you and pulls you in for a hug.
"They were waiting for me...and I had no idea"
Gojo rubs your shoulders.
"Those sorcerers kept these letters from me, and for what? To not let me send one back? To not let my family know I'm doing okay? They died without even knowing how I was"
"I'm sorry (y/n) if I could turn back time I would," Gojo says.
"But you can't! And now they're gone forever!"
Gojo lets you cry for a moment and soon you calm down as you breathe. Taking a moment as you gather yourself you wipe your tears away.
"Thank you, Satoru"
"For what?"
"For being here with me"
He gives you a gentle smile and rubs your head.
"I'll always be there for you"
Once you put the letters back into their case you store them away inside your domain where you know they would be safe.
"Satoru"
"Yes?"
"When the time is right, make sure to not let any single one of the higher-ups live...their punishment is death. And if you fail to do so, then you will have to answer to me" you said with fire in your eyes.
Gojo smirks as he nods.
"Just what do you take me for? I was planning to do so anyways"
_____
Going outside to tend some flowers to clear your mind, you hear a voice calling for you.
"Nee-chan! Is that you?" You turn around and see Kugisaki jogging towards you.
She hugs you and you hug her back.
"Where were you all day? I was looking all over for you" she says.
"You were? Ah, sorry, things came up"
"Well let's go then, Itadori and Fushiguro are waiting" she pulls you away from the school.
"Where are we going?"
"We're gonna have some girl time, just you and me. Shopping and having lunch at a café, while the boys do whatever they're doing" Kugisaki says.
You smile and laugh.
"That sounds fun. However, I'm not very materialistic so I don't think I'll be spending anything"
I don't have money anyway.
"Didn't Gojo-sensei give you any money?" She asks.
"No? Why would you think that?"
She shrugs.
"You and him just seem close. Other than being your bodyguard or whatever. He just doesn't seem like he'd say no to you"
You look back at the time he confessed to you.
You chuckle.
"Oh yeah, I just don't want to keep freeloading people like that," you said.
"Gojo-sensei's rich nee-chan, don't feel bad for him buying you stuff. If anything eat the rich!" she smiles.
You only laugh.
Meeting up with the two other first years, Itadori tells everyone that he'll be seeing a movie, while Fushiguro is going back to his dorm.
"Alright we're going" Kugisaki takes your hand.
"Oh, I'm going to watch a movie, are you guys coming?"
"What movie?" You ask.
Itadori explains what the movie was all about and how it was about love. It almost intrigued you but was not something you were interested in seeing.
You give Itadori an awkward smile while Kugisaki just scowls.
"That's...good Yuuji," you said.
"So you'll come watch it with me?!"
"Uhm" you look away.
"We don't wanna watch Earthworm Guy" Kugisaki bluntly says.
"It's Earthworm Man..."
Kugisaki continues to walk with you in hand.
"It doesn't matter, we're going shopping. Do you wanna come?" She asks.
"No, I told you I'm going to watch the movie"
"Really? Bye, then" Kugisaki waves goodbye while you smile and wave to him.
"Have a good time at the movies Yuuji! Tell me all about it when you come out"
Itadori smiles.
"Okay!"
_____
After looking around, you didn't buy anything but Kugisaki insisted on buying you a bouquet you kept staring at and boba.
"So these tiny balls are tapioca?"
"Yup"
While sipping your drink, you sense a presence behind you both. Turning around you see a tall girl towering Kugisaki and you.
"Uhm, excuse me" the tall girl was nervous and blushing, it was so cute.
"Oh wow, you're tall!" You were fascinated.
The girl only blushed more. She steps in a bit closer to you guys.
"Oh, thank you. And also were you two just with Itadori?"
Soon you all ended up at a small restaurant. Sitting beside Kugisaki you look at the tall girl.
"This is me at the junior high graduation ceremony" She shows you two a photo of herself a year ago.
Junior high? I don't know what that means but she still looks cute! You thought.
"Really!? This is just half a year ago! How did you become like this?" Kugisaki asks.
"No, I grew 15cm taller after graduation. And after coming to Tokyo the change in environment brought me a lot of pressure, so..."
"Ah, are you Kuroko Sato? Oh, wait...isn't this Itadori?" Kugisaki points out.
"He doesn't look like he changed. Other than his hair?" You look closely.
Yuko smiles.
"On that day, I gathered the courage to ask him to take a picture with me. I wanted to ask him for his phone number. But I was certain that I would move to Tokyo...but I saw Itadori just now, so I thought maybe I have a chance now"
Kugisaki got the idea of what she was getting at.
"Yuko, you mean...you don't mean "that", do you?"
"Yes, I mean "that"!"
You look at the two girls confused about what was going on. Kugisaki picks up her phone and calls Ijichi.
"Mr. Ijichi, is Fushiguro still in the car?"
"Uhm, what's going on?" You were lost. That is until you look back at the wonderful girl and see her face flushed.
That's when it hit you.
Ah, so that's how it is.
"Alright, the guy who knows Itadori better than me is on his way," Kugisaki says.
"Uhm"
"Listen to what he has to say first"
"Itadori is a pretty good man. Very funny and strong" you said.
"Uhm!"
Yuko brings both of your attention.
"Ms. Kugisaki, (l/n), you two wouldn't happen to be interested in Itadori—"
"No"
You only laugh and wave her off.
"Oh no, I'm way too old for someone like him"
Yuko sweats. She didn't know what you mean.
"I see..."
Suddenly Kugisaki felt a pain in her chest.
"Are you okay, Nobara?" You ask.
"Ah, sorry it's nothing"
Soon Megumi became annoyed.
"What the hell do you want?"
"Fushiguro, does Itadori have a girlfriend? Kugisaki asks.
"Huh?"
"This girl is Yuko Ozawa. She just..."
Soon Fushiguro's eyes widen with surprise.
"You mean "that"?"
"Yes, that's it"
You only chuckle and enjoy their weird face exchange.
"I don't think he has a girlfriend. When we asked him to come to Tokyo, he didn't seem too troubled. He even has posters of celebrities in his room. A guy with a girlfriend probably wouldn't do that, right? After all, it might upset her" he says as he drinks coffee.
"Are you the kind of guy who plays cool in front of girls by drinking black coffee?" Kugisaki asks.
"You called me over just to gather information, didn't you? I always drink black coffee"
Yuko fidgets with her hands.
"And I want to ask about his type"
"Wait I just remembered, I thought he liked this girl named Jennifer Lawrence?" You said.
"That's a famous person that doesn't know he exists (y/n)-san. Besides, I think he once said that he likes tall girls" Megumi says.
Kugisaki and Yuko both clink their drinks in victory. You playfully join in as Kugisaki pulls out her phone.
"You have a chance! I'm going to text Itadori! Is that okay, Yuko?"
"Yes!"
You giggle as you rest your head on your hand and take in the scene.
This generation of youth is so lively.
After what took moments of waiting, you see Itadori coming into the restaurant. You wave to him.
"Oh, Fushiguro is here too"
Kugisaki almost chokes on her drink.
"That was quick!"
Suddenly Kugisaki's instincts kicked in when she thought that Itadori wouldn't recognize the girl.
She pulls you in and whispers in your ear.
"I haven't told Itadori about Yuko yet!"
"Hmmm, oh yeah?"
"With the dramatic change, I don't think..."
Itadori looks at Yuko and blinks for a second.
"Oh, it's Ozawa. What are you doing here?"
"Wow," you were in awe. There was never a time when Yuuji hadn't impressed you.
As the evening went by Itadori went to walk his old friend back to the station. You walk side by side with Kugisaki and Megumi once he comes back.
"Is this okay? They should at least leave a phone number" Megumi says.
"She did exchange phone numbers with me. It should be fine"
You hum and smile.
"I think it's nice that two friends should reconcile with each other. After many years of being apart, that girl must have had a huge weight lifted off her shoulders. I'm glad"
"That seems like a good way to put it. But you know what I just finally realized? About my feelings"
"What's that?" You asked.
"If Itadori gets a girlfriend before I get a boyfriend, I'll be super upset!"
You just chuckle.
"Sorry to keep you waiting!" Itadori pops up.
"Stay behind," Kugisaki says.
"What are you guys talking about?"
"Take this" Megumi hands him his bag.
"Okay"
"Take this" Kugisaki hands him her bags.
Yuuji takes it.
"What are these?"
"And help me carry these" Kugisaki hands him more of her things.
"What?"
"It's not right to let a lady carry heavy things, right? (Y/n)-nee let him carry those"
"A-ah no that's okay" you wave off.
Kugisaki grabs your bouquet and gives it to Yuuji.
"These look nice, who are they for?" Yuuji asks.
"There for...well for anyone I guess? I pick and choose out of these nice arrangements" you said.
"Seriously? I thought you got them for yourself" Kugisaki says.
"Honestly, I never really had flowers for myself. I usually give them to others"
"How come?" Yuuji asks.
"Well, I would like to say because mine are special. They're good for absolutely nothing!" You said.
Kugisaki, Yuuji, and Megumi all look confused. You chuckle.
"It all depends on the person. Giving just a flower to someone is a good enough gift to let them know that you care"
"Has anyone ever given you one?" Kugisaki asks.
You just shake your head. This disheartens everyone.
"That's...pretty sad," Yuuji says.
You only shrug and give them a small closed smile.
"Yeah...I guess that can be pretty sad"
No one said anything after that until Kugisaki pulled one out. Snapping the long stem from the flower and placing one at the side of your head.
You look at her confused.
"Well I care about you nee-chan"
You touch the flower on the side of your head.
"Here, me too!" Yuuji puts one on the other side so you had two.
"Fushiguro you too" Kugisaki points out giving him one.
"Where would I even put one?"
Kugisaki thought of something, then she pulled out a hair tie. She pulls some of your hair in a twist back.
"Okay now"
Megumi sighs and just puts one behind your hair. He didn't look like it but he secretly did enjoy doing.
You stop in your tracks and touch the flowers on your hair. You look like you are about to cry but you counter it with bursts of laughing.
"Eh, did we do something wrong?" Yuuji asks.
"No, no, it's just. You all are so wonderful. Thank you for today. For all these moments" you blush.
You walk up side by side with Megumi and Yuuji. Entwining your hands either theirs.
"Damn, the movie is about to start, hurry up. Let's go hurry up!" Yuuji runs pulling you in.
"Wait! Don't run off with my things! I will never watch the Earthworm Man!"
"Fushiguro, (y/n), do you guys want to eat popcorn? Is caramel flavor okay?"
"Don't assume I'm going to watch Earthworm Man"
"Caramel sounds good!" You said.
You wished these moments last forever.
Chapter 30: Chapter 26.3
Notes:
This short story will be the only time that will hunger Gojo addicts
_____Warning: Sexual Content
Minors Do Not Interact
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
"I need you to be as close to absolute perfect. A beautiful woman like you will be sent off to the best of brothels" your caretaker says.
It was the Edo period, and at the great heights of the (l/n) estate was a princess named (l/n) (y/n). She was treated with royalty and fairness.
Given the best gifts and food ever to offer for her status.
"Grace and posture are of utmost importance. Remember that"
She was married off to a man who was strong and had much authority that would make any man cower in fear.
But she didn't waver. She knew that deep down the man she married had a soft side. Gentle to the touch with her as if she was a delicate pure flower, and his voice sweet like honey. Life was good to her. There were no casualties between the two married couples.
She thought she found the perfect man who would take care of her just as much as she could provide.
"Since you were a wife you should know your 12 positions already, if not 20. Though knowing 20 sex positions seems a bit advanced, but you're a smart girl"
However, this faith came to pass when a betrayal of love between her and her husband shuttered the lights of her path and soon became turmoil.
And now here she is back to her estate. Though her father sold her off to a brothel as her final choice.
The brothel was high class and only qualified women with high status may work inside. The same goes for clients. No one was able to get in unless you were someone very important.
In the end, she was still granted special treatment. Though nothing will mend her broken heart. Never will she think she will find true love again.
That is until she meets a mysterious blue-eyed man.
_____
The ride was long and took about two days. But you made it to your destination where strings of lantern lights lead the way to the entertainment district.
You see many beautiful women all dressed up and face painted with makeup behind the wooden fenced window.
There were also many male patrons just waiting and looking to see what their nights would become.
You look out and just sigh.
"Don't be sad (l/n)-sama. I know it can be hard, but you out of all the girls here are put into a high-class inn. You will be working, but you will also be taken care of" your caretaker says.
"Is that one way to sugarcoat it? I wasn't given any choice and so my father sent me away to a brothel as a form of punishment" you say with sourness in your voice.
"I'm sure he was doing the best he could to look for something special for you. After breaking off the marriage with Ryoumen Sukuna, he had to find other options. Just be lucky your head is still intact"
You didn't say a word. Ryoumen Sukuna was your husband. However, as you slowly saw his true colors you had to break it off.
He wanted you for power and nothing more. And he had to manipulate you to get what he wanted. But you saved yourself as you broke it off and ran back to your estate.
Your father held mixed emotions when you randomly came back and started explaining everything.
Fear struck his face as a thought that Sukuna would kill his family and burn his estate down. But then he paid him a hefty amount so he wouldn't cast his wrath on you all.
However, you had to pay the price yourself with your father sending you off to a brothel. Out of all the places.
"I don't mind working. I would've loved selling bouquets for people" you said.
"And get your hands dirty? None sense. That is not an art form. Tea ceremonies, calligraphy, brush painting, and this is all in the form of art. And you are blessed to have all those skills. Don't waste such talent on flower picking (l/n)-sama"
Nobody could understand what you truly want.
As you made it to the brothel, you can see that it looked almost dead compared to the other ones.
It looked like there wasn't anyone around, but as soon as you entered there were many women dressed up in expensive silk and hairpins while entertaining their clients.
"Hello, do you have an appointment?" A woman comes up to you and analyses you from head to toe.
She was the owner of the house. Seeing how serious and wise she looked.
"Oh, uhm, I don't have an appointment," you said.
"She is one of your new girls that her father (f/n) spoke to you about," your caretaker says.
The woman hums in delight.
"Oh yes (l/n) (y/n). Princess of the (l/n) estate. I assure you we will take care of you very well here then"
The lady of the house gets paid with a sack of ryos from your caretaker. You bid him farewell and she lead the way to your room.
"I know this may be all scary to you, but don't worry. I will be here to guide you and see what you are capable of"
Walking with the headmistress you look around and see all kinds of peculiarities. From bondage to threesomes to usage of items such as octopus and feathers.
It was a strange site to you.
"First I have to know what you know and what you are capable of. I won't allow my girls to do something they aren't familiar with"
She led you to your room and it was very clean and fancy.
"This is where you'll be sleeping. Now for a few questions. Do you have experience with a man?"
You thought back to your ex-husband and the times he and you bedded together in your chambers.
"I have...some experience?"
"I was told by your father that you were married. What was your ex-husband's favorite position?" She asks.
You blush bright red. It was embarrassing for someone to just casually say something like that. But you were in a brothel, and it was all just business. Plus it shouldn't be new to you.
"His favorite position...it would be me on top?"
She chuckles at your adorable response.
"No doubt I can see right through you. I'm sure you had experience, but it seems you still have a lot to learn. Now remember, you are treated with luxury, but once a client chooses you, you must tend to your duties"
You look nervous.
"Don't worry, we don't get many clients here unless they are very important. We're still standing only because of the hefty amount of ryos. You girls are quite expensive" she lightly says.
She hands you a hairpin as a gift for your stay. She then leads you to another room where it was a huge wardrobe filled with girls getting ready.
They all look at you in wonder.
"Everyone this is (l/n), she will be staying with us so treat her with respect," the headmistress says.
Everyone greets you and bows while others have a questioning look. The headmistress leads you to your wardrobe. Sitting down as you get ready.
"(L/n)? From the (l/n) estate? If I can recall you were royalty. A princess no?" One of the girls asks.
You only nod.
"You were married off to a man. What's his name? He's very well known but yet not in a good way" another says.
Your stomach starts to churn.
"Ryoumen Sukuna I think. I don't understand how you broke the marriage off without being killed"
Stop.
"Her father had a lot of money. So they didn't have to pay with their life"
Please stop.
"Well, at least now you don't have to blacken your teeth anymore" All the girls laugh and chuckle as they play around with you.
Honestly, your feelings were not anything to play with.
"(L/n)-sama" a maid calls out.
You quickly get up and respond.
"Yes?"
"It's time for you to get dressed. Do you need assistance?"
"Uh no, I'm okay. Excuse me" You grab your choice of robes and get dressed.
The maids prepare you for doing your hair and makeup. You looked really beautiful and ready to bring in patrons.
The headmistress looks at you head to toe and nods.
"Now I placed you in a section where you are limited to do the varieties of pleasures. However, once you get comfortable here for the next couple of days, I'm going to have you switch to a different section where you will do more than simple intimacy" she says.
You nod.
Once you sit down near a wooden window, you look around and see many men looking for a house to be in.
"Just waiting around?" A voice spoke out of nowhere. You look up and see a woman with kind eyes and pretty black hair adorned with many fancy hairpins.
"I guess," you said.
"You almost look bored. You can always play the shamisen, write, paint, or just flirt with whatever man comes through while time passes. I usually flirt, it's fun" she says.
You smile and nod.
"I'm just getting used to this whole atmosphere. I feel like I went to the bottom" you said.
"Bottom? Honey if anything you are still at the top"
"Huh?"
"Men with high status will pay us a huge amount of money for just one night. If lucky more. Why do you think this brothel is exclusive?"
You look in wonder as she continues.
"The men we've been getting lately have been Zen'ins and Gojo's. Zen'ins are very explorative with their sexual desires, and Gojo's tend to be the most romantic lovers that you would cum more than once" she giggles while you just sit there a bit flushed.
It's been hours but suddenly you were startled by the many girls running towards the entrance. You had no idea what was going on but you wanted to take a look for yourself.
All the girls from almost the whole house gathered around for only one client that came in, while you were in the back. Everyone squeals and welcomes whoever this mystery man is.
The headmistress sends everyone back to their duties quickly and sighs.
"Forgive my girls, they all can be quite the handful," she says.
"That's okay. Not everyone can resist the great Gojo Satoru"
Gojo Satoru that was his name. And taking a look at the man, he had beautiful hair that was white as snow, and beautiful blue eyes that would match the clear blue ocean.
"I assume you are here for the usual?" The headmistress asks.
"Yeah, but I'm feeling adventurous right now"
"Oh?"
"I'll have someone different this time. Someone new" he says.
"Are you sure?"
"I already know all the girls here, even their names. I want someone who I haven't met before"
The headmistress bows and heads towards your way. You dust yourself off and graciously present yourself.
"I am sending you to cater to Gojo-sama today. Don't mess this up" She takes you to him in a private room with a tea set held by your hands.
Normally they'd bring sake to clients, but because the headmistress told you that he doesn't drink, you bring him his favorite tea that they prepared for him. With extra clumps of sugar.
There he lays on his side in all his glory with boredom as he has his hand on his cheek. You were nervous to approach the beautiful man, but at the same time, it was tempting not to.
"Good evening, I am here to serve you," you said with a sweet tone lingering in your mouth.
Gojo looks at you and smiles.
"You're a different face. I haven't seen you before, especially with those pretty (e/c) of yours" he says.
You giggle.
"I appreciate your flattering Gojo-sama"
"Call me Satoru, I rather we skip the formalities," he says as he grabs some tea and takes a drink from it.
You take a sip as well and wince for the sweetness.
"You truly love sweets"
"It's the best! There's a shop that has the best kikufuku ever" he says.
In some way you found his personality to be funny and comforting. Almost like a man-child.
"So what will it be for today?"
"Eh, what do you mean?" Gojo asks.
"Servicing you. What do you desire to do today?"
Gojo puts his hand on his cheek and thinks.
"Ah yeah that...hmm, honestly I'm fine with talking for today"
Talking?!
"Well, surely there's something you desire" You scoot in closer and place your hand on his chest.
"Not really, I was given everything I wanted when I was a kid, so getting something I desire now feels pointless. But what do you desire?" He asks.
"What?"
"Instead of you asking me, I should ask you. So what do you desire the most right now?" He smiles.
You honestly never had anyone ask you this before. Usually, people would make decisions for you and you would just go along with it.
This wasn't just an ordinary man, and your heart opened.
"I want to take control of my life. I'm tired of people telling me what to do and I want to at least fight my own battles if I can. But now, that all seems like a long-lost fairytale" You sadly look at your cup.
Gojo just hums and rubs your head. This slightly startles you.
"Don't beat yourself up. I know many people want to do something more with their lives"
You chuckle.
"It's not that easy"
"You're right"
You and Gojo talked for hours, not realizing that time had gone by. The moment that his time was done, he told you that it was time for him to head back.
"Oh, uh, we didn't do much"
"That's okay. Usually, I don't do much of anything for the first time till I get to know them better. But thanks for the company, see ya!" he goes away leaving you confused, but not empty.
It's been long since you had nice company, and Gojo was like a warm light that went away. You wanted more.
_____
Days later Gojo would come back once or twice every two weeks. He would ask for you and you two would just start talking for hours and hours.
There hasn't been anything intimate yet other than the comfort of each other's company.
However, there was a feeling lingering from the white-haired man. And he couldn't ignore it anymore.
In the house, you were brushing your hair and drinking your favorite tea. You were thinking all about Gojo for a while now, and you were wondering when you were going to finally sleep with him.
You blush a thousand shades of red at the thought of his body over yours. He was so kind and respectful that he'd wait for you. How is he not married yet?
While you are in your little world a voice speaks outside your home.
"(Y/n), Satoru-sama is here to see you," a girl says.
You put away all your items and wait for him to enter.
Coming inside he looked as handsome as usual with his robes.
"Were you busy?" He asks.
"Nope. I'm glad that you're here. I was wondering if you like to do something...different" you said.
"Yeah?" He looked amused.
"Like what?"
"Uhm, well. Like sitting close to me" you pat on the floor to sit next to you.
He chuckles and sits right next to you.
"Is that all?"
"Now...I want you to move your arms" You gestured for him to have it wrapped around your waist. He does what he's told.
"What now?" He had a look of lust slowly coming from his face. His blue eyes never leave your eyes in anticipation.
"I..."
Gojo moved his hand to slowly have you face him. Very close.
"What do you want?" He whispers.
"I wanted to read haiku poems I've been working on!!" You said.
"...Eh?"
Well, that didn't seem to go as planned.
After reading some haikus, Gojo was captivated by your looks. Today you didn't wear makeup as usual. And he liked it that way.
"Feel the earth below. A cool bed beneath the stars. A new beginning" You look over at Gojo and he doesn't look like he was listening.
You pout.
"You could comment you know"
"Ah sorry. I'm just too focused on your beauty right now"
You blush and playfully push him. He laughs.
"Tell me more about your haiku" Gojo gets closer to you.
"Okay...brilliant it blossoms. Struggle and cry out for help. Shattered, but alive" you whisper.
"And then?" Gojo gets closer as his face gets near yours.
You can feel the tension rise.
"Calm waters, calm mind. A world's reflection. Darkness fades into brilliant light"
You look at Gojo now. His blue eyes look at your own as time just stops for a moment.
His lips capture yours in seconds. Gentle kisses that soon turned more into intimacy. Gojo was a gentle lover. He made sure you were comfortable to move to the next step.
He slowly moves his hands to the collar of your robe. Sliding it down he can see how your breasts are.
He continued to kiss you while his hands played with your nipples. Gasping by surprise, Gojo plunged his tongue into you.
A make-out session that soon turned to him on top. He looks at you in admiration and lust.
"You wanna keep going"
You continue to blush as you look away and nod.
Gojo slides his lips to your breast, then even lower.
As soon as he got to your region, he kisses and blows your sensitive clit each time.
You gasp for air. Being consumed by pleasure as he tends to your needs.
Gojo licks and sucks your nub either delight. Feasting however he can. You moan as he moves his hand to cause more friction to your clit.
While he moves a bit faster, he can taste every bit of your juices flowing out. Soon your release came. And he relished it.
Panting and breathing, Gojo regains his posture and reveals his hard-on. You couldn't help but move your hand and rub it gently.
He chuckles.
"You are just so cute," he says. Moving your hand away, he reveals his needy dick ready to plunge deep inside you.
"Can I?" He asks.
After everything they have done so far, he still acts as a gentleman.
But you wanted to be devious for once.
Holding on to his dick, you give his tip a teasing rub. He groans.
"Say please" you whisper in his ear.
He gives you a pouty expression but complies.
"Please"
And with that, you gave him the go. Gojo inserts himself inside you and you feel the pain subside. You only felt pleasure then.
Whimpering and moaning as he thrusts so rhythmically. Giving him pleas to go harder, please.
Every moment was bliss. And every position was something that you needed to feel and last forever.
Gojo Satoru was a natural sex god in this. And now you figured out why every girl in this house favored him so much.
Reaching the end of your climax, you clutch Gojo's forearm. Feeling his muscles and veins as he continues to thrust inside you sensually.
"Sato, I...oh god" you whisper.
"Ha, I feel it too baby... oh fuck"
Soon you hit your climax. Feeling yourself drift away. Gojo gives a couple more thrusts then releases himself all over you.
He pumps the last drops on your chest. Gojo comes to your side and kisses your head and then lips.
"So sweet" he mumbles. You giggle and wrap your arms around him.
"You have experience pleasuring women I see," you said.
He scoffs.
"I grew tired of all that. However, you weren't so bad"
"I'm not so great. Besides, you gave me actual pleasure. Unlike my ex-husband" you mutter.
Gojo looks at you and gives you a living smile.
"I don't usually say this ever. But I think you are my favorite person in this house" he says.
This confuses you.
"How?"
"You're just different than all the other girls. And I'm not saying it in a cliche way. You have dreams and ambitions" he says.
"How did you get all that through us having sex?" You ask.
"You do haiku, you love to write in general. And whenever we talk, you like to talk about your dreams. You're not like the other girls here who just agree and have a quick fuck"
You slap Gojo's arm playfully.
"Hey, some of them are nice. And it's their job you know"
"Haha I know, but you just don't seem to be fit for this job," he says.
Your curiosity started to rise.
"What do you mean"
"I'm saying, I'm going to buy you out of this house. You could live with me and so whatever it is you want to do"
Bells of salvation started to ring in your ears. Your heart started to beat faster as if it couldn't be true.
"You...don't mean that"
"I do. You are an interesting and intelligent girl (y/n). More than you know" he caresses your cheek.
"I don't want anyone else touching what's mine"
And after that, you began living your life with Gojo. It was up and down, but your life started progressing again.
Broken pieces started to form once again.
Notes:
This was longer than expected.
Chapter 31: Chapter 26.4
Notes:
This is a Sukuna short story. However, it's a bit more towards the sad side in a way. Sukuna is still evil and so there will be lots of manipulation and possessiveness going on that makes the reader go a bit insane.
_____Warning: Sexual Content, Slight mention of suicide
Minors Do Not Interact
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
You lost your family in a sea of flames. You were just a girl who watched them burn throughout the household.
You survived by escaping through a secret little tunnel that no one but your parents and you knew about. You thought about so many scenarios of what caused the fire.
And you thought it was your recklessness that killed them. Leaving a candle on causing something to catch on fire. Or putting down one of your toys near the flames that spread.
It all happened so fast while you were asleep. The jolt of your father waking you up in a hurry was what made you act fast.
The fire blocked the entrances trapping everyone. And other doors were jammed for some reason.
Your parents wanted you safe, so they had you go through the hole. They were too big for it themselves but you weren't.
Nothing was left after that. The people in your village who saw the burning house put it out. But unfortunately, nothing was left from the inferno.
Not even your parents.
And now here you are. Being taken care of by an old lady who used to be a nurse back in the day. Once in a while when she's too busy, your nanny who is certainly the boss of a brothel takes care of you when no one else could.
However, you were still in the trauma of losing your family. And you couldn't help but feel like it was all your fault.
_____
At the brothel, your nanny was taking care of you while your caretaker was busy with nursing the sick at the moment. You were eating soup made by one of the girls in the house.
Being in a brothel house didn't have its perks. You were only eighteen and yet men would ask if you were available for service.
But your nanny, being the madam of the house would always tell them that you were off limits.
Whenever it happens you just go to your room and end up in your little world of wonderland. Writing haikus and poems, even practice of brushstroke painting.
The only annoying part of living a new life was going to the doctors for regular checkups. Going through with your mental health, and see where you were.
Every time you talk about your trauma there's a ring in your head. A bell set in motion every time you think about your memories.
The doctor prescribes you with pills and notes for daily meditations. However, who would know how long that would last?
"Finish your soup, young lady, after that we're going to wash up some sheets," your nanny says.
Once you finished, you washed up and went straight to doing chores. It was peaceful until you heard a voice.
From the corner of your eye, you see a creature near the wooden window fence. A small creature you've never seen before.
"Am I going crazy?" You ask yourself.
Putting the sheets down you slowly walk up to it. The creature then goes away. Curious to see more of it, you go outside in the cold night and walk past some people.
"Excuse me, but have you seen a flying creature? It was just here?" You asked.
They looked confused.
"Creature? We haven't seen anything at all. Are you alright miss?"
"Oh, sorry. My mistake"
You walk away but continue to pursue once you see the creature again. Flying to the corner of an alleyway and into the forest.
Running into the forest, you stop once you lose its presence. But then you heard a voice so eerie it made you take a second and step back from proceeding further into the unknown.
"Little girl, are you lost?"
You see a man with tattoos around his body. He was half your size and with much authority for a normal person to fear.
"I'm not little"
"Really?"
"I'm eighteen"
The man scoffs and laughs.
"So that makes you an adult?"
You look around to find the creature again.
"Have you seen a creature that was flying around here somewhere?" You asked.
He smirks and shows you the dead thing crumbling in his hands.
"This creature? It was quite a nuisance to my sight. You can see it?"
You nod. The man just chuckles.
"So it seems you can be able to see cursed spirits"
"Cursed spirits?"
"Spirits that are born from people's negative emotions" he throws the dying spirit on the ground in front of you.
You were bewildered at first but regained posture.
"Then are you that? A cursed spirit?"
"You can say that. Then again you can look at me however you want" he looks at your posture. You were more fascinated than scared.
"What's your name?" You ask.
"You seem to have a lot of questions today brat" he growls. You stay still for an answer, so he sighs and gives it to you.
"Ryoumen Sukuna"
"Sukuna...my name is (y/n)"
Sukuna sighs.
"You don't seem to be afraid of me. Are you not afraid of death? I could be a killer"
"Death seems suitable for me right now. I think?"
This suddenly piques Sukuna's interest.
"And why's that?"
"Well not that I care to hide it, but I think I might be guilty for my family's death. I don't know if it's true or not, but I know I'm guilty of something, but punishment hardly ever suits the victims of a crime"
Sukuna then sits down on a large log and acts to care. He wanted to hear more.
"And what did your family die of?"
"Fire. Burning immolation that almost imitates the sensation of hell" you quiver your words.
Sukuna then smiles. He remembered something so long ago that he couldn't wipe it away from his face.
"Come here" he demands. You didn't waste time and obeyed his command. You didn't care at this point what happened to you.
"Poor thing like you to wander this earth. Without evidence or reasoning of your actions," he says as he strokes your hair.
"I've been going to the doctor every single day of my life already. Being prescribed with medication, anti-depressants"
"Then abandon them. Simple as that" Sukuna says.
"But if I don't, I think I might go insane"
"And what's wrong with that? Either obey its authority or overthrow it"
You hesitate for a moment. Thinking about your family's death over and over again. Pills usually do the trick to help you forget at times but isn't enough.
Taking medicine to get rid of symptoms just to get other ones.
"Then is it bad to pray for better hallucinations?"
Sukuna just sighs and shrugs.
"I don't believe in prayers so do what you want...actually how about I help you forget"
"You'd help me?"
"You have amused me with your deranged thoughts of suffering. However"
Sukuna pulls you to his lap and clutches your face gently.
"You are to obey me and only me. Follow my instructions, if you want to know how to forget your family's death immediately" he says.
This seemed to be a sketchy deal to you, but you couldn't bear to keep on remembering your family dying. Thinking that it was your fault.
The pills only numb the memories, but never take the pain away.
"Okay"
Sukuna grins.
"Good"
_____
Days passed and you seem to have been forgetting your family's death. Sukuna says that change is good if you don't care about it anymore.
He would give you some "therapy" to cure your depressing state. In his home where nobody knew where it was, you sit down on the floor with your legs crossed.
Sukuna was across from you.
"The memory you have is more of a curse than a blessing. So the cost of forgetting is high. However, the past must be paid for"
"What should I do?"
"There are many methods to forget and move on. Find something to do, abandon your old life like nothing happened. Or find a new addicting drug" he says.
You crossed your arms.
"Don't you think I've done that already?"
"True"
Sukuna then looks over to you. Scanning you from head to toe. His morbid thoughts started to kick in.
"(Y/n), come to me"
You obey and walk next to him.
"Have you tried pleasure as a method?"
"Pleasure? I don't think so. I've never done it with anyone really"
Sukuna smirk widens.
"Care for me to show you?"
You thought about it and just nodded.
Sukuna pulls you in as you sit on his thigh. He caresses your face and touches your lips. He touches your lips all the way down to your breasts, hips, and thighs. You blush at his action.
"So soft and sweet. Yet never defiled" Sukuna's arousal was rising almost as his eyes were almost dilated.
"What...what are you doing?"
"Just pay attention"
Sukuna has you on a tight hold as he licks your neck to your shoulder. Removing your top so only your bra was showing.
"Take those off" he demands. You hesitate for a moment but do as he says. Sukuna smirks and caresses your face.
"What an obedient girl" he whispers. You only blush.
Sukuna continues to ravage you, licking your breasts and tweaking your nipples. You whimper from this new sensation.
"Open your legs" he demands. You hesitate on the fact of the foreign feeling, begging for it to come.
Sukuna growls.
"I won't say it again"
Slowly opening your legs, he quickly plunges his fingers inside you.
You gasp at the sudden action. Clutching his back the painful sensation rolled over, and soon pleasure took over.
Sukuna chuckles. He grabs your hair and pulls it lightly to show your neck. Sukuna licks and bites down until blood trickles down on you.
"So delicious" he mumbles.
Sukuna removes his robe and shows his growing member.
"I will feel every inch of your body. You are mine" he growls.
Your face was overwhelmed with how hot it was. You were scared but also excited for what was to come.
Sukuna moves his dick to your clit and gives it a rubbing sensation.
"Tell me what I want to hear" he demands.
You whimper. You needed more. And Sukuna knew that.
"Say it"
"P...please" you whispered.
Sukuna smirks.
"You can talk louder than that" he suddenly starts to slow down and move away from you.
You grit your teeth and hiss.
"I need it...please. I want you"
And with that, he plunges himself inside you. You yelp and wrap yourself around him.
This was a decision you will never take back. You chose this.
After hours of pleasure and euphoria, you lay down beside him in bed. Thinking about whatever you were thinking until you find something odd. Something that Sukuna was holding and staring at.
Something familiar almost.
"What kind of key is that?" You look over the item.
Sukuna stays quiet for a while and then responds.
"A special one"
And that's all he said. But for some reason that key was bothering you.
_____
Never did people mention or comfort you any more about the pressing matter. But people talk when they see you wander off somewhere unknown.
Heading back to take your daily dose of "therapy". Unfortunately, it was always hard for you to listen when your face was on a pillow for most of the sessions.
Inside your doctor's office, you do your daily check-up.
"You look decent enough. I take that you don't need longer supervision?" He asks.
"I'm fine for now doctor. The pills seem to be taking effect" though that was a blatant lie.
The doctor nods.
"Well, it seems you are on the right track then. So I hope you don't mind that we talk about the issue a bit more if you're okay with that?"
You didn't know what he meant by that, but you agreed without further question. The doctor pulls out some files and pictures.
Pictures of your burnt home and items that caused it. You didn't understand why he was showing you this.
"I wanted to go over some things first with you. The fire and what started it"
"Excuse me doctor, but you were supposed to check my well-being. Not play detective" you said.
"Yes, correct. But your caretaker has told me that you had issues with suicidal thoughts. She couldn't stop telling me how it was your fault that you caused it. So I wanted to shine some light to you that it wasn't your fault that caused it"
He flipped through some photos.
"It seems that there was an outage on your lamp that sparked up the place. Things happen (y/n), the unknown is very mysterious and some can be unfortunate. In your case that would be one"
You look at the photos and take a closer look at some of them. Something was off and you didn't like it.
"Pardon doctor, but can I have these documents?"
"Unfortunately I have to keep these records on file"
"A copy then?"
The doctor nods and makes quick copies for you. You quickly take them and go home to your caretaker. It was a dingy home but you at least had a roof over your head.
The files you looked at showed before and after the fire. Looking through the files, you noticed a familiar key that you have seen from Sukuna. That key, you remembered that key was an item used to unlock the back doors to your home.
Was it a coincidence? No. Nobody had a key similar to your family. It was a silver crane key lock.
You couldn't believe that the murderer of your family was someone you had been sleeping with. You were about to freak out.
You quickly went to your caretaker and told her everything about the documents, the fire, the key, and Sukuna. And all you got was a skeptical look.
"I don't know where you go most of your time (y/n), but it's time for you to stop this nonsense. First, you go on about saying it's your fault, and now you think someone killed them? The fire was an unexpected phenomenon. Now stop trying to solve this issue before people start thinking you are crazy. You know what they do to people who start acting crazy, don't you?" She says.
"I'm not going crazy though! I thought you would support me"
"Frankly (y/n), you are scaring me" Soon she walks away leaving you alone with your running thoughts.
You try to calm your mind down. You didn't know how to show evidence to your caretaker that the killer of your parents was out there.
When you collected your thoughts and went back to talk to her again, you overheard a conversation that shattered you inside.
"Never. Never a kind word or gesture of reward for service rendered! This girl, I'm almost at my wits. Don't I deserve a bit of luck? Don't just feel ungrateful for the things that were given to you, I always say. But oh no, not her! She wants to make things difficult for herself. I brought her out of the coals, and now she goes back on her own accord!"
Your eyes watered, your breath hitch.
"Cruel to be kind, that's my technique. But she'll just end up going mad soon enough. And then who will take care of her now? Because it won't be me anymore. Poor thing"
Soon you ended up grabbing your things and running away to your nanny's brothel. The words were too much to bear.
Running to your nanny's care, you knock on her door and tell her all the horrible things that have happened.
Sitting on her couch, you sip the tea that she provided for you. Your nanny walks up and sits on the other side next to you.
"It was so awful. I never want to go back. But I don't want to continue living a normal life when my parent’s killer is on the loose. I feel so sick" you said.
Your nanny didn't know what to say. It was hard for her to say anything with all that you told her.
"I told you before dear. The world can be harsh and cruel...but young women like you need to get out of their fantasy land. The real world is not so 'wonderful'. I don't know how else to help you (y/n). I'm so sorry"
You shake your head.
"It's not your fault"
"I know. But I'm sorry I couldn't do anything to help you out of this delusional state you're in"
You turn confused.
"What?"
"You'll need to grow up and make choices for yourself. But if anything...if you want my advice, then maybe you could perhaps spend some time in 'care'?"
You didn't like how she was talking. You didn't like where this was going at all either.
You quickly get up and shoot at her.
"I'm not crazy! (N/n) you have to believe me! You out of all people should be on my side"
She didn't say a word and just turned her head away from you. No words came out of her mouth after that. You huff and storm off.
"Fine, then I'll do it myself!"
You go to confront the killer.
_____
Sukuna was lying on a pillow while reading scrolls. That is until you came bursting through his doors. He knew you'd come in rage. He knew you would figure out about your parents eventually.
It was expected. He wanted it to happen soon.
Keeping his eyes on the literature he speaks.
"So, you came to get the job done or what?"
"I can't believe that it was you! You...you heartless, ingrate! How many more have succumbed to your torment!"
Sukuna chuckles.
"Not enough. But yours seemed to have been the highlight of my day"
"My family's murderer! Killed in cold blood, by a monster who just kills for fun?! You fucking parasite!"
"Careful with your words. Or else I'll cut that tongue of yours"
"You will be punished for your crimes. You will reap what you sow..."
Sukuna couldn't help but find this hilarious.
"You act like you aren't the sick one. To sleep with your family's murderer. What would they think of their precious daughter now? What makes you any better than me?"
You grab a weapon nearby. Your vision becomes a bit blurry while your breath hitch. You were being consumed by rage.
"You've used me and abused me, but you will not destroy me!"
"On the contrary. You've already done that to yourself"
Sukuna picks up your family's key and a flower. He examines them both.
"A flower's purpose is simple and immutable. Human purpose is fickle because it is a slave to guilt. While those broken memories are unattainable, (y/n). You had your chance to eliminate them. But you kept being persistent"
Sukuna crushes the flower and incinerates it. You take deep breaths and lunge at him. Stabbing him in the chest, there was no progress in his injury.
He grabs your wrist and pulls you away. You land on the floor. He throws the key to you with pity. Quickly you grab it.
"Take the key. I have no use for it anymore. Simply just a mere object for my many collections" he walks away.
"You're just going to set me free? I'm going to try and kill you, you know!" You hiss.
Sukuna chuckles.
"I hardly doubt that you can. I'm letting you live, not because I'm sparing you. Because I want you to remember all that has happened to your family. I want you to remember these hands that had defiled your body. Continue to remember your family's death, as you roam through these lands. Because you will never be the same again. No matter where you go, I will find you from the ends of the earth. Your body and soul are mine"
Sukuna says and disappears from your sight. Tears slowly began to take over your eyes. You started hyperventilating as you realized that this was what he wanted to achieve.
He knew you couldn't kill him, you could try but what was the point? This everlasting torment. Screaming and banging on the floors.
Death seemed like a luxury now. Even if you killed yourself, it would be a great pleasure for Sukuna to bring you back to life and make you remember all that has happened again.
And if you tried to kill yourself again, he'd just revive you again and again. A never-ending cycle.
You can never go home nor live a normal life again. Only a very few find the way, and most of them don't recognize it when they do.
Delusions, too, die hard with memory. Only the savage regard the endurance of pain as the measure of worth. Forgetting pain is convenient, remembering it: agonizing.
But recovering the truth is worth the suffering. But at the cost of an endless suffering. A curse bestowed onto you for eternity, or until the user is dead.
In this case, this was eternity.
Notes:
Reminder: These short stories do not have any connection with the main story itself. This is just fun little stories I wanted to do before heading to the chaos.
Chapter 32: Chapter 26.5
Notes:
Last one I promise. This is more on getting to know your three special grade summons (sorta), not related to the story but I thought of something nice. Enjoy
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Waiting at the field, Quiang, Liu Kang, and Jiang all wait for your arrival. You said you had a surprise for them. Plus it was nice for them to get out once in a while instead of being cooped up in her spirit realm.
"Lady (y/n) is taking a bit too long. What if something happened to her?" Liu Kang mumbles.
"Not likely, if she was, we would know and go after her," Quiang says.
"I hope nee-san brings back sweets for me again," Jiang says.
Liu Kang turns back at Jiang with befuddlement.
"Wait, what? When did you have some?"
"When nee-san came back from a mission with Itadori a week ago. He and her went to a confectionery shop and she brought me some" Jiang happily said.
Liu Kang scoffs.
"You were probably bothering her for some"
"She gave me some too," Quaing says.
"What when?!"
"Same time as Jiang"
"She...probably felt sorry for you"
"No, she didn't"
"You know what, never mind!!"
Jiang chuckles.
"Nii-san your jealousy is showing"
"No, it's—! No, it's not..."
Liu Kang didn't say anything but his jealousy was showing. However, he has too much pride to admit that.
"Nii-san are you okay?"
"I'm fine" even though he wasn't.
And Quiang was the one who saw right through him. And he knew this was about you.
Quaing puts his hand on Liu Kang's shoulder.
"She cares about you. Even when you're here"
Liu Kang just grunts and looks away.
"She asks about your well-being from us"
"Why can't she just ask me herself?"
"Nii-san...you have a way of...coming off a bit strong"
"Huh?"
"You don't like the human sorcerers and you come at least this close to lashing out at anyone to prove your point. It's sometimes hard to deal with you" Quiang says as he puts his index finger and thumb almost close together.
Liu Kang couldn't argue with that. He would sometimes or most likely cause a fight. But humans were different. Sorcerers who would have no idea who they are would kill them without question.
They've been through that road for centuries. Being friends with humans, especially in speaking terms was impossible. If lucky, be close to one.
Quaing, Jiang, and he were born from negative emotions, but they didn't harbor the feeling of blood thirst towards anyone. They were a special case.
Through understanding human language and knowledge from others just by looking, they advanced to the top of the pyramid as spirits.
They were different.
However, they didn't like being near humans. But they also didn't like to cause harm. They just want to live their lives however they want.
And seeing how unfair sorcerers would be to some spirits that just frolic around the woods. It just wasn't fair. But humanity and monsters couldn't be together. How were they sure?
That is until you came along.
A long way from home the three brothers heard their calling from the gods that their duty was to unite with you as your guardians and protect you.
It was stupid. At least to Liu Kang.
Quiang didn't understand it, and Jiang just worried. But once the gods transmitted their souls into a teen girl (you) they were ready to leave. Even if it meant fighting the gods. But that wouldn't have ended with good results.
But as time went by, you showed poise and grace to all creatures. They soon discovered that you weren't an ordinary human, but a spirit as well.
Quiang studied you and learned to accept that maybe there was some hope for humans to get along with spirits. And Jiang was happy to call you sister as a means of being a part of him. You were his family.
Liu Kang still wasn't so sure. He fought for what he stood for. But he started to slowly crack as he saw how beautiful you would make life be, for spirits who just want to live their lives.
But it was never easy.
Hostility was usually his friend. A nature that soon grew towards not only for him anymore, but for you.
The moment you met Ryoumen Sukuna. It became a turning point in your life that they witnessed it shattering. And Liu Kang's voice couldn't reach you. He'd shout with desperation and you would be deaf ears. He didn't reach you until a thousand years later.
Even though he was rough around the edges, he'd fight hell and back for you. He'd die for you.
Because who else would give them love?
The three brothers soon hear footsteps of not one but multiple ones.
Looking out they see you, Yuuji, Megumi, and Kugisaki.
"Oh my, are you all arguing again? Liu Kang, is everything alright? What's the matter?" You ask.
"Out of us three why did she have to ask me that?" Jiang thought.
While in his little world, he didn't realize that you stepped in front and bent down on your knees. You touch his furry head.
"You seem to be alright. But your face says otherwise..."
Liu Kang gently moves your hand away from his head.
"Y-yeah I'm fine. Geez, you don't need to worry about me lady (y/n)"
You rise and just look at Liu Kang with a thought running through your head. You just smile and nod.
"Right"
"What's going on?" Jiang piques his interest.
Smiling, you twirl with a playful flare.
"I brought you all here today for a special mission!"
Everyone didn't know what you were talking about.
"Uh, wait, a mission? Does Gojo-sensei know about this?" Kugisaki says.
You chuckle.
"He does. It's a personal quest. A quest that's an uttermost importance to you three" You look at the three spirits.
"Why is that exactly?" Quaing says.
"After spending my time in the spirit world, I came across an ancient spirit who's in charge of evaluating how you three have been taking care of me so far"
It clicked the moment you said that. The gods would evaluate a guardian they chose to see how well they were taking care of their master.
They do it by seeing how strong they were, how well they would solve problems, and how they cooperate.
A task that shouldn't be taken lightly.
"They gave me the authority to grant you all blessings in my name. So if the quest is completed, you all receive it. Which means you will gain a power-up on all of your techniques" you say.
The two spirits were getting fired up, but Liu Kang had a question in mind.
"Wait if it's just us three, what are they doing here?" He points to Yuuji, Kugisaki, and Megumi.
You shrug.
"I believe in fairness, so I want to give you all a chance to succeed. Besides, this is a good time for you all to get to know each other and get along. Since the second years know you three, I want the first years to be acquainted with you guys too!"
Quaing didn't feel different and just nodded. Jiang got excited to learn and make new friends. But Liu Kang didn't seem to want that.
He interjects.
"Excuse me lady (y/n). But this evaluation test is just for guardians only"
You look confused but don't feel any different.
"Uh-huh"
"S-so involving the hu...sorcerers shouldn't be allowed right?"
You look at Liu Kang and can easily see right through him. You sigh.
"Liu Kang, my goal is to have humans and spirits work together and prosper. That's my ideal. And I want to make it fair for everyone here that we can do it together. Now, you don't have to do this if you don't want to, but it is important that you do. Can you do that for me?"
The test must be done. And he can't say no to you. He bows.
"I will do my best"
You smile.
"Good. Now everyone wait here while I find a secluded area"
While tending to business, everyone was chit-chatting while Liu Kang was in his little world.
"What about you?"
"Huh?" Liu Kang looks up and sees Yuuji looking at him.
"Did you get accustomed to Japanese traditions?"
"Uhm...I guess. I didn't like it at first though. But I didn't have a choice" he says.
"How come?"
Liu Kang grunts.
"Because I had to watch over lady (y/n). Plus the language barrier was different. How would anyone understand Mandarin at the time? Either way, it was just my brothers and I. We learned through watching intellects and copying their scriptures"
Fun fact, China was an influential region to Korea and Japan. Through trade and the arts. However as the years progressed, they wanted to be their own people and found their identity.
"Do you miss it? China I mean. Your home?"
Liu Kang thought long and hard about that.
"To be honest...I don't know. There are times, yes, but I didn't spend much of my time over there. I wish I did. Sometimes I wish I would have stayed. But I don't care if I get alienated over there. Lady (y/n) is my home now" he says.
Yuuji was in awe to hear those words come out of Liu Kang's mouth. This may be the first time he was expressing himself without lashing out at others.
He almost forgot he was talking to someone who wasn't a spirit.
Before Yuuji said anything your voice was heard again.
"Alright everyone, follow me!"
Taking steps deep within the woods. You introduce everyone with an engraving on a large stone rock. It circulated to form an opening.
Ancient scriptures were written with blood that was your doing. The moment you close your eyes and grasp your hands together the air was getting stronger. And soon the ancient texts on the rock glowed and soon opened a portal to the other side.
"Here it is. Destiny's Crossroads"
The first years didn't know what to think of what you just did. Unlike the three spirits, they didn't know what to think of you opening an inter-dimensional world.
"U-uh, what exactly will we find on the other side?" Kugisaki says.
"Nothing bad, trials will await for you in there. You won't die if that's what you're asking"
"How will we get back?" Megumi asks.
"I'll take care of that. Now I'll have you all grouped up in pairs. So Megumi, you'll be with Quiang. Jiang, you'll go with Nobara. And...Liu Kang, you'll go with Yuuji. Is everyone okay with that?"
Everyone agrees while Liu Kang shrugs. He wasn't sure but he promised you that he would do his best to get along. Anything to pass the trial.
"Alright, now it is important to pay attention to these trials as you go, listen to one another, and do your best to get to the finish line!"
Yuuji and Kugisaki yell in excitement. Being pumped up for what they were ready for.
"I'll see you all at the finish. And Yuuji, do not let Sukuna out. Especially in a world very sacred"
Yuuji understands and nods.
You smile and give everyone the go.
_____
As they all cross inside, they realize that they all were split up into different sections of the land.
Yuuji and Liu Kang ended up in a forest. Megumi and Quiang ended up in the mountains. Kugisaki and Jiang were in a swamp.
Each section provided a test to see how well everyone would do together. Normally it was supposed to be just the three brothers in one big area, but you made some modifications.
_____
Quiang and Megumi.
They both walk in the depths of a Rocky Mountain. The terrains were jagged but tolerable to walk on. It was a dusty environment being how hard it was to see and the heat was overlapping them.
But they can see how blue the sky is.
"Let's be careful for any surprise danger around. I'll be sure to have your back" Quaing says.
"Alright"
Through the mountains, they see water in the distance.
"Spring water?"
"Could it be a mirage?" Megumi asks.
"Keep guard"
They continue to walk over to the image.
_____
"So how long have you been looking after (y/n)-nee?" Kugisaki says.
"Since she first came to the temple of Kamigamo Jinja Shrine"
Jiang and Kugisaki were walking through the swamps. However, Jiang was carrying Kugisaki on his back while he treads through the murky waters.
He didn't mind, he insisted. He always liked giving piggybacks to you since he couldn't with his brothers. Funny since he was the little brother of the two.
"Did she ever notice you guys were inside her?"
"No. She was too busy with other things...and Sukuna" There was a hint of sadness in his voice.
Of course, Kugisaki noticed.
"Well I mean, she notices you now. It's not like she meant to ignore you guys"
"Yeah, but it's hard to take care of nee-san when standing on the sidelines. I wish I could've done more for her at the time. But what can you do now"
Well, that didn't sit right with Kugisaki. It almost felt like to her that they were harboring some regret.
"You're the nicest cursed spirit I know, Jiang" she mumbles. Jiang blush in happiness.
"Aha thank you! And you're the nicest sorcerer I know Kugisaki!"
They continue walking through the path leading the way. Unknowing as to something following them in the waters.
_____
Meanwhile with Liu Kang and Yuuji.
"Hurry up, the faster we get through this, the faster we finish" Liu Kang walks ahead of Yuuji. Looking around for any clues or surprise attacks.
"Don't you think we should stick together? This forest is pretty big, we could get lost you know"
Liu Kang scoffs.
"I've experienced being in a forest. Follow my instincts and we'll head out of here quickly"
Yuuji was skeptical. He didn't know much about Liu Kang and so far things were heading to a bad start.
If he had any ideas on where they could spot the path quicker, he would be shut down for it.
"Liu Kang, why don't we climb up the trees and see where the path is leading us? We could probably find something" Yuuji says.
Liu Kang sighs.
"Large trees like these will take forever to get to the top. Well not for me, but you don't seem like you will make it. Just preserve your strength for now"
Yuuji just looks annoyed and continues to follow. Liu Kang didn't know what Yuuji was capable of. Teamwork was not clicking at all.
_____
Back to Megumi and Quaing.
"This place is causing illusions. Something must be interrupting our path" Quaing says.
"Let's scout for anything suspicious. I'll call out if I find anything"
"Very well. Be on guard"
Looking around Quiang sees flowers and soft shrubs sprouting. It was something unusual to see but not foreign for mountains to produce.
While searching Quiang sees someone running past rocky pillars. A little girl.
He knew who she was.
"You there" following the girl, Quaing passed the rigid environment and continued following the girl.
The moment he spots her kneeling on a shrubby grass, he slowly walks up to her but keeps his distance.
The girl was humming and crushing flowers with her bare hands. She drops the pile of flowers and licks the palm of her hands. With that, she picks them up again to produce a paste substance.
This was odd to Quaing.
"You know, you won't be getting anything with what you are doing. You know that right?"
The little girl paused for a moment. She turns around to look at Quaing. She analyzes him until she smiles.
While still cupping the now saliva-crushed flowers, she gets up and walks towards him.
"If you believe you can produce the most beautiful things. Then it's not so hard to achieve it" she shows Quaing the flower in paste.
Almost like paint. Amazing Quaing he couldn't help but stare for so long. The girl's smile fades as it fills with worry.
"But right now, there's no time. You must go back before it's too late" The girl rubs the paste on her hand and puts it on Quaing's forehead.
Quaing backs up and touches the substance. His breath starts to quicken and soon starts to freak out. Suddenly he felt himself get lifted off his feet.
It was Megumi's Nue.
"Quaing-san! Quaing-san are you alright?!"
"Wh...where am I?"
"Back in reality, you were caught in a cursed technique"
Quaing was grateful for Megumi's rescue, but it also made him scowl for the fact that he was caught in something that should not have been a big deal to handle.
“How disgraceful” he thought.
"Thank you. Did you find the source of the illusion?"
Before Megumi said anything, the two felt its energy. Looking at the top of the Rocky Mountains, they spot a giant lizard.
But not just an ordinary one.
"Yeah I did"
_____
Jiang and Kugisaki.
While they were almost out of the swamp, Jiang stopped.
"What's wrong?" Kugisaki asks.
"Kugisaki. We are being followed"
Kugisaki looks around and sees nothing, but no doubt she can feel the energy.
"Yup. No doubt about it"
"I'm going to put you down. Is that okay?" He kindly asks. She nods.
Setting Kugisaki down on the murky water, she pulls out her weapon while Jiang summons his war hammer.
"Wherever you are, you better come out now. No use in hiding!" Kugisaki says.
Silence fills the area until the environment starts shaking. Suddenly a huge tide is made, revealing a centipede-cursed spirit with bulging eyes.
Kugisaki grimace.
"Tch, so gross"
_____
Liu Kang and Yuuji.
Moving along the forest, it didn't seem like they had progress. At this point, they were lost.
"Isn't this the same tree we passed?"
"I don't...look let's just keep going"
"We've been going in circles!"
"Alright then let's find a different route!" Liu Kang aggressively marks a tree.
After walking for hours Yuuji noticed a path. It was a path out of the forest.
"Liu Kang, look at the exit!" Running towards the exit, Liu Kang follows in a hurry.
But after what seemed to be a way out, they were back in the forest.
"Eh, but I was pretty sure?"
"...This is an illusion. We're being watched" Liu Kang looks around and focuses on the cursed energy.
An evil energy lingers on one of the trees. He pulls out his weapon and throws it at one of them. Later the tree warped into a monster.
A half beetle half mosquito cursed spirit.
Liu Kang uses his leaf fan and brings the weapon back from the monster.
"This fucker was the reason for us going in circles"
_____
Back to Megumi and Quiang.
Fire bursts inside the lizard. Causing a massive explosion as guts and innards were incinerated.
What happens was everything was going well, until Quiang got swallowed whole inside the huge bug.
"Quiang!"
Megumi was about to cast his Orochi until flames came out of the lizard's eyes and body.
After the battle is over, a portal of light appears.
"It's the way out," Megumi says.
"Yes. Fushiguro, are you alright?"
"Yeah. But I should be asking you that" he says.
Quiang shakes his head.
"I can regenerate. This was merely a minor opponent. But thank you"
Soon the two head off to the light.
_____
"Nee-san bring it here!"
Kugisaki grabs the centipede's attention as she runs towards Jiang. She ran out of nails for the giant creature.
Turns out she overestimated it. It became a bit bad on her part. But with enough damage taken, it was about to give.
Jiang was grateful for that at least. And now he was going to land the final blow.
Once Kugisaki ran passed Jiang, Jiang's war hammer lit up. As soon as the centipede zoomed straight toward the two, Jiang did a perfect swing and smashed the cursed spirit.
Everything crumbles and breaks just like that. The grounds and barks were shaking, and the muddy floors flew up in the air.
Everything was quiet. And the centipede itself disappeared in thin air.
"So cool Jiang! You one-shot one-killed that thing! You really are a tank!" Kugisaki praises him.
Jiang blushes and laughs.
"Haha really? It's nothing. I couldn't have done it without you Kugisaki-nee. Are you hurt?" He asks.
"Nope!"
Kugisaki clings behind him on his back. A light portal soon shows in their sight.
"I guess that's the exit"
"Let's go!"
_____
"Hold still!" Liu Kang tried to attack the mosquito beetle, but it was too fast.
"Is this thing seriously faster than me? That can't be possible!"
"It probably knows our weakness. Liu Kang let's try working together!"
Liu Kang grunts with frustration as his teeth grit. Blood almost comes seeping from his mouth.
"Just focus on finding an opening, I can handle this!"
"You can't even get to him!"
Liu Kang ignores Yuuji and continues to catch the cursed spirit. It goes on for hours until the creature turns on him.
Its poison needle barely hits Liu Kang as he barely reacts in time.
"Shit..."
On Yuuji's side, he climbs up on a tree without the creature noticing. He jumps off and lands on the flying monster.
Yuuji tries to grab its poison needle to break it off, but the big flies straight through trees. It hits it intentionally making Yuuji fall on the ground.
However, that stunt doesn't damage the spirit.
"Hey, you good?" Liu Kang asks.
Yuuji spits out blood.
"...Liu Kang. We can't work like this. You're a stubborn bastard who can't put his differences with a human like me aside. Why don't you put your fucking pride down and help for once or else we're gonna die!"
"I don't...!" He cuts himself off. Yuuji knew he was right, and Liu Kang, he wasn't going to deny it.
Yuuji knew that Liu Kang hated humans. But not all humans were bad. He had to remind him that to survive. To let go of the disharmony.
"I get that you hate humans. But you aren't living in the past anymore. There's gonna be some people out there that'll help one another, no matter how different they are. I want to help you out Liu Kang, you're my partner. But I can't do that if you're gonna be so damn stubborn. So let's work together and kill this fucking thing!"
Liu Kang sucked his gut. He didn't want to admit it, but Yuuji was right. He wasn't being himself throughout this whole trial because of his ignorant behavior.
He had to listen to him for once.
"Itadori...what do we do?"
Yuuji was surprised to hear Liu Kang's compliance but nonetheless went straight for a plan.
"Give me one of your sickle weapons. Once the mosquito comes at you, blow it back with your fan. And I'll come in with the kill down to its chest"
Liu Kang wasn't going to lie, Yuuji's plan didn't sound dumb for once.
He agreed and gave Yuuji his weapon. Yuuji quickly finds cover while Liu Kang is out in the open.
Liu Kang calms his nerves and gets ready. In a stance, he puts all his energy into his leaf fan.
The mosquito locks on Liu Kang and lunges itself at him. Once it was a close enough distance, Liu Kang blew a heavy wind current at it.
The spirit falters as it pulls back and Yuuji comes in again from above the trees down to its frontal.
The spirit then fades away.
Heaving from exhaustion, Yuuji raises his fists.
"We did it! Liu Kang, that was awesome!" Yuuji lowers his hand in wait for a high five.
Liu Kang hesitates but gives him one.
"Yeah...uh, Itadori. I guess, you didn't suck either" That was his way of saying 'you did a good job too' and Yuuji knew it.
"Haha, I'll take it"
Soon a light portal opens up to them, figuring out that it was the exit, and they both go through it.
_____
The moment Yuuji and Liu Kang entered, they were greeted by everyone waiting for them.
"Welcome back! Congratulations for completing the trial" you said.
Yuuji looks around and notices Gojo here.
"Gojo-sensei, what are you doing here?"
"I didn't wanna miss out on this coronation," he says.
"He just didn't want to be alone" you say.
Gojo pouts.
"You didn't have to expose me like that..."
You take some deep breaths.
"Alright, it's time to reward you all"
Placing your hand on top of each one's head.
Except for Liu Kang.
He noticed for a second that you passed by him, without giving him a second glance. Not even a falter.
"Uh, lady (y/n), I think you may have skipped me. Do I not receive a blessing?"
You look towards Liu Kang, sadness washes over you as you prepare him for the bad news.
"While I have spoken with some of the gods about who these blessings should be upon. This test was about listening and understanding one another. To work as a team and understand what it means to protect others, even if it means sacrifice. It must become one with our souls. A part that...you may have been missing"
Baffled by your statement. Liu Kang couldn't believe what he heard. He understood that he wasn't getting along with Yuuji, but in the end, he did. They made it out alive by finally working together.
So he just couldn't understand why. Was this not a lesson learned?
"But...Itadori and I. We worked together defeating the curse in the end"
"I know. But sadly it was only you who had a hard time complying to work as a team, Liu Kang. Yuuji didn't. I'm so sorry"
It all crashed before his eyes. Realization struck him ever than before. He now knew he messed up big time.
Liu Kang rambles in a sad, frustrated panic.
"Fuck...fuck! Damn it, I should've just done what was told! But I was too fucking stubborn to see or do anything important! I'm going away for a long time, I'm not going to protect lady (y/n), nor see my brothers anymore because I'm so fucking stupid—!"
Quaing goes up to Liu Kang and cuts him off, setting his weapon down with a loud thud. Liu Kang composes himself as he steps back. Looking at Quaing then away.
"The fuck you want" Liu Kang mumbles.
"You need a blessing"
Liu Kang quickly looked back at Quaing like he was crazy.
"Yeah well the ones who were supposed to grant me access for a blessing, just fucked off into the astral realm!" He says.
Quiang looks at Liu Kang as he walks away in sorrow. He kneels to his brother's level and extends his hand.
"A great warrior needs his blessings," he says.
Liu Kang turns back around.
"What..."
Yuuji then joins in.
"I believe in second chances. We finally got to work together after all"
Jiang joins either of the two.
"Nii-san, everyone has their rough days...erm, well you're a special case. But you got heart!"
Kugisaki and Megumi soon joined in.
"I can live without. I'll get strong in my own way" Megumi says.
"Just because I don't want to be the only one left out. But I guess I don't mind. Just stop freaking out, you're embarrassing yourself" Kugisaki mumbles.
Liu Kang couldn't believe his eyes. Everyone was willing to give up their blessings for him. You and Gojo smile at the scene before you.
Liu Kang shakes his head.
"Everyone...no, no you guys can't. You all got yours for a reason. And the blessing you received, giving them to me wouldn't mean squat. I didn't earn it"
"It is the nature of a thing that matters. Not its form" Quiang says.
Liu Kang hesitated for a moment until you interrupted.
"Wait...I think it's fair to say that we can all learn from mistakes. Especially when someone is accepting faith as it is. But everyone sacrificing their blessings for one person warms my heart to no end"
Everyone steps aside as you walk up to Liu Kang.
"I'm not going to pretend that you didn't make a mess of things," you said.
"Ah, er...yeah"
"You have a lot of work to do. But in the end, you were able to show some compliance with working with others. You needed a push, but no matter, you did it"
You slowly pull your hands out to him.
"The gods may not agree, but you are my guardian. And I believe you are capable of change. This isn't a rich blessing bestowed from me and the gods altogether. But this blessing is one blessing granted by me and me alone. And I give authority of it"
Liu Kang just stood silent. He just wasn't sure.
"Will you let me bless you, Liu Kang? Please say yes"
"...alright"
He extends his hands to yours. Closing his eyes as his furry forehead touches yours.
Light begins to glow around them. Everyone looks in awe.
"May you strike true. May you be wielded with wisdom. And may you be brought back to paradise, when the job is done"
After the ceremony was done, you spit on Liu Kang's forehead for good luck. Kugisaki, Yuuji, and Jiang laugh.
"Was...was that part of the ceremony?" Liu Kang asks. You smile.
"...nope!" Walking away you create a portal back to the human world.
Before Liu Kang was about to protest Quiang and Jiang put their hands on his shoulders.
"Let us return home," Quiang says.
Liu Kang just smiles and nods at them both as they walk together, brother in arms.
Notes:
So we are pretty much at the end of these short stories, we’ll be heading to the Shibuya arc next chapter, so you guys can cry now.
Chapter 33: Chapter 27
Notes:
You guys been waiting for this?
_____So let me give you guys a heads up that you won’t be seen here in this chapter, but stick around because you will be soon.
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
October 31, 2018, 7:00p.m
On this day and time, Shibuya was dark and lifeless at the moment. A "curtain" with a radius of about 400 meters was dropped around the metropolis.
8:14 p.m (20:14) Shibuya, Tokyo
At the Shibuya mark city, the entrance of the gourmet street, outside the "curtain."
"No one at all? Not even at the intersection in front of the station? This is Shibuya on Halloween. Something seems to have happened there" Kugisaki says.
In this group, there was Kugisaki, Maki, head of the Zen'in clan Naobito, and special grade Liu Kang.
"Everyone is fleeing to the edge of the "curtain." And they are all shouting "Bring Satoru Gojo here"
Naobito huffs.
"Non-sorcerers couldn't possibly know him. Someone must have told them to say it. Can't we break the "curtain"?"
Liu Kang scoffs.
"You humans, always thinking how easy it can be"
Naobito glares at the spirit.
"We're having trouble right now. Both sides of the "curtain" don't deny the access of sorcerers. So we can't break through by force. It would be quicker to find the curse user who dropped the "curtain" and deal with him directly"
"So, that's what you want us to handle?" Maki asks.
"No, please wait here for now"
Maki was confused.
"Lady (y/n) is trying to uncover who put on this "curtain." So right now at the moment, she's safe around a barrier she put around herself so she wouldn't be found. Give her some time" Liu Kang says.
"Ha, I don't think having a cursed spirit is necessary for extra support. They just become excess baggage" Naobito says.
This irks Liu Kang.
"You should look in the mirror old man. Besides I didn't agree to help you out, but my lady insisted. I will never go back on her words so be grateful my brothers and I are even doing this"
"Why did she summon you all?" Kugisaki asks.
"We don't know. She wouldn't tell us other than to support you all. However, this may have been out of her instincts, because she wasn't so sure either. Other than the throbbing pain she's been feeling for quite some time in her head" he says.
"Do you think it means anything?" Maki asks.
"I think she's trying to figure that out," Liu Kang said with worry.
_____
On the other side outside the "curtain." JR Shibuya station south exit.
In this group trio was Panda, Atsuya Kusakabe, and special grade Jiang.
"Not only using a high-intensity barrier technique, they even named Satoru Gojo. These are the same people who attacked at the Goodwill event. The higher-ups decided to minimize the damage and send Satoru Gojo to quell the turmoil in Shibuya alone" Atsuya says.
"We, Nanami, the old man of the Zenin family, and Mei Mei all have to wait outside the "curtain," and are responsible for dealing with those who escaped from Gojo Satoru. Once you're in the "curtain," you can't contact anyone"
"Minimizing the damage" applies only to sorcerers, right?" Panda asks.
"Wait, so would that mean that it wouldn't matter if ordinary people get hurt?" Jiang jumps in.
Atsuya grunts.
"Just leave it. Unlike last year's Christmas event, it's already happened. I also think this approach is the most prudent. Besides, I just went to the inside of the "curtain," it's quite peaceful there. Although those people are panicking"
Atsuya continued explaining the situation until Jiang and Panda got the idea.
"Jiang is it? So you're another summon from (y/n)?" Panda says.
"Oh yeah! I'm the little brother in the family. My two big brothers are out with your other friends somewhere outside. We're just here to give you guys support! At least that's what Nee-chan asked us to do. So I'll give it my all!" He says raising his fist.
"Despite the size, you really are the little brother," Atsuya says.
_____
"Didn't you guys see that?! The crowd at the intersection were all sucked in. They were all sucked into the station! You should know this without thinking, you bunch of low-educated people!"
"Then use your education to get us out of here!"
And then, a body sprouts inside the barrier moving the two men aside.
"...ah, sorry"
8:31p.m (20:31) Gojo Satoru appears
_____
20:30 Aoyama Cemetery
"They're making Gojo-sensei do this alone?! I understand the logic, but there has to be something we can do, too! Be his backup or something!"
Itadori was cut off when Mei's little brother put her weapon on his arms.
"Goodness you are a chatty child, are you?" Quiang says.
Now in this group, there was Mei Mei, her brother Ui Ui, Itadori, and special grade Quiang.
Reminder, Itadori nor Mei Mei has ever met any of your summons before other than Maki, Inumaki, and Panda.
So when they all first caught eye, there was a hostile situation radiating in the air. Luckily Quiang explained the reasoning and now they all wait together as a group.
"That's why we're heading to Shibuya now," Mei says.
"Oh, we are?"
"Give it back," Ui says taking the weapon.
"Huh?"
"Forcing nee-sama to be his backup...Gojo Satoru must think he's some big shot"
"You shouldn't treat him like some ordinary guy"
"You're not like ordinary women yourself, nee-sama"
"Ah, Ui Ui! You truly are adorable!"
Ui and Mei exchanged words while Itadori and Quiang were just standing like they weren't visible to them.
"There you go saying stuff you don't believe again. What you love isn't family, but work relations treated as family relations, right?" Ui says.
"You do get it. I love that part of you"
Quiang clears his throat.
"Excuse me. But I think we have some important matters to attend to"
"Oh my, you’re right! Let's hurry up and go"
Mei pulls out her phone.
"Hello, Mei Mei here. Oh...? Itadori-kun, Quiang-san, change in destination. Another veil like the one over Shibuya was lowered over Meiji Shrine Station. We're heading to that one, and we're running so keep up"
"Right!"
"Yes"
_____
At the Meiji station.
One of the assistant supervisors explained the situation of the veil that was located in the station.
"Well, we can't say for certain yet, but..."
"That's fine. Say it" Mei says.
"There are transfigured humans between the barriers"
Itadori flinches at this information.
"Do you know what it is?" Quiang asks him.
"Yeah. I do"
While the crowd flies around the underground station the group stands at the entrance.
"What are you two doing?! We have to hurry!"
"Shh! Nee-sama is currently sharing the crows' perception. It's a process that takes concentration, so be quiet" Ui says.
"I don't mind if you talk," Mei says.
"She says it's fine," Itadori says.
"Nee-sama!"
After what took a moment of silence, Mei opened her eyes.
"Okay, I think I get it now. Itadori-kun, Quiang-san, which would you two prefer? Killing lots of weak transfigured humans, or exorcising one powerful cursed spirit? Because knowing you Itadori-kun, it's probably the latter"
Mei types up the map on her phone and reveals it to the two.
"This is a map of the underground station. The transfigured humans are mulling about and attacking normal people here, on level B4"
Mei Mei goes about the likeliness of cursed spirits eradicating the innocents from each level.
"I'm not familiar with these paths that this tunnel holds but I am quick to learn as I go," Quiang says.
"Will you be taking on the multiple cursed spirits then?" Mei asks.
"I do not care who I fight, as long as I am doing my job by giving you all support"
"Very well then. Itadori-kun?" Mei looks at Itadori for a response.
"He's there, right? Right below us? That curse"
"Maybe? My crows all got killed before they could confirm seeing Patchface"
Quiang looked confused.
"Patchface?"
"Though the presence of transfigured humans would suggest that's likely. I'm not so sure about dividing up our forces, but if we keep wasting time, all the common people on B4 will be wiped out"
Mei shows a clear grid of the station.
"The two of us will take exit 7 directly to B4 and rescue the civilians. If it gets too dangerous, you two head down there as well. Though, if I can be greedy, I hope that by the time we reunite, the veil will be lifted, the civilians will be freed, and we'll know what our opponent on B5 is after"
Everyone splits up with Mei and Ui going toward B4. Quaing sticks with Itadori as he follows.
"Your aura has changed" Quiang breaks the silence.
"Yeah?"
"When there was a mention of transfigured humans, your spirit raged with fire within. Did you have some history with this patchfaced spirit?"
Itadori was impassive as he continued to walk down the tunnel with Quiang behind.
"Yeah, I did. He's the worst and I won't ever let him get away this time...I won't lose anymore"
Quaing didn't seem to change the way he looked at Itadori but he was slightly impressed by his confidence.
"Threats, promises, and good intentions don't amount to action. So let's hope you are more than you say you are"
Itadori nods.
21:03 Tokyo Metro, Meiji Shrine Station, B2F
At the bottom of the stairs, Itadori and Quiang were introduced to a gruesome sight. A cursed spirit munching on a person from the top of the head.
The spirit's vision gazed up on the two.
"Y-you're j-juchu...j-juchu...juju...jujutsu sorcerers, right?" It said.
"A seeming sight," Quaing says.
"Jujutsu sorcerers right? Right? I'm clever"
"The patchfaced cursed spirit is here, right? Where is he?" Itadori asks.
"Patch...face? Patchface?"
"The one with stitches all over his face"
"Ngh, don't insult me! I know that much! I'm clever!"
This annoyed Quaing.
"Just say the word and I can end this immediately. This fool doesn't seem to have intentions of telling us anything"
"Shut up I can hear you! I'm clever! Patchface...Mahito is below. I'm here protecting the veil" the spirit says.
"Mahito..."
"Itadori, over there" Quaing points to a sealed nail object that must've been triggering the veil.
"What do you want to do?" Quaing waits for an answer on his Itadori's behalf.
"If I'm gonna grow stronger, then let me handle this" Itadori says.
Quaing nods as he puts himself on standby. He will only jump in if things get too serious.
"Mahito's sorcery is bad. The humans he transfigures lose their flavor. I'm clever, so I can tell the difference—!" Itadori the spirit off, punching him through the wall.
"All of you need to stop underestimating humans..."
After the fight between Itadori and the grasshopper spirit, Itadori breaks the object that lifts the veil.
"It seems there was a gap in your strengths that no trick could overcome. You have proven yourself to be quite strong" Quiang says.
Itadori kneels and prays for the dead innocent.
Reuniting once again with Mei and Ui they all run towards the underground.
"Impressive, you two," Mei says.
"It was mostly Itadori. I had no partake in it" Quaing says.
"Wait what was?"
"Well then, I thought you would struggle a bit more Itadori. You're practically a first-grade already. I haven't seen anyone get this far without a technique since Kusakabe"
"It wasn't Patchface. If I'd been fighting him, it wouldn't have gone easily" Itadori says.
"Nee-sama is praising you! Just accept it!" Ui butts in.
"Thank you! I'm honored!"
As you all make it down to the floor, it is all empty.
"I guess we're too late," Mei says.
"Hey, you over there! Are you okay? Where are the others" Itadori runs towards a girl staring off into space.
"Miss are you okay—"
"Everyone turned into monsters. I took the train...only me" the poor woman started transfiguring.
"He said the train was full, so I wasn't needed..."
She fell to the floor.
"That guy was just here. Damn it...everyone took the train...Gojo-sensei!"
"We must hurry to the lower grounds," Quiang says.
____
As the group runs towards the underground, Itadori stops for a moment.
"What's wrong?" Mei asks.
"No, something's in ears..."
"Can you hear me, Itadori Yuuji?" It was Mechamaru's voice.
"We don't have time. I'll only say it once, so listen carefully. Gojo Satoru...has been sealed"
Notes:
I can’t believe the audacity of chapter 261, in my opinion, y’all can’t let the man rest like that.
Chapter 34: Chapter 28
Notes:
“Look at her face, it’s filled with doubt, which turned into conviction. What a cruel answer it turned out to be”
Chapter Text
Question: What is Gojo Satoru to you?
"My teacher? If he hadn't been there I would probably have been executed by now. And also..."
"He kind of saved me, just kind of. And I don't think I'm the only one who feels this way..."
"To be honest, I don't know him very well. But I can guarantee he's..."
"An idiot"
"An idiot"
"Salmon"
"But..."
"Frivolous, individualistic"
"Gojo Satoru is a good-for-nothing white-haired bastard! He hurt lady (y/n) which I will never forgive"
"Eh? But he apologized and took her to the medic brother"
"Doesn't matter, just cause he saved her doesn't excuse his actions. Tch, and he had the gall to tell her he loves her? Ridiculous"
"What about you brother?" Jiang turns to Quaing.
"...Gojo Satoru is a strange, childish, cocky man. Nevertheless, a strong man with ambition. That day that I sparred with him for just a moment, he had such a strong and willful energy. I hope that one day I can spar with him again"
"Do you need me to tell you?"
"The strongest!"
The camera records your backside.
"Satoru...Satoru is..."
you turn around and give the most heartwarming smile.
"A wonderful gift given to me"
_____
In the underground tunnel.
"This is an unexpected turn?" Quiang breaks the silence.
"We're talking about Gojo Satoru here. What proof do you have for me to believe you?" Mei asks.
"Sorry, but I have nothing. If I must provide something, it's the very fact that I'm here. I was killed on October 19th by a special grade cursed spirit called Mahito. What's here is no more than the insurance I left when I was still alive" Mechamaru continues.
"I only managed to sneak these puppets into three locations ahead of time. Itadori Yuuji was the jujutsu high sorcerer. Least likely to be leaking any information. And Mei Mei, given the situation, I'm now certain you're in the clear, too"
"Why?" She asks.
"Someone as skilled at intelligence gathering as you was dispatched here to Meiji Shrine Station instead of acting in the shadows at Shibuya. Itadori wasn't even a part of jujutsu society until several months ago either"
"Hey, that might have been so I'd have an excuse to refuse aiding them. Besides, I'm the one who has kept stopping Itadori-kun from heading straight to Shibuya all this time. I would've asked Quiang to do it but that almost sounds like asking a favor, and I hate to pay back favors"
Quiang tilts his head confused.
"Then why is a curse user currently heading your way to eliminate you two?"
Turning around where the darkness sheds, Quaing can just sense the presence from a mile away.
Mei smirks.
"One, two...two huh? Itadori-kun, which is stronger, these two or the cursed spirit you fought earlier?"
"They're probably stronger than that grasshopper. Mister Quiang, would you be able to beat that?"
"It depends. However, I think I can manage this"
"The cursed spirit Itadori fought was able to speak human language, so it was a semi-first grade or higher at least...and things like that are crawling out of the woodwork? I wonder where they've been hiding and what they've been up to until now"
Mei pulls out her phone and dials someone.
"Let's ignore the curse users and move onward. We need to confirm Gojo-kun's status first"
Quiang hums curiously.
"Don't. The situation in Shibuya has already changed. Their barrier techniques are several degrees better than ours" Mechamaru says.
"Lady (y/n) is taking care of one barrier to release the innocents out of the city. However, I'm not sure how long it will take before she heads off to the next" Quaing says.
"Where is she right now?" Mechamaru says.
"She's hidden within a barrier she created around her. No one can find her nor get her out"
"Is that safe?" He asks.
"She refused to have us spot for her. She cares only for everyone else's safety. That's why she sent my brothers and me to help you all"
This warmed Itadori's heart from just hearing that but nervous at the same time since you were alone. Once again you put everyone else before you. Which is nothing new for someone who's a deity of light.
"You are her guardians, correct?" Mei asks.
Quaing nods.
"How does that make you feel?"
"She's stronger than you think"
"But are you worried?"
"No. I will never be" There was a bit of worry in his voice.
Quaing didn't say anything more. Mei moves on.
"So what's the situation right now?"
"There are currently four veils lowered over Shibuya. A: the veil trapping common people inside. B: the veil trapping Gojo Satoru inside. C: the veil keeping sorcerers from entering, and D: another veil like A to keep common people trapped inside"
"And you're saying the area further down these tracks is blocked by C," Mei says.
"That's right. The sorcerers on standby are already inside the veil, right?" And you can't use cell phones inside the veil"
"Looks like that's not all, either. I can't get a hold of the assistant supervisors who are supposed to be outside the veils" Mei checks her phone and contacts them, but none respond.
"Please just follow my directions. This insurance of mine won't last long. Please"
"...Mei-san" Yuuji looks towards Mei.
"Alright, tell us"
Yuuji puts the mechamaru piece in his ears.
"Itadori, Quaing, return to Meiji Shrine Station and head to Shibuya from the surface. Tell all the sorcerers there about Gojo being sealed. Get them to share our goal of recovering Gojo"
"Understood I will continue to assist Itadori"
"Mei Mei, create an opportunity for Itadori and Quaing to escape. After defeating the curse users, I'd like you to follow this track, for starters. But I don't know what moves the enemy will make"
Mei uncovers her weapon.
"So adapt and respond. By the way, they haven't frozen your bank account yet, have they?"
"Huh?"
Ui just chuckles.
"I will check up on lady (y/n) telepathically to know if she is okay. If she breaks at least one of the barriers she'll let us know"
"Alright. But if Gojo Satoru and (l/n) (y/n) disappear, both jujutsu and human society will be upended"
"Quiet, there's still time," Quiang says.
"...you may be right. I'm sorry, but please stake your lives on this"
Quaing pulls his weapon on his shoulders. Looking impatient. He was slowly starting to get a bit worried for your well-being.
"Hey, what about me?" Ui asks.
"Follow whichever one you prefer"
"Okay, nee-sama it is!" Ui gives a thumbs up.
Hearing footsteps from the distance, two curse users were in sight.
"Everyone, they're here"
A man and a dog follow up the tunnel.
"You're Mei Mei right?" The user says.
"Go ahead and do as you please. I'll match you"
"Thanks!"
Yuuji and Quiang end up leaving the tunnel and up to the open air of the city.
_____
21:22 Somewhere on the outskirts of Shibuya
It was quiet and dark. Your eyes are closed in focus with a barrier around you. Your aura was radiating around you. A strong aura you had that nobody dared touch. This was how it looked in the human world.
In the spirit world.
"Okay, where are you so I can break you" You were walking around the veil to find the source of its hold.
"No objects. Nothing" That's when you sensed a presence responsible for the veil.
However, it was inside the veil. You weren't too sure if you would be able to get out if you went inside. But if you don't crush the source of the veils entrapping the innocence, people can die.
It took a moment for you to think this through. You sigh in frustration with your decisions. You've never once decided in your life. But nobody was going to hold your hand forever to make it for you.
"...okay, I think I get it now" Before going back to the human world the pang in your head comes back.
You grunt and wince from the throbbing pain.
"Why are you doing this? I don't understand!"
As the ringing and whispers continue to injure your head, it suddenly goes dead silent. It all falls deaf ears once you realize that the pain is now gone.
Opening your eyes again, you were now in a completely different setting. Not of this world.
"It seems that (l/n) (y/n) has finally made it to her destination" a voice calls out.
Turning around you see a woman. She wasn't human but she wasn't a spirit either.
She wore a beautiful robe as she held a biwa and sat on a white stone dragon. Her face was pure and calm like she was born from enlightenment.
"Who are you?"
"I'm the goddess of wisdom, Benzaiten"
You were even more confused now than ever.
"I don't...wait, I was supposed to be here?"
"Well I was supposed to meet with you a thousand years ago, but it seems there were...obstacles that were getting in the way"
You didn't want to be reminded of the years of mistakes you've made.
"Why...I'm sorry, but why would a goddess want to see me?"
Benzaiten chuckles.
"Well let me remind you, you are the goddess of immeasurable light. It's only appropriate for another goddess to pay a visit" she smiles.
Looking deep into her eyes, something was wrong. You didn't trust that this was for no reason. No god or goddess from ancient times would just pop out of nowhere.
"No. You brought me here for a reason. Just say it now or else I'm leaving"
"Without a warning to all that you and the humans are fighting for?"
This brought your attention.
"What exactly is going to happen?"
Benzaiten only smiles.
You stay in your lane carefully and do not go over boundaries. Deities may look kind, but they can also be selfish in their way.
"I'm trying to seek the one responsible for putting a veil on Shibuya"
"You know that person is in Shibuya"
Not what I meant... you thought.
"I can see within your deepest thoughts that the questions you have for me are not who is responsible for the veil, but seek what all who search seek: to know how this will all end"
You furrow your brow in confusion. Her cockiness didn't help either.
"Do you mind telling me exactly what you are trying to say? I don't think I have time for riddles at the moment"
"Many people will die (l/n). And it is an event that you have foreseen many years ago" she says.
You were speechless and did not understand.
"But what kind of event? Who exactly will cause it?"
Benzaiten chuckles as she sways around you.
"My dear, you should have known by now"
"Then I'll subvert that destiny then!"
"There is no destiny silly girl. There is no grand design but only the choices you make. Take for example Ryoumen Sukuna. His choices are so predictable that it merely makes us gods prescient" she says as she tunes her biwa.
"But the first time I met Sukuna he didn't kill me, he even accepted that I teach him about love. Those rare moments we had together...he did not show hate to me before"
The goddess was not convinced by your words. It almost makes her laugh to see how you were played right into evil's hands.
"You are right about that. But his "love" for you displayed such manipulation and corruption, that it is no surprise that your mind became so fogged up and is all over the place because of him. Evil cannot coexist nor agree with the good, but you were too blind and couldn't let him go, because he thirsted more for your power...and because he's an evil god"
"I understand that I won't tolerate the mistakes I made long ago. I just thought I would change him. Even just a little. He shows his love in a certain manner of his own"
Benzaiten clicks her tongue and pouts out of mockery.
"Should I bring him a crown then? This so-called "love" didn't make you see that he still slays humans and spirits, but with you around he will be anguished about it? Listen very carefully (l/n) (y/n), you are the sum of your choices, nothing more. And because your choices never change, you will soon learn that one of your guardians will be facing death, jujutsu higher-ups will tend to seal you forever, and Sukuna will do what he does best"
You didn't know what to say. You didn't believe that this is all binding. Just because it's written doesn't mean it will continue to be true, right?
Benzaiten continues.
"The sky will burn, the curtains fall. As the era of bloodshed and terror is nigh. The chill darkness and light will bare its fangs. The time of madness and the time of contempt"
"Those words, I heard them before. Those words..." You look in thought as you still try to figure out what it means.
Benzaiten sighs and shakes her head.
"Again after all this time, you seem to be missing the point. No matter, it is a common mistake. Perhaps you will need a visual of what it all means soon enough"
The pain lingering in your head means something. Something was coming.
You decide for yourself. And this time you are not running anymore.
"What if fate can be changed?"
"There's no such thing—"
"Fate only binds you if you let it. You do what is necessary. Not because it is written" you said.
Benzaiten didn't say a word.
"I have to go, there's no time" You turn around and walk. Benzaiten smiles gently at you as she sees you go.
"I enjoyed your journey (l/n). Pity it has to end so soon" She suddenly starts to lightly laugh while you remain impassive.
There was no use for you staying in a goddess's domain any longer. It was overbearing enough.
With all the training you had with everyone over time. You learned a lot about your techniques more than before. You weren't going to run again. Not when people's lives are at stake. You weren't going to let things be anymore.
You were going to take action as the deity you are in your way. And not let anyone tell you what to do or have them make decisions for you anymore.
Coming back to the real world, you open your eyes and go straight to the barrier. You touch it and focus all your energy on the source.
"Come on...find it"
After a moment passes by you finally figure out who the cause of it all was.
"It's you...I'm coming after you" you plunge yourself in the barrier.
You were now inside Shibuya, and there was no getting out of it now.
Chapter 35: Chapter 29
Chapter Text
21:22 Shibuya
"Look at this..."
You walk and see so many transfigured humans standing around and chasing innocent people.
You were in awe to see so many run freely around the district. With your staff, you freeze and burn the ones hurting the civilians.
"Go, find a safe place for cover!" They thank you and run away.
Looking at the burnt transfigured creature it cries out.
"C-call...sister"
You look at it with sadness in your eyes. These used to be humans.
You clasp your hands together and close your eyes to pray.
"I'm sorry. Go forth from this suffering to the light"
Once you were done, you touch the morphed corpse and it disappears in the shed of light. You move forward.
_____
"True...even accounting for those trapped inside the station the crowd density was low"
"Aah, I hope we finally get some action, and hopefully see my big brothers again," Jiang says.
_____
On the other side of Shibuya, Naobito drinks beer while everyone else is also on standby. However, this disgusts everyone.
"So the transfigured humans were lying in wait inside the buildings, and now they've started attacking non-sorcerers, huh?"
"Don't say all that while drinking beer you fucking drunk" Liu Kang mumbles. He gets up and prepares his weapons.
"So are we doing this or not?"
_____
"That's why we've stopped standing by and started to act. There wasn't much else we could do" Nanami removes his jacket.
"Our response is falling too far behind. But my biggest concern is..."
"The veil—"
"The veil keeping sorcerers out that lowered at the same time, right? It's been some time since Gojo-sensei arrived at the site. Why did they choose now, of all times?" Megumi asks.
"Either something has happened inside or they needed to wait for this moment as part of their strategy. All I can say for certain is that these aren't the types to face us without a plan. I'll focus on the enemies who lowered the veils. You two, please rescue all the common people you can"
And with that, everyone from each side slips right into the veil.
All three teams enter simultaneously
_____
Outside of Shibuya.
Ijichi types in his phone while answering another supervisor.
"Yes. Right. Once you've confirmed the situation, please exit the veil again, Nitta-san. With the signal blocked inside, we'll constantly need someone on the outside. I would like you to take on that role. We'll do whatever it takes to establish a communication network using just the assistant supervisors"
While a couple of minutes pass by, Ijichi suddenly gets stabbed in the chest again and again.
Ijichi falls to the floor while being stomped on.
"Man, bullying the weak is the best job for me! This is what you guys want, right?" The blonde sorcerer with his odd-looking sword turns around to meet eye-to-eye with two sorcerers.
"Yes. Please continue hunting down all the humans in suits outside the veil" a person with white hair says.
"Don't mess this up or I'll grind you with my teeth"
"Ah, so scary~ but okay! And I can go inside once I'm finished, right?"
The white-haired sorcerer didn't say a word but smiled.
_____
In the station, Mahito crushes the Mechamaru surveillance camera.
"The sorcerers are going to come here in force now. Worst case they could be reporting it to the light deity. She'll be here in a flash" Mahito says.
"Not to worry, I already thought ahead and gave her a route to throw her off. She'll probably notice soon enough, but that will give us some time so I'll stay behind. What about the rest of you?"
"I'm getting revenge for my younger brothers, and killing Itadori Yuuji and Kugasaki Nobara. Then I'll go get the rest of my brothers from where they're being kept in jujutsu high" Choso says.
"I don't care about this Kugisaki, but you can't kill Itadori. We're turning him into Sukuna and bringing the deity to him" Jogo says.
"Not my problem"
Mahito steps in before the two get at it.
"Jogo, calm down. Honestly, I think I want to kill Itadori, too!"
"Mahito! What are you—"
"From what I could tell after seeing Gojo Satoru in person, now that he's sealed away, the sorcerers and cursed spirits are evenly matched. If Sukuna is resurrected, we'll have a huge advantage, and victory is ours, right?"
Geto smiles.
"Well, that's true. However, there is (l/n) (y/n) that needs to be taken care of. So I wouldn't say it would be an even match"
"She's just another obstacle to get by. Once we grab her then everything is in our favor. That also means we're perfectly capable of winning with the forces we have now, right? So let's kill Itadori, it'll be fine! Even if we lose Sukuna or (l/n), we can still win"
"Are you serious?" Jogo asks.
"As serious as can be"
_____
21:27 Between Meiji Shrine and Shibuya Stations
Yuuji and Quiang run outside the stations.
"Itadori, good news!"
"Huh?"
"They can't move Gojo from where he was sealed on floor B5"
"Seriously?"
"Because he's Gojo Satoru"
Yuuji laughs.
"Makes sense!"
Mechamaru explains a plan to encircle the sorcerers in the subway lines.
Once Yuuji and Quaing both head inside the veil, many transfigured humans are everywhere chasing after humans.
Yuuji punches one bringing the attention of another transfigured creature.
Quaing pulls out his flame staff and strikes the oncoming monsters, burning them to the ground.
A large one comes at them both. As the tag team, they are they both strike and Quaing's final blow cuts it in half with a wheel of fire.
Once they both made it up to their destination; the top of a high building. Yuuji huffs in the air and yells out for Nanami's attention about Gojo's entrapment.
However, Quaing wondered if this approach was a good idea.
"Nanamin! Nanamin are you here?! Nanamin! Gojo-sensei! Has been sealed!"
Once Yuuji yelled out the news, everyone finally knew about it. Even you.
After hearing this, you continued to hold a strong ground and kept moving forward. There will be a way to get him back.
But for now, you had to find him.
Back to Yuuji.
"Nanamin! Na-na-min! Na-na-min! Na-na-min!"
"Hey. Hey!"
"Na-na—!" Megumi hits Yuuji in the head.
Everyone settles down somewhere private. Quaing introduces himself quickly to the new acquaintance and gets straight to business.
"Geto-san did? To be more precise, the thing that's living within Geto Suguru. The inside of Shibuya Station is currently a real Pandemonium. It's full of those special grades, the cursed spirits they brought with them the curse users tied to Geto as well as transfigured humans and normal people"
"So it seems that this Geto person is the cause of all this?"
"Most likely"
"I will notify lady (y/n) about this then—!"
Quaing startled himself for a quick second.
"What's wrong?" Nanami asks.
"Lady (y/n)...I can feel her"
"Is that a bad thing?" Yuuji asks.
"She didn't tell us she was entering now," he says.
"Can you get a hold of her?" Nanami asks.
"Yes, I can, let me quickly do so to figure out what's happening. Excuse me"
Quiang disengages with the group to contact you. All while everyone else talks about the Gojo situation.
Quaing focuses his energy telepathically to talk to you.
"Lady (y/n), can you hear me?"
"...Quaing?"
He sighs in relief.
"Lady (y/n), what are you doing?"
"I'm finding the one responsible for the veil and take him down"
"Lady (y/n) the person behind it is..."
"I know who it is now"
"Then don't do this alone. Please, let me, Liu Kang, Jiang, or anyone assist you"
"Continue helping the sorcerers you are grouped with. I can handle this on my own, I will call you when the time is necessary"
"Didn't Gojo-san say that you didn't have to do this alone anymore?"
"Yes, but I need to take responsibility for once too. Everyone is fighting for their lives. For people...for me"
"That's true but..."
"After all the training we've been through? Please do as I say Quaing"
"...yes"
And with that, the communication cuts off.
"Dammit"
Quiang regroups with everyone.
"What did she say?" Yuuji asks.
"Lady (Y/n) is going to find Geto Suguru and stop him from shattering the veil. However, she refuses anyone to assist her while doing so"
"Out of the question, she can't do it alone. She is a huge target to them" Mechamaru says.
"Be that as it may, we can't go against her orders. You are all forgetting yourselves that she is a deity and protector of us all"
"God or not, she will be met with many special grades if she gets to them first. Who knows what they'll have planned for her? It would be faster to attack through the subway from the neighboring stations. But to do that, we need to lift that veil first" Nanami says.
"It's an emergency just please multi-task," Mechamaru says.
"I guess this isn't the time for complaining. I want you three to do something about the veil keeping sorcerers out. Quaing can you watch over them?"
"Yes, let me contact my brothers about the situation"
"Okay. Ino-kun, kusakabe, and Zen'in's special first-grade sorcerer should be inside this veil as well. If you're able to meet up with them, please tell them about the situation and request their help. Though I think they understand the situation thanks to that shouting"
"Roger that!"
"Please, take care of each other" and with that Nanami was gone.
Ino then explains the plan to Yuuji and Megumi.
"If Gojo-sensei is gone, then it's the end of jujutsu society," Megumi says.
"No" Quaing cuts in.
"If you lose both Gojo Satoru and (l/n) (y/n), then this is the end of all humanity"
"Then let's break that veil before Miss (y/n) does and when Nanami-san gets back!" Ino says.
_____
Yuuji punches the veil blocking the group's path.
"No good"
"W-well, that was some decent force..."
"I will give you points for trying, but technically veils like these don't take just force to break open," Quiang says.
"It's a rather sturdy veil. We'll have to search for its weak point. Put a hole in it, even if it's only for a second. We can't get anywhere without getting inside first"
Everyone focuses on the veil while Yuuji kicks a spirit in the face. One of Megumi's dogs eats it up.
"Huh, why not?"
"Listen, this is a veil to keep sorcerers out. It's a barrier. Barriers are all designed to surround you and protect yourself, right? Which fundamentally means that whoever lowered this veil is inside it" Ino says.
"But back in Harajuku..."
"Now I can see why the barrier didn't break from Yuuji's earlier blow," Ino says.
"If that's the logic, the veil's source should be somewhere that stands out, right?"
Quaing was the first to notice three different curse energies.
"May I suggest at the top of that building there?" He points out.
Chapter 36: Chapter 30
Notes:
We made it to the big 30’s everyone.
Let me just give everyone a heads up about Shamanism and Buddhism. I know they aren’t the same, and I know I’ve placed the reader in a position of Buddhism, but because Shamanism focuses on spirits, I placed her in a neutral position of the two. I’m sorry if it may cause some confusions or issues, but please do enjoy.
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
22:01 Shibuya Cerulean Tower
"Think the sorcerers will realize it? This is the place that stands out the most within the veil, right?"
"Probably"
Soon wires pulled about three sorcerers from the tower by Yuuji with force while Megumi's Nue pulled the other wires.
While Ino and Quiang were taking care of the other two sorcerers.
"Grandson"
"Yes, I know granny"
"You have my back right?" Ino asks Quiang.
"Of course"
"Everyone's doing their best, so it's time to earn some achievements, so I can become a first grade too!"
What felt like minutes now, Quiang noticed the old woman chanting an incantation. It doesn't go unnoticed as Quiang tries to reach for her. But her grandson wouldn't let him.
He was almost familiar with those kinds of words. You would sometimes chant incantations for spirits to heal and prosper.
_____
Before the Shibuya mission.
In a garden grove.
You were sitting down on the grass cross-leg. Both hands are occupied with a bead necklace and a lotus symbol connected to it. Your right hand held the abhaya mudra symbol
You had your eyes closed for a while now, chanting words as nature speaks to you. Shifting the beads one by one slowly as you make connections with other spirits.
The spirit world felt like the only place peaceful away from all the chaos.
While you were there, you noticed a flickering soul spark across from you in the spirit world. Quiang appeared, but not in form. He was watching over you.
Smiling, you call out to him without opening your eyes.
"Quiang I didn't summon you," you said.
The moment you come back to the real world, you open your eyes and see him standing.
"Goodness, you and your brothers have a mind of their own don't you?" Playfully you say.
Quiang bows.
"Forgive me. You just don't have anyone watching over you" he says.
"I see that. But you know we're in Jujutsu High. No enemies will come here"
Quiang didn't say anything but nod. You stare at him for a moment and then sigh with wonder. You saw right through him.
He just wanted to spend some time with you.
"Quaing, just tell me how you really feel. I don't mind having a conversation" you said.
He was caught off guard.
"N-no, lady (y/n). I am not worthy"
"Who said that?"
"...it's just how things are. You are above me. So I cannot overstep that"
You get up and come towards him. He was taller than you. But not as tall and robust as Jiang.
You touch his hands.
"You are a part of me Quiang. And I will always be a part of you"
Quiang didn't know what to say. He would always be lost for words whenever you would say things like this.
You smile.
"Would you like to know what I was doing?"
"Chanting. You were doing your daily mediations" he says.
"Very good. But I was also looking for guidance and reassurance. When the time comes that I have to face Sukuna. I need to know what my plan of action will be"
Lately, all you have been doing was train and meditate. Everyone that you know has helped you a long way. You didn't have anyone make decisions for you like before anymore.
And so you were slowly drifting towards being a god that the scriptures have been saying before. But there was still work to be done.
Sukuna didn't plague your mind as much as he used to. But you weren't too sure until you saw him again.
"Chanting and doing incantations can be very powerful. We look towards them to boost ourselves or others. However, when dealing with an enemy, you need to be very careful. Don't underestimate the power that can come with the words of the souls. Shamans favor direct spirits or spiritual energies into the physical world for the purpose of healing, divination, or aiding human beings. And Buddhists favor human suffering, meditation, spiritual, physical labor, and good behavior to achieve enlightenment" you said.
Quiang enjoyed this moment. Sitting down with you on the grass while hearing your teachings.
"Honestly, I look towards both. It might not be ideal, but at this point, we need to do whatever it takes" you shrug.
"We are all prepared for what is to come. If we have to ally with these jujutsu sorcerers, we will for you"
That was Quiang's gesture of trying not to be rude to humans.
"Remember Quiang, we will always be different from them. But that doesn't mean we shouldn't have a good heart. As much as they show us their heart, we do the same. Spirits like us must thrive together" you said.
Even though you are half-human, you try to find comfort for Quiang to feel like one.
"...My lady, you are strong. The mountains themselves will even fall before you" he says.
Taking a moment to understand what Quiang was saying, you just end up laughing.
Quiang was confused. He didn't know what he had said wrong.
"Quiang, you're amazing too. Thank you"
And that was that.
_____
Ino punches the guy back but still protects the old woman.
"We cannot let that old woman finish her chanting, whatever happens, will not be good"
"Then we got to hurry up," Ino says.
But it was too late and the aura around them changed.
"We're all set now"
"Got it, Granny"
The man swallows a small container that contains something that changes his body.
"How is it, grandson?"
"It's great granny. Better than anything before"
Quiang sensed a shift of soul switch from the man before him. He summons his weapon and changes his stance.
"Not good"
"What's up with him? Is he some famous sorcerer?! I can tell by his stance"
"Tread lightly. This man's soul isn't something to take easily"
Ino gets ready.
"He's hella strong. Number four Ryu—!"
Ino's mask was snatched and then punched in the face. Quiang tries to interrupt him by slicing his arm off, but he moves away quickly.
He's fast, almost like Liu Kang. He thought.
Quiang runs towards him again but the man throws an unconscious Ino at him with force. Quiang stops and grabs him.
He inspects Ino and sees that he's alive.
For once Quaing started to sweat.
"The situations have changed" he mumbles.
Thinking of flight or fight, Quiang, for Ino's sake, chose flight.
He gets away by jumping off of the building, in his view he sees Yuuji and Megumi, and they see him.
"Quiang-san! Ino-san!"
Megumi summons his Nue and grabs the two. Having them land safely, Quiang rushes towards the two boys.
"Unfortunately we will need a change of plan. I'm afraid things will be getting harder from here on out"
_____
Maki cuts through a transfigured monster.
"They hit Ijichi-san?"
Liu Kang comes in and assists Maki, cutting through a transfigured monster coming her way.
"It sounded like he got attacked while on the phone with Nitta-chan, so it probably happened after he left Fushiguro's group. He might be in trouble by himself now" Kugisaki says.
"Nobara, go with Akari-san to Ijichi-san," Maki says.
"Hey, if we split up that means the plan has changed. I promised lady (y/n) to help all of you guys" Liu Kang says.
"And you still are, but we can't use our cell phones in here so we won't get anywhere without the assistance of supervisors. And honestly...I don't think that idiot would ever lose, but this whole situation is smelling even fishier"
Liu Kang scratches his head and grunts.
"Fuck. Just this once...what do you want me to do"
"Since the old man is slacking off too much, stick with me. We'll take care of things here for now. I don't say this a lot but, I'll need a partner"
"...Tch"
Liu Kang didn't know what to say, he just turned his head away. Though he secretly takes the compliment.
"Now go!" Maki commands the two other women.
"Right!" Kugisaki and Nitta run off.
"So I guess it's just us..." Liu Kang says.
"Once they're outside the veil. They'll be able to run if the worst happens"
Liu Kang didn't say anything, but Maki saw his change of attitude.
"What happened"
"Nothing...just a bad feeling"
_____
"How's Ino-san?" Yuuji asks.
"He's breathing, but won't be fighting for a while," Quiang says.
"The veil is lifted, so our top priority right now is getting Gojo-sensei. The people at the top might have escaped already anyway. Quiang-san...Quiang-san?"
Quiang was in his own little world until Megumi brought him back.
"Forgive me...lady (y/n) just hasn't said anything for a while," he says.
"She'll be okay. If she was in trouble she'd let us know right?" Yuuji asks.
"Yes...I hope so"
"I know it's hard, but we can't stray from the mission, I'll take Ino-san with me and head outside the veil for a bit"
"You two will split up?" Quiang asks.
"Yes, I'm sorry Quiang-san, you might need to go with Itadori"
Quiang didn't think it was a good idea.
"You need some assistance. You are carrying an injured man"
"Itadori can't be alone on this. Please Quiang-san"
Quiang takes a moment then nods.
"Come back as fast as you can...for lady (y/n)'s sake," he says.
Megumi nods.
"I will"
Yuuji takes a deep breath.
"We'll head to the station. Take care of Ino-san, Fushiguro"
"Alright, but—"
"If I die, you'll kill me, right? Don't worry! I have Mechamaru and Quiang with me! Which means I have the brains and bronze together!" Yuuji says.
"Are you implying that I am not intelligent, brat?" Quiang questions.
"No, I didn't say that!"
"So we all come to an understanding. See you guys later"
"Yeah!"
_____
Running down the subway.
Yuuji and Quiang both look for any sign of life.
"There's absolutely no one here! I thought there was a huge crowd trapped inside the station?"
"...Itadori down there" Quiang points out to an elevator going down the lower levels of the station.
Yuuji follows, and when they jump down, they are met with a sorcerer who looks like he is waiting for them.
But he only paid attention to Yuuji with disgust.
"Itadori Yuuji"
He prepares an attack.
"I'll avenge my brothers!"
A splatter of red liquid shoots out of the palms of his hands.
"Convergence!"
"Itadori!"
Quiang blocks the iron blood with his wrist gauntlet armor and casts it away at the walls.
"Stay out of this cursed spirit!"
Yuuji then makes contact with the man and hits him as he's blown back.
Regrouping the two surrounds the blood manipulator.
"You. I don't know who you are. But if you are helping him, then you will die with him. And you...there's something I have to ask you. Did my little brothers leave behind any last words?" The sorcerer asks.
"Brothers?"
"Tsk. I'm talking about the ones you two killed"
Itadori then understood what he was talking about.
"No, not really. But...they were crying"
And with that, that set the blood manipulator off even more.
"Eso! Kechizu! Watch over me...this is your older brother!" He bursts a wave of blood in the air in front of the two.
Yuuji and Quaing engage through attacks. Quiang switched from defense to offense as he got close.
The sorcerer was skilled in range attacks so the two try as best to strike attacks close.
The piercing blood however was too fast for the two to comprehend. Quiang throws Yuuji away from an attack, as he bounces to the ceiling off to him from above. He summons his weapon to try to aim for his head, but one of the sorcerer's blood orbs explodes on him.
Quiang jumps back as he regroups with Yuuji. They end up in cover as they get word from Mechamaru. While trying to figure out a plan, the sorcerer continues to strike attacks.
As plans are made, the sorcerer ends up running towards the bathroom stalls.
He is met by Quiang and before he is about to do anything, the blood starts diluting because of the water dripping in the bathroom. And before he knew it, he was met with Quiang's fire from his mouth.
Steam surrounded the area making it hard to see. From the water dripping everywhere, it made a good opportunity for Yuuji and Quiang to then strike.
Two against one wasn't ideal for the sorcerer, but he stayed calm in the situation.
"What's your name," Quiang asks.
"...why"
"It is rude of me to fight my opponent without even knowing his name first"
Hesitant at first, but he gave it to him.
"Choso"
Quiang gets in position.
"Good"
Quiang strikes first then Yuuji. Choso focused on all of his surroundings on the two. Quiang made the first hit from Choso's abdomen.
Yuuji from his knee, but Choso took the upper hand and grabbed Yuuji by his collar, punching him and throwing him back breaking the walls.
He intended to have Yuuji all to himself. But he couldn't with Quiang around to stop him. He wasn't going to kill him any faster at the moment.
But Yuuji dealt a strike that shouldn't have been made. Taking a couple of distance back, Yuuji regained his posture.
Choso covering his arm in blood, goes after Yuuji. The fight held on until a mistake on Yuuji's part came at him.
Once strike to Choso's left abdomen was supposed to be a sure thing. But it failed. Choso took the opportunity and strike Yuuji through the walls.
Quaing grabs Choso from the neck behind, and with given strength, hits Choso through a wall.
Quiang quickly runs to Yuuji and examines him.
He's still breathing. He thought.
Checking his heart and his vitals, Yuuji was indeed alive still. Quaing decided to pick him up and run before Choso came back, but a ringing in his ears suddenly came.
It was you. You were calling for Quiang out of all times. Stuck in a hard place, he had to follow your commands, but he didn't want to leave Yuuji alone.
If he carried him on his back, then the other sorcerer was for sure going to follow them back. His mind was set on killing Yuuji. This would cause you to get involved.
He wouldn't have time to explain the situation either. What if you were in danger?
He had to choose.
He chose you.
"Itadori...forgive me"
And just like that Quiang ran off.
Notes:
Oh yeah, it gets worse.
Chapter 37: Chapter 31
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Shibuya Station, Avenue Exit, 22:20
In the station, Nanami was met with Maki, Jiang, and Naobito.
"Satoru Gojo was sealed? That is simply incomprehensible" Naobito says.
"I think so too, but...Geto has his part in it, even if that one's a fake, they must be up to something" Nanami says.
"I'd like to enjoy the downfall of the Gojo Family, though"
"Leave if you don't want to work seriously"
"Lady (y/n) would kill you immediately. I hate to say it, but Gojo Satoru is very much in her favor" Maki and Liu Kang spit at Naobito.
"Hey now, are you two telling me to go back? Besides, you're the one who should go back, Maki. Isn't that right, grade 1 sorcerer Nanami?"
"Maki. You should do what Mr. Naobito said..."
"I'm at least more useful than a drunkard"
"She's not wrong. We need the most useful help than this disrespectful fucker" Liu Kang says.
Naobito's veins show.
"Do you want to die already, cursed spirit?"
"My name is not cursed spirit, it's Liu Kang, human. If you kill me, you'll be facing lady (y/n)'s wrath"
"Stop it. And you've been drinking?" Nanami turns to Naobito.
Naobito belches.
"Nope"
Liu Kang sighs in frustration and continues walking down the steps.
In an open area, they stay still and see a tiny cursed spirit.
"Leave it to me" Nanami pulls out his weapon and engages. But Naobito caught up.
"Aren't you three too slow?"
Naobito attacks the little cursed spirit.
"Hey...that was a cursed technique. Did you two see it?" Liu Kang asks.
"No," Nanami says.
The little spirit then spits out the bones and carcasses of humans.
"Bastard. How many people did you eat?"
It crawls and weeps for its friends. But the air started to thicken. And that's when Liu Kang summoned both his weapons and leaf fan.
He didn't have a good feeling about that octopus spirit at all.
"How dare you...how dare you kill Hanami. You killed Hanami. You killed Hanami!"
The spirit's body then turns into a skinless creature. As if it shed its body to something new.
Naobito scoffs.
"I see. No wonder it's so weak. Because until just now, it was only a cursed womb.
The squid spirit brings down a wave of water. Liu Kang quickly stabs his weapon on a stone column high in the air for support. He grabs on so he doesn't get taken away from the current. Maki does the same.
"Cursed spirit, do you know how many frames there are in every second of an animation?" Naobito asks.
"My name is not cursed spirit. I'm Dagon" he says.
Liu Kang suddenly felt a shiver down his spine. That felt like deja vu.
"Recently, there's been a trend of increasing resolution and frame rate"
"So is Hanami, Jogo, and Mahito..."
"Such as improving image quality to 4k or frame interpolating to 60fps"
Naobito just couldn't shut up.
"We all have..."
"It's fine if it's for personal enjoyment and doesn't cause trouble for others..."
As he keeps going on and on, Dagon doesn't pay a single word of what Naobito is saying.
"We all have our own names!"
Nanami then strikes from above. Pushing Dagon to the floor, Liu Kang and Maki engage in an attack.
Dagon grabs their weapon, but Liu Kang has his other sickle and punctures Dagon's left side.
Dagon however didn't waver. Naobito comes in and seals the spirit, throwing him aside as Nanami tries to strike him down again.
The punctured wound from Liu Kang's previous attack immediately healed.
"Not even two grade 1 sorcerers, the least a special grade can't exorcise it. This is getting serious" Naobito says.
"Don't underestimate me. I'm just getting started" Liu Kang says.
Dagon forms a water barrier around him.
"A water barrier? Can you use other curse techniques? With that amount of energy, u bet you have many other techniques"
The idea went on as a gang up on the spirit until it evaded again.
Naobito corners it, however. Bashing and striking until it didn't have time for anything. Liu Kang didn't like to stand by so he went for the legs.
He cuts them off, then his arms, and before anything, tries to cut its head off.
Dagon uses his wings and flies away from him. This caused Liu Kang to miss as his weapon only slashed through the concrete. Naobito touches Dagon and shifts him to a frame.
Liu Kang kicks Dagon hard and Naobito punches back in return. Dagon lays on the floor. He shakes to get up but Naobito punches through his chest.
"Don't even try"
Everything went quiet. What seemed to be over, was just the beginning. Everything changed when the atmosphere wasn't the station anymore.
It was a domain.
Everyone got sucked into it. Liu Kang looks around. He wasn't surprised. But wasn't expecting to get caught in a domain.
"Shit..."
He sees Dagon at a distance by the ocean. Before he was about to strike with his leaf fan, he felt a cut on his ear. Looking back he sees a shikigami that hid away.
"This is the first time I have ever been hit. A can't miss attack. I guess I don't mind fighting head-on, but it's gonna get pretty bloody" he says.
Dagon prepares an attack.
"Technique release: Death Swarm!"
Large fishes started to pop out.
"The shikigami are not charging at us. At the next moment, they will bite through our bodies. We can't think before we act! As soon as you feel a touch, please knock them all down! Maki, you have almost no cursed energy, so it's the only thing you can—"
Nanami gets bitten by one of the man-eating fish.
"Mr. Nanami!"
Adrenaline kicked in on Liu Kang. His cursed energy burst like wildfire.
"How long since I've put my life on the line! Come at me with everything you got!"
All the other huge fishes bite and push back Liu Kang.
Maki then looks back at him.
"Liu Kang!"
Cutting and dicing many swarms of shikigami, they just kept coming endlessly.
"Not done yet!" Liu Kang uses his leaf fan and blows himself toward Dagon.
He almost cuts through him, but his shikigami keeps hindering Liu Kang.
"'Death swarm' is shikigami that will appear infinitely"
Naobito gets sucked in by a swarm of them. Leaving Liu Kang and Dagon alone.
"I couldn't care less about the old guy. But you're not going to get me or the girl. You won't live through this encounter" he says.
Maki comes towards Liu Kang.
"Liu Kang, we'll have a chance if it's two against one!"
"No, he'll release a swarm of shikigamis on you. We can't lose any more people. And your weapon is broken"
Liu Kang looks at Dagon.
"Leave this to me. Your business will only be with me now"
Liu Kang unequipped his weapons and cracked his knuckles. He smirks.
"Death by beating. A fitting choice for a pathetic spirit like you. My gift to you"
Dagon examines Liu Kang. He can see the damage he's taken from his death swarm. And yet he healed so quickly. Liu Kang is on par with Dagon. Maybe even more.
"You are truly a special grade. But an ignorant disgrace to cursed spirits like us. You can never be us" Dagon says.
"Never be you? Bitch, cursed spirits have been fighting each other since ancient times. Just because I'm not like you, doesn't mean I'm any less. By lady (y/n)'s love and grace, her blessings protect me. I will continue to fight in her name. Even if I die" Liu Kang says, he gets in position. Cursed energy began to radiate around him.
Dagon gets in position as he is ready for the fight. Cursed energy roots from him too.
"Then die in your 'mistress's name'" he mocks.
The moment they were about to clash, a huge splash of dark water popped out of nowhere from the sea. It was Megumi.
"Maki-san, Liu Kang-san!!"
"Megumi!"
Megumi brings out nunchakus for Maki. She smiles and then grabs them.
Dagon shifts his attention to him.
"You invaded my domain voluntarily. How foolish—!" Dagon gets punched through his chest by Liu Kang.
"What!?"
"Who are you looking at!?"
He then gets lifted with Liu Kang's fist still in his chest, then thrown towards Maki who was ready to strike.
Maki was impressed by Liu Kang's strength considering his size.
But she hits him back to the other side of the sandy beach. While Megumi has expanded his domain more. Killing the guaranteed hits from Dagon.
Dagon releases his shikigamis at Megumi, but not without Nanami slicing them through.
"Can't believe the bastard withstood that death swarm" Liu Kang mumbles in amazement.
Naobito came back into play too. Though he lost a right arm.
"Though it's just an arm. You will have to pay a considerable price for it!"
Before the three were about to come at the spirit again, Nanami's voice shouted out to them.
"You three! Assemble!"
And just like clockwork, they all come hopping back together. Dagon didn't understand why until it hit him. He goes after them.
"To Fushiguro's feet!"
The portal to the domain opens wider for them all to go out. But in shock, there was a man who came out to the domain instead.
"What is this...?" Liu Kang sees in bewilderment.
"A person? A sorcerer?" Maki questions.
Everyone witnesses the mysterious man in the air. Nobody knew the reason why, but he took action as he took away Maki's weapon.
"Fushirguro-kun?"
"It's no good. The hole has been sealed. To make things worse it just figured out our goal. It won't let us open a hole as easily again"
Looking at the man, Naobito knew who it was.
"Toji!"
Taking a closer look at him, Liu Kang knew something was wrong.
"That man. It's a corpse walking. And he doesn't have cursed energy..."
But is he an ally or foe?
Zen'in Toji met eyes with Dagon and got into a fighting stance.
"You are not worth my attention—"
But Toji beats him to it and strikes him down. His fangs were always constant and directed towards the strongest.
Bearing witness, it was unbelievable. Liu Kang wondered to himself if he or his brothers ever fought someone like him. Then the fight would last for days.
He admired that strength. He wanted to challenge someone like him. But again, he didn't know if Toji was on their side.
Toji with inhuman strength got this far with so much Dagon has thrown at him. It was obvious now who was going to win.
"Old man. Who is that?" Maki asks.
"...a ghost"
"Fushiguro-kun, can you hold out a little longer?"
"Yes!"
"I'm sorry. We're placing our bets on him"
Toji smacks Dagon down and starts to sharpen the weapons he holds. To a point where he was able to impale them in the octopus spirit.
Naobito helps and pushes the spirit towards the deadly weapon to his face.
Through so many smacks, Dagon releases his domain. He then fades away in his death.
"The domain. He seriously exorcised that octopus all by himself" Maki says.
Everyone looks at Toji to see what is going to happen. Looking around he spots Liu Kang first, and suddenly he stabs him in the chest.
Toji felt that Liu Kang was the strongest one around, so he chose him for the kill.
And Liu Kang didn't see it coming.
What...?
Liu Kang quickly tries to stab Toji back but Toji moves the staff weapon upwards at an angle. He had no time to react.
The final blow hits him when Toji uses the other staff and plunges it right through his head.
Everything started to become a blur. For the first time in centuries, Liu Kang felt the brink of death.
This can't...be.
_____
Before the Shibuya mission.
You were writing a scroll down in blood. A particular scroll that you will be needing use for. It's been hours, from training with Gojo and reading scriptures to find anything more about Sukuna.
You needed just a little break and someone to talk to. So you thought of one little spirit that would entertain you.
You summon Liu Kang.
"Okay, where's the trouble" he looks around and stares off confused. You smile.
"There's no trouble"
"What? Then why am I out? Take me back if you're going to waste my time" he blatantly says.
You stare at him in awe. Realizing his words and who he said that to, Liu Kang tries to take it back.
He gets on his knees and bows.
"Shit, I'm sorry my lady. That was rude of me...u-uhm what is it you want to talk about?" He politely asks.
You only laugh.
"Liu Kang I know you're rude"
That breaks his spirit.
Ouch...
You ask him to sit with you. And when he does, you scratch the back of his ears. This calms him down as he lays his head on your lap.
"There, that settled you down didn't it?"
Liu Kang didn't say a word. While you play with his fur, something comes to mind.
"You're very quick to temper Liu Kang"
"...I know"
"You need to learn to control that anger"
Liu Kang moves his head up to look at you.
"What if I project it towards our enemies?" He asks.
You chuckle as you pet his head.
"Sure"
It was quiet. You enjoy your moment with your shikigami. Liu Kang soon breaks the silence.
"Lady (y/n), how come you treat the sorcerers with kindness?" He asks.
"Because they are kind to me"
"But didn't the sorcerers from back then keep you from the outside? They locked you away"
You frown. He wasn't wrong. You didn't expect yourself to be trapped for how many years. You didn't even know if you were going to be released if Sukuna died. You sometimes regret the decision you made. But you wouldn't have had a choice. Fate wasn't going to let you go like that.
"I know...but not these sorcerers"
"At least you got to embrace your other side," he says.
"Huh?"
"Cursed spirit. You were practically sealed so...you at least know how cursed spirits feel"
You only hum. But in your head, words of unforgiving wanted to flood you. Being sealed just wasn't a fun time.
"Do you hate them?"
You come back to reality.
"What?"
"Those sorcerers from a thousand years ago. Do you hate them?"
You sigh.
"The only person who I will ever give my respect to is Tengen...but even he didn't seem to embrace my other half as much. However, he didn't look at me any differently...I wish I knew about my cursed spirit side more"
He didn't hear a no.
Liu Kang shakes his head.
"You're better off being with the humans. Cursed spirits aren't the most social creatures, unlike you. They were made from negative energy. You were made from love"
"So were you Liu Kang"
"Are you kidding? I'm far from it. My brothers and I wanted nothing to do with humans. We were born from negative energy. That is until you came along. But even that took time"
But you remembered your shikigamis spending time with the first and second-year students.
"You all took a liking to the students here. You especially with Maki"
Liu Kang scoffs.
"She's strong. I need a strong opponent to keep up with my strength"
"Even if that meant hanging out with her?" You tease.
There was a time when Liu Kang was eager to be alone with Maki. He wanted to discuss fighting strategies and weapon-wielding skills.
He has never felt so eager since...ever.
Liu Kang blushes and looks away.
"Whatever"
You chuckle.
"It's good that you're getting stronger Liu Kang. But be careful. Not all spirits are immortal"
"You know my job is to protect you. Even if it kills me. If I die, I'll be happy to die in your honor" he says. You hated hearing those words.
"Please don't"
"I'm the strongest out of my brothers too" Liu Kang playfully flexes his arms.
You smile but still feel sad.
"I'm glad Liu Kang, continue to be strong. But please don't let pride take over you like that. I'm afraid that will be your downfall" you said as you gently cupped his cheeks.
Liu Kang gently holds your hands and closes his eyes.
"I won't"
_____
Fushiguro was forced out of the station.
"Megumi! Shit, Liu Kang!" Maki runs towards Liu Kang. She can see the big gash across his chest.
He's still alive but unconscious. He was slowly trying to recover from Toji's random attack.
Before Maki was about to take out the weapon in his head, she heard fire bursting from her left side.
"Nanami—!"
Maki was burnt to the ground. And so did Naobito.
_____
On the other side of the city.
You were running towards the source of everything going on. As you make it to a station below, you immediately come across a bunch of large cursed spirits.
The feeling of the source was right there. But you weren't expecting cursed spirits. You were expecting one person.
You were played.
Getting ready you try to make your escape to go back, but one of the cursed spirits grabs you by the wrist. They were pulling you to them.
And soon another grabs your legs. They weren't trying to hurt you, they were trying to entrap you. You realized that he was probably responsible for these shikigamis.
He knew you'd be here.
You turn to attack them all at once. Raising your hand it started to glow.
Cursed technique: Turn undead
The light illuminates each one of the spirits. Some immediately died while others held on.
So annoying.
Running out of the station, many cursed spirits were coming after you still.
You create a huge ice blockage that would touch the sky. But it manages to break huge spirits.
Okay. These guys won't give up.
You unleash another technique to burn and smash them to the ground.
Creating a huge magma of fire while at the same time lifting the earth off the ground.
You throw the huge magma at the spirits, which creates a huge explosion, shaking the earth. And with that, a wave of large concrete of gravel swallows every spirit whole.
The atmosphere was silent, and you didn't feel any spirits more.
Or so you thought. More started to sprout out of a vortex in thin air. They were being summoned automatically.
Give me a break!
You continue to run and teleport yourself at a distance to keep them away. You curse them to slow down, stop, and die immediately, but it only lasts for a certain time before they come back.
You didn't know how many kept coming, but you were certain that you would have to stay and fight. They won't get off your back until you slay every last one.
I need Quiang, Jiang, or Liu Kang. If I keep going, I'm for sure going to get tired soon.
You wrap yourself in a barrier. Every spirit surrounds you. Pounding the force field to crack, but you kept it secured with your cursed energy pouring out.
You quickly bend your knees to the ground, laying your scepter on the floor in front of you as you close your eyes and concentrate. You try and signal one of the three.
Quiang heard you first.
"Lady (y/n)?"
"Quiang I need you by my side. Geto isn't where I thought he was. He threw me off by placing a bunch of spirits instead to contain me"
"...I'll be there as soon as I can"
Contact cuts off and your barrier was still intake. You focus and unleash force around it, pushing back the spirits.
You summon black orbs in the air as it sucks every spirit together. They all get crushed by the gravitational pull.
One gets near you, grabbing you by the collar of your red jacket, you quickly take it off and push the spirit back to the point of disintegrating.
Quiang hurry.
Notes:
Not to get anyone confused, but communication with Quiang happened after Choso’s fight. So when Yuuji fell unconscious.
And Liu Kang doesn’t have feelings for Maki like that. After reading this chapter again I noticed the sentences I used for the conversation between the reader and him sound like that, but that’s not the case. In case you guys were wondering.
Chapter 38: Chapter 32
Chapter Text
Quiang rushes to you. He couldn't understand why he couldn't disappear straight to your soul. Something was keeping it from happening.
Almost as if where you were was a barrier keeping them from moving back to you faster.
All Quiang could do was run at the speed of light. If Liu Kang were around, they would be there in seconds. But for now, he had to do this on his own.
Shit, make it in time!
_____
Deep within the station.
"You cursed spirit, what do you want? I'm a very impatient man you know"
Blood was splattered on the floor by two innocent girls. The only people taking breath were Jogo and Sukuna.
How it happened was the two girls who were associated with Geto, unleashed Sukuna again by granting many fingers to an unconscious Yuuji.
Choso didn't finish him off due to a contemplation in his head that had him spiraling.
And within that moment of consumption, Sukuna awakens before the sorcerers. He killed off the two girls for their "insult", leaving Jogo the only one left standing, on his knee.
He had to choose his words carefully.
"I want...nothing"
"...what?"
"Our objective, Sukuna, is your complete resurrection, and to return your bride to you"
Sukuna continues to listen.
"Currently, you only have temporary freedom while Itadori struggles to adapt. I'm sure you're the most aware of that yourself. Forge a pact with Itadori Yuuji before he returns! A pact to grant you perpetual authority over his body!"
Jogo still puts himself on one knee. He makes sure not to overstep his boundaries with his words.
"Many of Itadori's allies are already here, and (l/n) (y/n)'s guardian spirits are with them. There are plenty of ways you could do it"
It was silent. Silent for just a short moment until Sukuna answered.
"There's no need"
"Huh?"
"I already have my plans. But I see"
Sukuna laughs.
"You all are desperate, too...where is (y/n)? Why do I feel her so far away?" he demands.
Jogo gulps.
"She should be currently facing a trap made by Geto. The plan is to tire her out and capture her once she lets her guard down. Once we retrieve her, we will give her to you to consume her whole for her powers"
Sukuna looks at Jogo for a brief moment then turns away.
"This is your reward for the fingers. Come at me. If you manage to land even a single blow in me, I'll work under you all"
Jogo gaps at Sukuna's request.
"For starters, how about I slaughter every human in Shibuya? Except for two"
Jogo stands up, facing Sukuna in the eyes.
"You're true to your words, yes?"
_____
23:01 Shibuya Stream
Jiang is standing, and just waiting for orders. He was so bored out of his mind that he didn't get any action.
But deep down, he felt something wrong. The door opens to reveal Panda.
"Kusakabe, aren't we done with the interiors yet? They might still be in the veil, but thanks to Toge, everyone's been evacuated, so let's head to Satoru" Panda struggles to get out the door so Jiang comes and helps.
Kusakabe jumps down the ledge, panda and Jiang look at him to see what he is about to do, but he walks away.
"How do we get to floor B5 from here? Toge said the news about him being sealed is real, so let's hurry!"
Kusakabe didn't say anything but kept walking.
"Gojo this, Gojo that. Gojo isn't the only person in the world!"
While Kusakabe scolds Panda for his ungrateful thinking, Jiang shuts out the noise and sighs. Staring ahead in wonder.
"I bet my brothers are already fighting...I can't help but worry. Somethings off" he mumbles.
After he was done thinking, he comes back to reality and tunes back to Kusakabe.
"If you understand, then get to scouring every building, every floor, and behind all the toilets, you dumbass!"
Panda goes straight to work, but Jiang stands for a moment and can feel the nervous breakdown that Kusakabe was going to have.
Is this man taking all of this seriously?
"Mr. Kusakabe, why don't you want to go down B5?" Jiang asks.
Kusakabe froze in the center, he almost spits out his candy stick.
"Damn it! I forgot (L/n)'s guardian spirits are really smart. I just never expected this one to be!" He thought.
"Eh, well again, we have to scour any other survivors in this city. So let's get going with teamwork"
"...Mr. Kusakabe. Are you sure you aren't lying?"
"Wh...who's the leader here!?"
Jiang doesn't say a word and walks away. Kusakabe sighs.
"Shit. I had to hold my breath for a second there!"
Looking around, Jiang and Panda searched the perimeter. As the minutes went by, they all felt energies flowing at the top of a balcony.
Two sorcerers standing there.
"You're sorcerers from Jujutsu High, right? Surrender. I don't want to kill sorcerers if I don't have to"
"Panda"
"I count three behind him, probably more in hiding"
Kusakabe sighs.
"I don't want to get murdered, either, but I can't just roll over and say yes. So why don't we have a chat? A nice, long one"
The other two sorcerers stay still.
"We are the ones carrying on the will of Geto-sama. If you're with Jujutsu High, then nothing else needs to be said. Will you surrender or not? I hate indecisive men" The woman speaks out.
Panda raises his hand.
"I'm a panda, so that doesn't apply to me"
Jiang then raises his hand.
"And I'm a guardian spirit"
Kusakabe smirks and pulls out his sword.
"Oh, are we going to fight now?" Jiang asks excitedly.
Kusakabe gets into position.
"So that's your answer?"
Before everyone knew it, the lights went off, and explosions were heard shaking the ground.
It felt close. Jiang swore he knew this feeling before.
"It's dangerous to remain here any longer! Time to run!" Once the three turned their backs to run from the danger, they were stopped by the other two sorcerers who were hidden.
"Where are you going!"
"Listen—!"
A huge explosion burst from a building close by to them. Jiang took the opportunity and used his war hammer. He uses it on the curse users blocking their way, but more come out.
"Listen up curse users! I don't know why, but a couple of special-grades are fighting each other! And right now, we're the fucking ants in the crossfire of it all!"
The wind current, gravel, cars, and other objects were throwing themselves around midair from the fight in the process.
Kusakabe cuts through the other users.
"Panda! Jiang! Let's hurry up and run—!"
"You won't"
Time froze immediately. And blood ran cold.
Jiang out of instinct took his war hammer and tried to hit Sukuna, but Sukuna extended his hand towards his face. Jiang stays still.
"If you make any sudden movements. I'm going to kill you with (y/n)’s technique" his hand was swirling with a dark aura. Something that can be a for-sure kill.
It was the technique you gifted him long ago. Jiang only stares with wide eyes but with frustration.
"Give her this message since you are her guardian"
Sukuna quickly whispers the message to Jiang. And with that Jiang couldn't help but sweat with fear.
Once that ended, the meteor Jogo created was coming near.
"Now then, I hereby forbid every person in a 100-meter radius from moving until I say "now." And of course, I'll kill anyone who violates that rule"
Hearts were pounding and yearning to go. Time wasn't their friend, and at this moment it was life or death.
"Not yet"
It gets closer.
"Still not yet"
The heat of the meteor burns the hairs on everyone's skin. A terrifying sight coming closer.
"Now!"
Just like the speed of light, everyone runs away. The meteor hits the ground in sight, destroying everything around the area.
Heat and flames corroded the air. Soot creeps in the air as the black smoke covers the sky.
Jogo stands on top of the burning meteor.
"Even Sukuna shouldn't escape that unharmed"
"If it had hit"
Jogo quickly turns his back and sees Sukuna unharmed.
"Why won't you use your domain?"
"Tch. I know I can't win a war between domains" Jogo says.
"Because that's how it went with Gojo Satoru? That's the epitome of a loser's spirit" Sukuna berates Jogo which makes him clutch his teeth.
"But you have managed to pique my interest. So I'll fight you with your specialty"
Sukuna summons fire out of his own hands. This surprises Jogo to no end, seeing the manipulation that Sukuna can pull.
"Flames?!"
"Oh? I thought it was well-known. But I suppose you wouldn't know, cursed spirit. Don't worry I won't do anything petty like revealing my technique. You better arm yourself"
And Sukuna was dead serious through it all. Jogo sweats in fear, but he follows.
But the end passed by. The winner was simple.
Moments passed by, and Sukuna only looked at the ashes of his fallen opponent. No emotion was displayed on his face. He had his fun with Jogo, but it quickly ends the moment he disappeared. The dissatisfaction came back.
"Who are you?"
Two cursed spirits kneel behind Sukuna with respect.
"We welcome you. Sukuna-sama"
"We are honored to be graced by your presence again Sukuna-sama"
It took a moment to realize who they were to him.
"Uraume?! Kanzaki?!"
"It's been a long time," Uraume says.
Now that there was a moment of release. Sukuna knew your location. No matter how far you were, he knew where to find you. He didn't have much time but this opportunity. But before he was about to run off, he felt something.
"Sukuna-sama?"
"I have urgent matters," he says.
"I see"
"What do you want us to do Sukuna-sama?" Kanzaki asks.
"I will soon regain my freedom. Uraume, Kanzaki. Do not neglect preparation"
"Yes," Uraume says.
"Anything for you, my lord. We will always wait for your return" Kanzaki kindly says.
Before Sukuna heads off, he turns to Kanzaki.
"Kanzaki, I have one assignment for you"
She looks up with enthusiasm.
"Yes my lord"
Back in the Heian period, Sukuna made Kanzaki his loyal soldier. A king needed a soldier to be led. He needed someone to take care of businesses while he was busy with other things.
She had skills for that. Whenever Sukuna didn't have time to kill, she would be granted permission to do it for him. And she craved blood every time.
She would scout and search from hell and back to satisfy her master. If her prey was hiding, she would easily find them. She would have the nose of a bloodhound. And the intelligence in battle.
She was Sukuna's decapitator. She would cut off the heads of a hundred lords for him in his name.
Pray that you never cross her path or disrespect her king. Because her face will be the last thing you will ever see as she swallows you one by one.
"I want you to retrieve (y/n). Lock her away for when I return. I want to surprise my wife when I do. Do that for me" he demands.
"Won't there be a lot of sorcerers around her?"
"Since when has that ever stopped you?"
She bows her head down.
"Yes, of course. Anything for you my lord"
Sukuna smirks.
"That is why you are my favorite servant"
She blushes and savors the short moment of his words. Sukuna soon disappears.
_____
Black holes and rays of light shoot out and destroy every spirit around you. You keep up the momentum and pressure put on you against the spirits.
Levitating cars and buildings to throw at them, hinder them. At this point, you didn't care what was around you. You were irritated and annoyed.
Exhaustion started taking over.
You were breathing heavily and moved your head down. But at that moment, a cursed spirit wraps its arms around you. Quickly as you try to use a technique to release you, another spirit grabs you.
And soon another piles on. From just letting your guard down for one second to take a breath, you were being restrained.
You twist, turn, and grunt for release. But these cursed spirits had strength like iron. You felt your weight sinking, looking down your body was sinking into an abyss. A portal.
Using all your strength you had to be free was not happening either. You were beyond mad as your veins started popping from your forehead.
This can't be the end.
And that's when you heard a voice. An estranged voice.
Child of cursed spirits, child of wrath. You are ours.
Those words kept repeating over and over again. Until your eyes glowed and a wave of black aura swirled around you.
You began to hyperventilate.
Use your forbidden powers, Use them. Use them. Use them...
It was too much, and by involuntary movement, you raised your hand as a black aura swirled around it. Suddenly a black portal slowly opens up.
Something was about to come out, however, Quiang grabbed your hand and forced you out of all the spirit's grasp.
You came back to your senses again. And the portal created was gone.
Quiang holds you bridal style.
"My lady! My lady are you alright!?"
Taking a moment to find yourself, you nod.
"Yes...thank you Quiang. You came for me"
"Of course I did"
Looking back, you see a lot of cursed spirits ready to charge at you again.
Getting your posture back, you get your staff in hand.
"Quiang, these spirits won't go away no matter how much we exorcise them. I'm not sure how long it will take to come to an end. But this cursed technique will have to at some point"
He nods.
"That is fine. I have a lot of energy to keep going. I will have your back" Quiang gets in position.
"Thank you"
You grab your staff as the fight continues. Not realizing the horrors you were about to unleash.
Chapter 39: Chapter 33
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
After the long burning and bashing and slashing. You and Quiang were huffing and heaving for every single air given. You got down on your hands and knees, your brain was pounding against your skull.
Every cursed spirit that was coming at you disappeared in thin air. Taking a moment, an hour or two to see if more came out didn't seem to happen.
That's when you finally realize it was over. Quiang covered in blood and cuts came over to you.
"Lady (y/n)—"
There was a rumbling noise. The earth shook for a while before it stopped. Looking back at a distance. You can see skylines and buildings being cut down and bursting.
Looking at that scene, you quickly got up.
"What is going on over there?!"
"Lady (y/n), you must recover your strength—lady (y/n)!"
You try to warp to the danger ahead, but a stroke hits you. A rebound of every cursed technique you've done. Blood oozes out of your mouth.
Quiang holds you from hitting the floor. You clutch his arm.
"Quiang I need your strength, I have to stop whatever's happening over there"
"It's too dangerous!"
"I have to do this. Please"
Quiang grits his teeth and sweats. He couldn't say no. He would do everything in his power to lift you. He will always be there for you in any circumstances.
Yes, he knew you were very strong. But once in a while, he will have his moments of looking at you like a fragile woman. No that wasn't an insult. He just cares too much about you.
"Okay, but please be careful"
His energy radiates and is given to you. Regain your posture, you can feel strength again. Of course not brand new, but something to keep you going for just a little longer.
"Quiang let's go. Please keep up with me"
He nods. You warp to the battlefield.
_____
Jiang didn't hear Kusakabe's voice shouting for him to come back. All Jiang could think about was Sukuna's message and his brother's safety.
He ran to find Liu Kang. He sensed Quiang's soul from a distance. He was with you, but Liu Kang's was faltering. He was still alive, but that still didn't ease Jiang's worry.
Running down and pushing and bashing away blocking paths, he made it down to find him on the floor.
"Nii-san! Nii-san!!" Everything else didn't matter, all that mattered was his brother.
Seeing the gash that was on his chest, it was fully healed. However, the wound inflicted on him created a scar that will be there forever.
Jiang sees a weapon stuck on his head, he slowly grabs it and tries to pull it out, but he's stopped when a hand grasps his wrist.
Liu Kang grabbed his wrist. Jiang steps back as Liu Kang grabs the weapon from his head and pulls it out without a care.
Throwing it aggressively from the distance, he regains himself. Opening his eyes, he quickly gets up and looks around. Anger seared in his face like a rabid animal.
"Where are you! Where are you! I'll ring your fucking innards out!!" Shouting and searching like crazy, he was still heated over Toji's assault.
Not realizing that Jiang was next to him. Jiang grabs Liu Kang and shakes him to his senses.
"Nii-san! It's me, Jiang! You're okay now!"
Liu Kang grasps for air and looks at Jiang. Slowly, he calms down and grabs Jiang by the arms.
Looking around, he remembered where he was again. He looks at his younger brother.
"...Jiang?"
"Nii-san, we need to get to nee-san quick!"
"She's in trouble?"
"Sukuna is out, and right now he's causing a huge problem. I'm afraid he'll be after her!"
With that said, Liu Kang quickly gets up.
"Then let's go!"
But what they didn't know was that Sukuna was facing Fushiguro Megumi's summon Mahoraga. And soon they will be in a crossfire that even time won't be able to save them.
The ground shakes and rumbles. They didn't know where it was coming from, but all they could think about was getting back to you.
Quickly they headed out of the station and started to run and jump across every building to catch speed. They can feel your presence and continue to move forward.
However, they were about to come across a deadly domain summon.
"Domain expansion...Malevolent Shrine"
With Sukuna's domain, it goes to a maximum radius of 200 meters. He reduced the range to a radius of 140 meters on the ground.
Liu Kang and Jiang were zooming across the air from each building and rubble to make it to you. But the moment they felt the domain of Sukuna unravels, they knew their new objective was to get out of his range as fast as possible.
"Why can't we disappear to nee-san's soul immediately?!"
"Shit! Jiang hurry!" Liu Kang uses his leaf fan and grabs Jiang by the collar. Creating a huge wind current to push them away from the domain.
Every light was out. The buildings burst from the slashes.
Sukuna's slash attack has two types. Within the guaranteed hit range, "cleave" is used against those with cursed energy. While "dismantle" is used against those without cursed energy.
Before the malevolent shrine disappears, there will be an endless series of attacks.
"We're gonna make it, Jiang! Hang on!"
As much as Liu Kang is using all his might to get him and Jiang across the safe zone, they are still in the killing zone.
And only one spirit thought about making the ultimate sacrifice.
He chose his brother's life over his.
Lights all over the city were flickering from this deadly attack. Flames surrounded the whole area blowing up the whole city sky-high.
It was all silent and still.
All that was left was a huge crater in the middle of the city.
Liu Kang gets on his hands and knees as he huffs for air.
"Jiang, we did it, ha...ha, Jiang?" Looking back, nothing could have prepared him for the horrors presented to him.
"...Jiang?"
Laying there was his little brother, cut in half from the chest down. He was still and he couldn't regenerate. No matter how hard he would try. His soul was abolished from the powerful force of Sukuna's wrath.
"Nii-san...I can't feel anything..."
"Jiang, why did you let go!?" Liu Kang panicked and tried to do something.
"Jiang, hang in there! Lady (Y/n) will be here soon!"
"(Y/n)...nee-san?"
"Yeah, just hang on okay!"
Jiang slowly moves his head. He looks towards the sky.
"Nii-san. Are you there?"
Liu Kang clutches Jiang's hand. Tears ran down his face
"Yes, I'm here! Big brother is here!"
"You need to give...you need to give nee-san this message...before I go"
"Tell her yourself, you'll be fine!!"
"Please...nii-san?"
Liu Kang holds back his cries and tunes in the message. Jiang tells him what Sukuna told him. Liu Kang looked shocked but he nodded as he continued to clutch his large hand.
"Just keep talking to me. Please Jiang...you can't. Maybe…maybe I can make a deal with the gods"
Blood spurs out of Jiang's mouth, while he was disintegrating slowly.
"Stop it...I knew we weren't going to make it...if we both died, it wouldn't...wouldn't be fair to nee-san and Quiang-nii" he heaves.
Jiang breaths.
"I'm sorry. I let you down. I let nee-san down. I'm a bad guardian...aren't I?"
"No, no you aren't. You were very strong. She would be so proud"
Tears flowed down Jiang's face.
"Nii-san..."
"What is it, Jiang?"
"Here...can you take this, and give it to nee-san?"
Jiang slowly moves to signal his bead necklace. Liu Kang takes it.
"And here..."
Jiang's hand glows on Liu Kang's for a moment then stops. Liu Kang looked at his hand, and it was a symbol. It was his summon weapon.
"Jiang no, I can't have this"
But Jiang didn't hear him. He smiles so brightly.
"I'm so happy...that you and Quiang are my brothers...and I'm happy that I met (y/n)...I love my brothers and sister...I'm the luckiest little brother...in the world. Thank you for being my family" he cries.
He soon disappears. And nothing was left.
"...Jiang?"
Liu Kang quickly hyperventilates and then cries out.
From afar Quaing heard the cries of his brother. Not only that, but he also felt a strange feeling. He felt something missing.
You noticed him just standing still until you felt something off too.
"Lady (y/n). I have to go"
"Go where?"
"To my brother. I have to go"
From the look of Quiang’s face, it was urgent.
"I understand"
Just like that, Quiang carried his way.
You make your way to your destination and as soon as you do, your eyes blow wide like saucers.
You stand in distraught to see a huge crater. An attack so foul that it created mass destruction in the city. So many people used to be there. And now they're gone. You were too late.
You stare at the scene for a moment. Until you whispered.
"This...this was in my dreams..." Looking around there was nothing but dust and dirt.
The body of a man lay dead in the middle of it all. Until you slowly came to realize that this wasn't a dream. It was a premonition of the future you foresaw thousands of years ago.
You cover your mouth. You felt like you were about to throw up. Thinking to yourself this is what Benzaiten meant.
"Many people will die (l/n). And it is an event that you have foreseen many years ago"
You didn't even know what to say about this. It was beyond something you could ever imagine. Your heart broke into millions of pieces. You clutched your chest wanting to throw up.
You had to check back with your guardians. They weren't too far away as you warped yourself there.
It was worse.
Liu Kang sniffles and cries. Sitting on the ground with his hands and knees, Quiang stood there, staring at the floor where Jiang was. He was impassive about this. But deep down inside, a part of him died.
"Quiang, Liu Kang"
You look at the display, but nothing is there.
Liu Kang tries to use his voice.
"Lady (y/n). Jiang..."
"What happened to Jiang? Where is he? I can't feel him"
Quiang spoke.
"Our brother is dead..."
That's why you felt something missing. Jiang was gone. You couldn't believe hearing this. You couldn't believe this was real. But it is.
Benzaiten's words were coming true.
You get on your knees. Grasping your hands together in prayer. Not just for him, but also for all the innocent lives taken away. You felt so sick.
"Rest, Jiang. For the light guides you home now"
As you take in a moment of silence. Liu Kang comes next to you.
"He wanted me to give you this"
He hands you Jiang's bead necklace. It had a lotus logo on it. Pulling this close to your chest, you close your eyes and consume this sad moment.
It hurt so bad. You just couldn't find that peace of mind that one of your shikigamis went to paradise.
Not when he left his two brothers behind. But he chose this. Maybe you should have never separated them.
Soon you remembered Benzaiten's words again.
"Jujutsu higher-ups will tend to seal you forever, and Sukuna will do what he does best"
"Sukuna...Yuuji!"
Quickly as you get up, you feel he was near. Looking back at your guardians they were still mourning.
It was best to leave them be until they were ready to come back to you.
Running to where Yuuji was, you were greeted with nothing there.
"He was just here..."
He wandered off to continue business. To finish what he started with a cursed spirit underground. But not without feeling empty inside.
Turning back to retrieve your shikigamis, you were met with a blonde woman.
"Hello there! Sorry to be a bother, but are you (l/n) (y/n)...? Oh my, you're seriously a cutie!"
You look at her confused but pull your staff out.
"Who are you?" You demand.
She raises her hand.
"Don't worry, I'm not going to hurt you. I'm a friend. And I think you'll find that I have something interesting to tell you"
You didn't let your guard down, but tuned in what she had to say.
"Let's start off right. I'm Tsukumo Yuki!" She smiles.
Notes:
So my life is spiraling this year. My mental issues don’t seem to be getting any better, and I’m going to be taken to a psychologist to see what they can prescribe me and see if I honestly want to take it or not. I really want to get better and I’m trying but it’s really hard when it takes over you. I’m honestly just really tired and hope it goes away.
But good news is college is going okay for me. That’s all I can say really. I’m pushing through. Ok you guys stick around for the next chapter and thank you for continuing to read this story, it means a lot to me even if this was honestly a self indulgent piece of work. Writing honestly keeps me sane and it’s not a chore on getting it in on deadlines. I feel like I have a safe space.
Pages Navigation
MtskFan on Chapter 1 Thu 20 Jun 2024 09:07PM UTC
Comment Actions
Bai_Wuxiangs_mask on Chapter 1 Sat 07 Sep 2024 04:16PM UTC
Comment Actions
viledump on Chapter 4 Tue 31 Oct 2023 06:50PM UTC
Comment Actions
valleydoll on Chapter 4 Thu 11 Jan 2024 02:57AM UTC
Comment Actions
MyLittleDuckies on Chapter 4 Thu 11 Jan 2024 03:58AM UTC
Comment Actions
MtskFan on Chapter 4 Thu 20 Jun 2024 11:42PM UTC
Comment Actions
MtskFan on Chapter 5 Fri 21 Jun 2024 12:01AM UTC
Comment Actions
valleydoll on Chapter 6 Thu 11 Jan 2024 04:10AM UTC
Comment Actions
MyLittleDuckies on Chapter 6 Thu 11 Jan 2024 06:30AM UTC
Comment Actions
valleydoll on Chapter 6 Thu 11 Jan 2024 08:26AM UTC
Comment Actions
Heretoread101 on Chapter 7 Fri 29 Sep 2023 09:51PM UTC
Comment Actions
valleydoll on Chapter 7 Thu 11 Jan 2024 04:26AM UTC
Comment Actions
Karla4497 on Chapter 7 Wed 07 Aug 2024 12:19AM UTC
Comment Actions
mialby on Chapter 7 Mon 21 Oct 2024 06:15PM UTC
Comment Actions
lilitrania on Chapter 8 Fri 20 Oct 2023 09:41AM UTC
Comment Actions
Nicole (Guest) on Chapter 8 Sun 22 Oct 2023 01:36PM UTC
Comment Actions
MyLittleDuckies on Chapter 8 Mon 23 Oct 2023 04:39AM UTC
Comment Actions
viledump on Chapter 8 Tue 31 Oct 2023 07:13PM UTC
Comment Actions
TotallyGyomeisWife on Chapter 8 Tue 20 Feb 2024 10:13PM UTC
Comment Actions
MyLittleDuckies on Chapter 8 Wed 21 Feb 2024 12:29AM UTC
Last Edited Wed 21 Feb 2024 12:30AM UTC
Comment Actions
lilitrania on Chapter 9 Tue 31 Oct 2023 11:37AM UTC
Comment Actions
viledump on Chapter 9 Tue 31 Oct 2023 07:22PM UTC
Comment Actions
MyLittleDuckies on Chapter 9 Tue 31 Oct 2023 08:37PM UTC
Comment Actions
viledump on Chapter 9 Wed 01 Nov 2023 04:20AM UTC
Comment Actions
viledump on Chapter 9 Fri 03 Nov 2023 08:08PM UTC
Comment Actions
viledump on Chapter 10 Wed 08 Nov 2023 06:26PM UTC
Comment Actions
viledump on Chapter 10 Mon 13 Nov 2023 06:15PM UTC
Comment Actions
Pages Navigation